1

RESTD

CAPT TO MAJ PROM EXAM – NEW

PATTERN

RESTD
 2
RESTD

THE EMERGENCE OF PAKISTAN

(Chaudhry Muhammad Ali)

CHAPTER 1
HISTORICAL BACKGROUND
1. A caste sys has been defined as “one whereby a society is divided into a number of self-
contained and completely segregated units {castes} the mutual relations between which
are ritually determined in a graded scale).
2. A Cow is as sacred as the Brahmin, the highest caste of all.
3. As someone born outside the fold of Hindu society he is in a literal sense and
untouchable.
4. Islam presents a radically different aspect of human thought and action.
5. Divine unity and human brotherhood are the essence of the teachings the messengers
of God have brought to men so that they may live in truth and justice.
6. In Islam there is thus a continual emphasis upon right belief and right action.
7. Starting with Muhammad Bin Qasim’s invasion of Sind in A.D. 712 and ending with
Ahmed Shah Abdali’s victory over the Maratha confederacy in 1761, the Muslims came
to the Indian subcontinent in waves of conquest.
8. Even after the foundation of the Delhi Sultanate by Qutbuddin Aibak in 1206, these
periodic attacks continued.
9. But in the center and the sough only 5 to 15 percent of the population were Muslims.
10. Rajendra Prasad, the first President of the Union of India, stated that “the attitude of the
Muslim conquerors had, one the whole, been one of toleration”.
11. Trade continued to be mainly in Hindu hands.
12. Any article of food and drink touched by a Muslim became impure.
13. A number of movements sprang up within Hinduism which preached monotheism and
emphasized devotion and good works for attaining salvation.
14. The only deliberate effort at combining selected features of Islam and Hinduism was the
ill-fated attempt of Akbar, the Mughal Emperor, to produce a synthetic religion for
political and dynastic reasons.
15. His death not only put an end to the scheme but produced a vigorous reaction, which
reached its zenith under the last great Mughul Emperor , Aurangzeb.
16. The marauding Marathas reduced large parts of the empire to a state of anarchy.
17. The struggle for freedom which led to the uprising of 1857 ended in disaster.

RESTD
 3
RESTD

18. W.W. Hunter, writing in 1871, observed “The Musalmans of India are, and have been for
many years, a source of chronic danger to the British Power in India”.
19. The causes of discontent were many. Practically every measure taken by the British,
from the battle of Plassey in 1757 till the end of the nineteenth century, affected Muslims
for the worse.
20. During Muslim rule, Persian had been the official language,
21. The British did not make any changes until Macaulay wrote his celebrated “Minute on
Education,” which aimed at producing “a class of persons, Indian in blood and colour but
English in taste, in opinion, in Morals and intellect.
22. It was declared, in 1835, that English would from now on be the language used in higher
education, and that Persian would be replaced by English as the official language in
government.
23. They kept aloof, and the result was that during 1880-81, though 36,686 Hindus studied
in English high schools, only 363 Muslim pupils attended.
24. Hindus, on the other hand, were forging ahead in all fields their rise as a landlord class
had been facilitated by the 1793 Permanent Settlement of Bengal and they now formed
a new aristocracy.
25. In 1878, “there were 3155 Hindus as against 57 Muslims holding graduate and post-
graduate degrees.”
26. Under the influence of English political ideas, nationalism became an increasingly
powerful force and served to strengthen Hindu social cohesion.
27. He considered that the first essential step was to restore mutual trust between the British
and the Muslim.
28. Sir Syed’s twofold program, therefore, was modern education and cooperation with the
government, and even in the face of intense opposition from conservative elements he
persisted with it.
29. He founded a scientific society for the promotion of knowledge, opened schools, started
journals like the very influential “Tahib-ul-Akhlaq”, gave a new tone and amplitude to
Urdu literature, compiled and edited books of history, and promoted legislation.
30. But his monumental achievement was the founding of the Mohammedan Anglo-Oriental
College at Aligarh in 1877.
31. He had wanted to build a university, but his wish could only be fulfilled some twenty=two
years after his death.
32. Aligarh College had Hindus on its faculty and was open to Hindu students.

RESTD
 4
RESTD

33. When the Hindus started an agitation in 1867 for the replacement of Urdu, which was
the common heritage of Hindus and Muslims, by Hindi written in the Devnagri script.
34. N 1885 the Indian National Congress was formed on the initiative of the retired British
official, Allan Octavian Hume, and under the guidance of the Viceroy, Lord Dufferin,
35. Sir Syed advised Muslims not to join the Congress, and on the whole his advice was
followed by the Muslim community for a considerable.
36. Nor does Islam allow concentration of wealth.
37. The main demands of the Congress were progressive Indianization of superior services
and extension of representative institutions.
38. Even today the peasant, and also the landlord and the trader, know through personal
experience that the power of the administration to confer favors, withhold rights, inflict
injury, and cause harassment is great.
39. During Lord Ripon’s viceroyalty, representative institutions were introduced in India.
40. The Spell of European supremacy had been broken by the victory of Japan over Russia
in 1905.
41. The Minto-Morley reforms of 1909 accepted the principle of election, but maintained a
majority of appointed members in the central legislature and in the provincial
legislatures, except in Bengal, which had a slight majority of elected members.
42. The demand for separate electorates had been put to the Viceroy Lord Minot in 1906 by
the Muslim deputation led by the Agha Khan.
43. Toward the end of 1906 the All-India Muslim League was formed in Dacca to protect
political and other rights of the Indian Muslims.
44. The Invitation to his historic meeting of Muslim leaders was issued by Nawab Salimullah
Khan of Dacca.
45. The Agha Khan was elected President of the League .
46. The scheme of separate electorates aroused Hindu antagonism in 1909 the Congress
recorded its “disapproval of the creation of separate electorates on the basis of religion”.
47. The caste Hindus were in favor of a joint electorate, but the depressed classes of Hindus
and everything to gain by separate electorates, which would bring their real
representatives into the legislature and make their voices heard.
48. Jinnah was an active lieutenant of Gopal Krishna Gokhale, the leader of the moderates
within the Congress.
49. The moderates believed in social reforms and gradual constitutional progress and
longed for the growth of supracommunal nationalism.

RESTD
 5
RESTD

50. There was a struggle for supremacy in the Congress between the extremists, whose
leader was Bal Gangadhar Tilak and the moderates.
51. Tiluk advocated the attainment of swaraj, or self-rule, through persistent agitation
against the British government.
52. He glorified Shivaji who had fought Aurangzeb and appealed to Hindu chauvinism.
53. In 1905, Viceroy Lord Curzon carried out, mainly for reasons of administrative efficiency,
a readjustment of the boundaries of Bengal.
54. The British government submitted to Hindu agitation, and in 1911 the provincial
reorganization of 1905 was undone and the Muslims of eastern Bengal reverted to their
previous position of subservience to the Hindus.
55. A great “National” victory had been won.
56. The was period saw a rapprochement between the Muslim League and the Congress.
57. Largely through the efforts and Jinnah, who was hailed the ambassador of Hindu-Muslim
unity, an agreement on the scheme of constitutional reforms was reached between the
Congres and the League at their annual sessions held in Lucknow in 1916.
58. The agreement came to be know as the Lucknow Pact.
59. Under the Pact, the Muslim representation was fixed at 33½, 30, 25, 15 and 15 percent
respectively for Bombay, United Provinces, Bihar, Central Provinces, and Madras.
60. Wars are periods of rapid change.
61. The British government felt in necessary to respond to Indian aspirations and on August
20.1917, Edwin Montague, the Secretary of State for India, made an announcement of
British policy in the House of Commons.
62. In the middle of 1918 Montague and Lord Chelmsford, the Viceroy, published a joint
“Report on Indian Constitutional Reforms,” which formed the basis of the Government of
India Act, 1919.
63. This Act established legislative councils in the provinces with a system of diarchy.
64. The match that ignited the great conflagration was security legislation passed in 1919
and know as the Rowlait Acts.
65. These Acts gave arbitrary powers of arrest and trial without jury to the government, and,
naturally, aroused, widespread indignation.
66. A number of protest meetings were held all over the country.
67. One such meeting in Jallianwala Bagh in Amritsar, was drowned in blood by General
Dyer who opened fire on the crowed without warning.

RESTD
 6
RESTD

68. Within a few minutes 379 persons were killed and over 1200 wounded-unofficial
estimates put the number of casualities still higher.
69. The international event was the Treaty of Serves whose harsh terms made it clear that
the victorious Allies were not content whit the dismemberment of the Ottoman Empire,
but were determined to destroy even the Turkish homeland.
70. The dynamic leadership of the All brothers0Maulana Muhammad Ali and Shokat Ali –
Abdul Kalam Azad, and other religious leaders stirred the deep disquiet of Muslim
masses into the white-hot glow of intense emotion, which became reckless of all
sacrifices.
71. That more than eighteen thousand Muslims left hearth and home and migrated to
Afghanistan in religious protest against British policy towards the caliphate indicates the
temper of the time.
72. Gandhi returned to india in 1915, he was then a follower of Gokhale and by no means an
extremist.
73. He supported the British was effort and acted as a recruiting agent for some time.
74. Although he took a leading part n organizing hartals, or strikes, against the Rowlatt Acts
in 1919.
75. He assumed the garb of poverty and was known, and almost worshiped as the
Mahatma, or the great soul.
76. As part of the program for boycott of educational institutions recognized by the
government the Ali brothers laid siege to the Muslim university at Aligarh.
77. They did not succeed in closing it down, but a number of teachers and students broke
away to found a rival, the Muslim National University, which was later transferred to
Delhi and became known as the Jamia Millia Islamia.
78. The Hindu university at Benaras, which was under the protective care of the orthodox
Hindu leader Pandit Malaviya, did not undergo a similar ordeal.
79. Elections to the central and provincial legislatures, which were held in November, 1920,
were boycotted by the Congress, but about a third of the electorate voted.
80. The Unionist party in the Punjab, led by Sir Fazli Husain, and the Justice Party of non-
Brahmins in Madras formed stable ministers.
81. On February 5, 1922 at Chauri Chaura, a village in the Forakhpur district, United
Provinces, their was troubled between the police and a procession.
82. The Mob set fire to the police station and twenty two policemen were burnt alive.
83. Gandhi was tried on a charge of sedition and sentenced to six years imprisonment.

RESTD
 7
RESTD

84. The caliphate, for which they had struggled so sincerely , was to receive its death blow,
not at the hands of enemies but from a Muslim hero, Mustafa Kamal Ataturk.
85. Under his leadership the Turks determined to make a new start as a modern nation and
decided to unburden themselves of the load of the caliphate.
86. Gandhi and most of the other leaders were released from jail by 1924, but hey stepped
into a different world.
87. In the Punjab, Sir Fazli Hussain’s orders to reserve 40 percent of the seats for Muslims
in some government colleges and provincial government services aroused a storm of
controversy in the Hindus press.
88. This Bengal Pact, which was accepted by the Bengal Swarajya Party in December,
1923, was rejected by the Congress next year.
89. In November 1927, the British government appointed a commission under the
chairmanship of Sir John Simon to report on India’s future constitutional progress.
90. An all-parties conference, which was convened in February, 1928, appointed a
committee to determine the principles for India’s constitutions. The committee was
presided over by Motialal Nehru, the Leader of the Swarajya Party.
91. AT the all-parties national convention held in Calcutta, in December 1928 to consider t
the Nehru Report, Jinnah proposed three main amendments one thir representation for
the Muslims in the central legislature, Muslim representation in the Punjab and Bengal
on the basis of population for ten years, and residuary powers for the provinces and not
for the central government.
92. ‘These amendments show’ writes Dr. B.R. Ambedkar, “that the gulf between the Hindus
and Muslims was not in any way a wide one. Yet there was no desire to bridge the
same.
93. An all-parties Muslim conference held in Delhi under the chairmanship of the Agha Khan
in January 1929, demanded the retention of separate electorates.
94. The fourteen points, formulated by Jinnah, give a fair idea of the state of Muslim opinion
at that time.
95. In October 1929, Viceroy Lord Irwin, after consultation with the Labour government,
which was then in power in England, made a twofold declaration.
96. The year 1930 opened with a threat by the Congress of mass civil disobedience under
Gandhi’s personal command.
97. The reason given was the failure of the British government to implement the Nehru
Report during 1929, the abolition of the salt tax was made the focal point of the agitation.

RESTD
 8
RESTD

98. Under the Gandhi-Irwin Pact, a minor concession for the manufacture of salt in certain
coastal areas was made, political prisoners were released, and the movement was
called off.
99. In December, 1930 the Muslim League held its annual session in Allahabad.
100. The Muslim League at that time was not remarkable for its activity, and the session
would have passed unnoticed but for the unusual fact that it was presided over by a poet
who delivered an unusual address.
101. In 1920, Muhammad Abdul Qadir Bilgrami had advocated “The division of the sub-
continent between the Hindus and Muslims even giving a list of the districts
fundamentally not too different from the present boundaries of East and West Pakistan.
102. Three years later (in 1923), in his evidence before the Frontier Enquiry Committee,
Sardar Gul Muhammad Khan of Dera Ismail Khan had proposed a partition of India by
which the Muslims were to get the area from Peshawar to Agra.
103. In 1924, Lala Lajpat Raj, one of the founders of the Hindu Mahasabha, had suggested
the partition of India between Hindus and Muslims.
104. Chaudhary Rehmat Ali, a student at Cambridge, England, coined the word “Pakistan” in
which P Stands for the Punjab, A for Afghania, (North-West Frontier Province), K for
Kashmir, S for Sind and Tan for Baluchistan. The Word itself means “the land of the
pure”.
105. Except for the Muslim youth, few paid attention to Iqbal’s words at that time.
106. All eyes were turned toward London where the first session of the Round Table
Conference began in November 1930.
107. Finally, in 1932 Prime Minister Ramsay MacDonald made what is called the Communal
Award.
108. In the Central legislature, one third of the British Indian seats was reserved for Muslims.
109. But in the two key provinces the Punjab and Bengal, the Award reduced the Muslim
Majority to a minority.
110. One Gandhi’s return from London after the second Round Table conference the
Congress renewed the civil disobedience campaign.
111. The new Viceroy, Lord Willingdon, struck hard. The movement collapsed within a few
months and was formally called off in 1934.
The deliberations of the Round Table Conference resulted in the |Government in India
Act 1935.

RESTD
 9
RESTD

112. The Act came into force on April 1, 1937.

113. Congress won a great electoral victory, it obtained a majority in five provinces, and was
able to form governments in seven out of eleven provinces after securing an informal
assurance from the Viceroy that the governors would not ordinarily use their special
powers.
114. The reason for this was that for a number of years it had been divided into factions.
Jinnah who in disgust at the state of Indian politics, had decided (in 1931) to settle for a
time in England, was persuaded to return to India and take charge of the Muslim League
a little more than a year before the elections.
115. In the Punjab, Sir Fazli Husain had organized the Unionist party which comprised
Muslims and some Hindus and Sikhs.
116. The Unionist party secured a majority in the elections under Fazli Husain’s successor Sir
Sikandar Hayat Khan.
117. In Bengal, Fazlul Haq had formed the Krishak Proja party and was able to head a
coalition government which included the Muslim League and the Independent Scheduled
caste group.
118. Sind was absorbed in the local game of factional politics, and the 35 Muslim members of
the provincial assembly had been divided into four groups
119. In the North-West Frontier Province, the Red Shirts led by Abdul Ghaffar Khan had
aligned themselves with the Congress and had won 19 of the 50 seats in the provincial
assembly.
120. Only the provinces where the Muslims were in the minority was the Muslim League in a
better position.
121. In Assam it won a fair number of seats, and a coalition ministry under Sir Muhammad
Saadullah was formed.
122. No Muslim was elected from the United Provinces on the Cognress Ticket.
123. In the discussions that proceeded the 1935 Act, Muslims had demanded a statutory
provision for the inclusion of Muslim representatives in the ministries, and had been
reassured in general terms by Hindu and British statement.
124. Of 143 members of the All-India Congress committee in 1936 only 6 were Muslims,
three from the North-West Frontier Provinces, one from the United Provinces, and one
from Bihar the sixth was Abdul Kalam Azad a formed president of the Congress.

RESTD
 10
RESTD

125. Jawaharlal Nehru declared in March 1937, “There are only two forces in India today
British imperialism and Indian nationalism as represented by the Congress”.
126. Symbols of Hindu raj and Hindu culture were adopted in government institutions paid for
by all taxpayers. Vidya Mandirs, Hindu temples of learning, were opened.
127. The Session of the Muslim League held in Lucknow in October 1937, saw a closing of
Muslim Ranks.
128. The League appointed a committee, under the chairmanship of the Raja of Pirpur, to
inquire into Muslim grievances in the provinces ruled by the Congress party.
129. Other inquiries, such as the Shareef Report in Bihar, came to the same conclusion.
130. A resolution passed by the Sind Muslim League conference at Karachi in October 1938,
declared that “the evolution of the single united India and United Indian nation inspired
by common aspiration (was) impossible of realization.
131. “A Confederacy of India,” by Kifayat Ali, written under the pseudonym “A Punjabi”.
132. It is of some interest to note that the British statesman John Bright, in a speech in the
House of commons on June 24, 1858, had proposed dividing India into five presidencies
each of which.

RESTD
 11
RESTD

CHAPTER 2
THE PAKISTAN RESOLUTION
1. At the outbreak of the Second World War, the Viceroy, Lord Linlithgow, proclaimed
India’s entry into it without prior consultation with the Central Assembly or the main
political parties.
2. In the Punjab and Bengal, whose chief ministers owed allegiance to the Muslim League,
provincial governments cooperated with defense authorities, especially the Punajb,
which was known as the sword-arm of India.
3. Thereupon declared December 22, 1939, as a Day of Deliverance and Thanksgiving in
token of relief from the “tyranny, oppression and injustice” of the congress regime, and
the Muslims celebrated the day with acclaim.
4. The Hindus, who formed three fourths of the population, were the next strongest.
5. In his struggle against the British and other opponents, Gandhi used what he called “soul
force” to bend the other party’s will to his own.
6. He was the greatest practitioner of the art of moral warfare the modern world has seen.
7. For instance, when, despite Gandhi’s opposition, Subhas Chandra Bose was reelected
President of the Congress in 1939, Gandhi made it impossible for him to continue in
office and forced him to resign within a few months.
8. He strove to remove the age-old curse of untouchability from Hindu society and to
ameliorate the condition of the Depressed Classes.
9. But when they were granted political rights by the British in the form of separate
electorates, he staked his life by a fast unto death in order to deny them this elementary
what some called blackmail and others soul force.
10. It is not surprising that Ambedkar called him “the greatest enemy the untouchables have
even had in India”.
11. The Muslims were the weakest of the three parties involved in the struggle.
12. They numbered 100 million, but were only one fourth of the total population of the
subcontinent.
13. The Muslim League had neither the cohesion nor the discipline of the Congress.
14. Jinnah was in many ways the exact opposite of Gandhi.
15. On March 23, 1940, at the historic session of the Muslim League held in Lahore, the
resolution that came to be known as the Pakistan Resolution was passed.
16. The resolutions was moved by the Bengal Chief Minister, A.K. Fazlul Haq, and was
seconded by Chaudhry Khaliquzzaman and others.

RESTD
 12
RESTD

17. This was the famous two-nation theory which aroused so much controversy.
18. Jinnah inspired unreserved confidence among the Muslims for his integrity, courage
statesmanship, and sincerity.
19. In a speech at Patna in December, 1938, he said, “of the intelligentsia of the Muslims
who were in 1935, in the forefront of what is called political life, most I do not say all –
were careerists.
20. They chose their place according to their convenience, either in the bureaucratic camp
or in the other camp that is the Congress camp.
21. In a speech in Delhi in April 1943, he visualized Pakistan as having “a people’s
government” and warned “Landlords and capitalists who have flourished flourished at
our expense by a system which is so vicious, which is so wicked, which makes men so
selfish that it is difficult to reason with them… (not to forget) the lesson of Islam… The
constitution and the government will be what the people will decide.”
22. Those who rallied to his call and spread his message among the masses were the
students, the idealistic youth, and the rising middle class.
23. The students of the Aligarh Muslim University and other educational institutions were
active workers in the cause of Pakistan.
24. Muslim Students Federation under the leadership of Hamid Nizami Played a significant
part in changing the climate of opinion.
25. A signal service was rendered by the Muslim newspapers in propagating the idea of
Pakistan.
26. The most prominent daily in English was the Dawn, in Urdu, Nawai Waqt, and in Bengal,
Azad.
27. Under the leadership of Maulana Shabbir Ahmed Usmani of Deoband, the Jamiatul
Ulama-i-Islam consisting of Ulama in favor of Pakistan was organized in opposition to
the Jamiatul Ulama-i-Hind a body of Ulama aligned with the Congress.
28. By April, 1940, the phase of the “phony war” was over.
29. With the fal of France, England stood alone against the victorious arms of the Axix
power.
30. On August 8, 1940 the Viceroy, Lord Linlighgow, made an offer on behalf of the British
government to expand the Executive Council Immediately by including representatives
of political parties, and to set up a War Advisory Council containing representatives of
Indian states and of other interests.

RESTD
 13
RESTD

31. At this time, C. Rajagopalachari made the “sporting offer” that the prime minister in the
national government could be chosen from the Muslim League.
32. In October, 1940, Gandhi launched his “individual civil disobedience” compaign under
which selected individuals were to court arrest.
33. By March, 1942, it appeared to many in India that the Japanese could overrun India with
the same ease with which they had conquered southeast Asia.
34. Subhas Chandra Bose, who had escaped from India in 1940, was organizing the Indian
National Army with Indian prisoners of war captured by the Japanese.
35. It was because of these circumstances that the British government sent a prominent
member of the war cabinet, Sir Stafford Cripps, to India with a draft declaration for
discussion with Indian leaders.
36. He arrived in Delhi on March 23, 1642, had discussions with Indian leaders, and
departed a fortnight later without achieving anything.
37. Under Raja Gopalachar leadership the Congress members in the Madras legislature
passed a resolution in April, 1642, recommending acceptance of Pakistan in Principle.
38. These ideas were formally adopted by the All-India congress committee meeting held at
Bombay, on August 8, 1942, in the famous Quit India resolution, which demanded the
“withdrawal of the British Power from India”.
39. To Gandhi’s slogan “Quit India” Jinnah replied with “Divide and Quit”.
40. In February 1943, Gandhi went on a twenty-one day fast.
41. For a time it looked as if his life was in danger and great pressure was put on the
Viceroy to release him unconditionally.
42. Three members of the Viceroy’s Executive Council resigned on this issue, but the
government stood firm and Gandhi pulled through.
43. When Lord Wavell succeeded Lord Linlithgow as Viceroy in the fall of 1943, the tide of
war was turning in favor of the Allies.
44. The worst sufferer was Bengal, which was ravaged by a severe famine in 1943.
45. Peasants who had been induced by high prices to sell rice died in millions, 1,873,749
persons, it was officially admitted, had died of starvation.
46. In May, 1944 Gandhi was released on medical ground, soon afterward he wrote the
Viceroy, offering renunciation of civil disobedience.
47. Hindu-Muslim differences, talks took place between Gandhi and Jinnah in September
1944.

RESTD
 14
RESTD

48. In May, 1945, Viceroy Lord Wavell decided to hold a political conference to which he
invited Congress and League representatives.
49. The conference began in Simla on June 25, and lasted till July 14, but it failed to achieve
anything.
50. When the Premier of the Punjab, Sir Sikandar Hayat, died in 1942, he was succeeded
by Khizar Hayat Tiwana, who lacked the suppleness of his predecessor and soon fell out
with Jinah over the status of the Muslim League in the Punjab.
51. In his stand against the Muslim League, Khizr Hayat Tiwana was supported by feudal
Muslim elements, the Hindus and Sikhs of the Unionist party, and the British governor,
Sir Bertrand Glancy.
52. The Second World War came to an end with the surrender of Japan on August 15, 1945.
53. The British general election at the end of July resulted in a large Labour majority.
54. Conservatives like Lord Linlithgow had emphasized it as much as had the soldier-
statesman Lord Wavell.
55. The Congress leaders expected even stronger support from the Labour party on this
issue, which was dividing the Congress and the Muslim League.
56. The results showed a decisive victory for Pakistan, the League won all the Muslim seats
in the central assembly and 446 out of a total 495 Muslim seats in the provincial
assemblies.
57. The Congress won a similar victory in the Hindu constituencies and came to power in all
the provinces that had a Hindu constituencies and came to power in all the provinces
that had a Hindu majority.
58. In Bengal, the Muslim League won 113 out of total of 119 Muslim seats and was able to
form a ministry with Husain Shaheed Suhrawardy as Chief Minister in the Punjab, the
Muslim League captured 79 out of 86 Muslim seats.
59. In Sind, a Muslim League ministry was formed. Only in the North-West Frontier Province
did the League fall short of the majority by winning only 17 out of a total of 36 Muslim
seats, and the Congress formed a ministry under Dr Khan Sahib.
60. The Sikh sect had been founded in the sixteenth century by Guru Nanak, a Hindu
mystic, who under the influence of Islam had preached the Unit of God and the
brotherhood of man.
61. In the first half of the nineteenth century, Ranjit Singh carved out a Sikh Kingdom in the
Punjab, which after his death, was lost to the British in 1849.
62. Although Sikhs were to be found all over India, their home was in the Punjab.

RESTD
 15
RESTD

63. They numbered five and a half millions and formed 13.2 percent of the population of the
Punjab.
64. In the Punjab assembly and in government service they were allowed 20 percent
representation.
65. They owned a high proportion of the most fertile land in the Punjab, particularly in the
canal irrigated colonies of Lyallpur and Montgumery, and were well represented in the
Indian Army.
66. N 1946 their leadership was in the hands of the impetuous Tara Singh, a Hindu
converted to Sikhism, and his financial supporter, Baldav Singh, whose economic
interests tied him to Hindu India.
67. The Elections of 1946 had been fought on the issue of Pakistan and the Muslims of the
Punjab had given a clear verdict in its favor.
68. In fact, the original scheme for Pakistan, put forward by Iqbal in December 1930, had
contemplated the separation of Ambala division.
69. Sikh leaders were invited to the convention of Muslim League legislators held in April
1946, and though some of them attended, nothing came of these parleys, and the Sikhs
cast their lot with the Congress.

RESTD
 16
RESTD

CHAPTER 8
THE PARTITION PLAN
1. Having obtained the acceptance of the Indian Leaders to an outline of the revised
partition plan, including an early date for the transfer of power, Mountbatten left for
London on May 18, 1947, accompanied by V.M Memon.
2. The British Cabinet approved the plan, and Mountbatten on his return to Delhi put it to a
conference of even Leaders – Nehru, Patel, Kripalani (then President of the Congress),
Jinnah, Liaquat Ali Khan, Abdur Rab Nishtar, and Baldev Singh on June 2.
3. The plan had been cast in the form of a statement to be issued by His Majesty’s
Government on June 3 1947.
4. In the Punjab, Bengal, and Sind the decision was left to the provincial assemblies.
5. Since it had been arranged that the British government would announce the plan in the
House of Commons on June 3, Mountbatten.
6. One was that in case the Indian Union decided to go out of the Commonwealth Pakistan
should not be allowed to remain in it.
7. The conference was resumed on the morning of June 3, and Mountbatten was able to
announce the written acceptance of the Congress and the Sikhs.
8. At the meeting Mount batten circulated a thirty-page memorandum on “The
Administrative Consequences of Partition”.
9. Attlee announced the plan in the House of Commons on June 3, 1947.
10. Independence through Dominion Status is complete and the different administrations are
at liberty to opt out of the Commonwealth whenever they please.
11. On June 9, the Council of the All-India Muslim League met in Delhi and passed a
resolution in favor of the plan.
12. On June 14, the All-India Congress Committee passed a resolution accepting the plan,
although it regretted “the secession of some parts of the country.
13. Govind Ballabh Pant moved the resolution, Abdul Kalam Azad and some others
opposed it.
14. The Speech was typical of the man pointed, brutally frank, unemotional. Gandhi threw
his support in favor of the resolution and it was carried by 157 votes to 29 with 32
abstentions.
15. This was not surprising since the plan had been drafted by a Hindu official, V.P Memon,
under the instructions of Nehru, and had been approved by the latter in draft.

RESTD
 17
RESTD

16. But the most serious handicap for Pakistan was in the time allowed for the
implementation of the plan – seventy-two days.

RESTD
 18
RESTD

ATLAS OF PAKISTAN
1. Official name of Pakistan Islamic Republic of Pakistan.
2. Father of nation Quaid e Azam Muhammad Ali Jinnah (1876 - 1948).
3. Nation Poet of Pakistan is Allama Mohammad Iqbal (1877 - 1938).
4. Capital of Pakistan is Islamabad.
5. Area of Pakistan is 796096 km2.
6. Population of Pakistan is 207774520 (Census 2017).
7. Administrative setup of Pakistan 4 x Provinces :-
a. Khyber Pakhtunkhwa.
b. Punjab.
c. Sindh.
d. Baluchistan.
e. Gilgit-Baltistan.
f. Tribal belt (FATA).
g. Azad Kashmir.
8. Religion of Pakistan is Islam.
9. Annual per Capita of Pakistan is Rs 186,300 (US $1620) approximately.
10. Currency of Pakistan is Pak Rupee.
11. Imports of Pakistan industrial equipment, chemicals, Vehicles, steel, iron-ore,
petroleum, Edible oil, Pulses and Tea.
12. Exports of Pakistan Cotton, Textile good, Rice, leather, items, Carpet, Sports
Good, Handicrafts, Fish and Fruits.
13. Language of Pakistan Urdu (National), English (Official).
14. Literacy rate of Pakistan 58% (69% Male, 44% female), 2007 – 08.
15. Parliament of Pakistan, 2 x Houses:-
a. Senate (Upper house) – 100 members.
b. Nation Assembly (Lower House) – 272 general seats, 60 women seats
and 10 Non-Muslim seats.
16. National Flag of Pakistan Dark Green with White Vertical Bar, a white crescent
and five-pronged star in the middle.
17. National Anthem of Pakistan approved in Aug, 1954:-

RESTD
 19
RESTD

a. Verses written by – Hafeez Jallundhri.

b. Tune composed by – Ahmad G. Chagla.
c. Duration 80s.
18. Official Map of Pakistan was drawn by Mian Mahmood Alam Suharwardy (1920 –
1999).
19. National flower of Pakistan is Jasmine.
20. National Tree of Pakistan is Deodar (Cedrus Deodara).
21. National Animal of Pakistan is Markhor.
22. National Bird of Pakistan is Chakor (Red Legged Partridge).
23. Flora of Pakistan:-
a. Pine.
b. Oak.
c. Poplar.
d. Deodar.
e. Mulberry.
24. Founa of Pakistan:-
a. The Pheasant.
b. Leopard.
c. Deer.
d. Ibex.
e. Chinkara.
f. Black buck.
g. Neelgai.
h. Markhor.
i. Mareo Polo Sheep.
j. Green Turtles.
k. River & Sea Fish.
l. Crocodile & Waterfowls.
25. Popular sports of Pakistan Cricket, Hockey, Football & Squash.
26. Tourists resorts of Pakistan Murree, Ziarat, Hunza, Swat, Kaghan, Chitral and
Gilgit.

RESTD
 20
RESTD

27. Archeological Sites of Pakistan Mohenjo Daro, Harappa, Taxila, Kot Dijji, Mehr
Garh, Takht Bhai and Katas Raj.
28. Major crops of Pakistan are Cotton, wheat, Rice and sugarcane.
29. Industry of Pakistan are Textile, Cement, Fertilizers, Steel, Sugar, Electric Goods
and Ship Building.
30. Energy Resources of Pakistan:-
a. Major Resources
(1) Electricity (Thermal, Hydel & Nuclear).
(2) Oil.
(3) Coal.
(4) Liquified Petroleum Gas.
b. Power Generating Capacity is 19,754 MW (2008 – 09).
31. Transport & Communication of Pakistan:-
a. Total length of roads – 258,350 km.
b. Railway Network – 7,791 Km.
c. Railway Stations – 781.
d. International Airlines:-
(1) 55 International and 38 Domestic Stations with a fleet of 44
plane(s).
(2) Major Airports – 8 (Islamabad, Lahore, Karachi, Quetta, Peshawar,
Multan, Faisalabad and Gwadar).
32. Seaports of Pakistan: 3 x International ports (Karachi, Bin Qasim & Gwadar).
33. Fish Harbors / Mini Ports: Manora & Keti Bandar.
34. Border Geography
a. China. Pakistan borders China in the Northeast. Length is 599 km.
It is known is MacDonald Line.
b. Afghanistan. Pak-Afghan border Passes through an inhospitable
terrain of Hindukush and Suleman Ranges and stretches over 2611 km. It
is called the Durand Line.
c. Iran. Total length is 909 kms. Its is called the Goldsmith Line.

RESTD
 21
RESTD

d. India. There are 4 distinct types of border between India and Pakistan.
Total length is 2100 km.
(1) Line of Actual Contact (LOAC). Starting from Siachin Glacier in
the North till NJ-9842. It is violable and not recognized by any
international or bilateral Agreement.
(2) Line of Control (LOC). It is the dividing line between Azad
Kashmir and Indian held Kashmir. Starting from NJ-9842 in the
North it runs down to Thaku Chak in the South with a total length of
about 861 kms. The line is recognized through Simla Agreement.
(3) Working Boundary (WB). From Thaku Chak in the NW upto Abhial
Dogaran in the East, for approximately 202 kms. This is the line to
the north of which lies the disputed territory of Kashmir and to its
south the Pakistan territory. It is a de-facto border between India
and Pakistan till resolution of the Kashmir issue.
(4) International Border (IB). it runs south till Arabian Sea over a total
length of 2100 km. This is an undisputed Internationally recognized
part of the border except the Sir Creek area to the Extreme south. It
was demarcated after the Simla Pact in 1972, which is also known
as Radcliffe line.
35. Mountains. Pakistan is home of many mountains above 7000 meters (22,970
ft).
Five of the fourteen eight thousanders (peaks above 8000 m) are in Pakistan.
a. The highest of which is K2 (8611 m), the second highest peak on earth.
b. The highest peak of Himaliyan range in Pakistan is Nanga Parbat (8,126
m). which is the ninth highest peak of the world.
c. Karakoram, Himalaya, Hindu Kush, Suleiman Mountains, Salt Range,
Toba Kakar, Makran and Kirthar are major mountain ranges of Pakistan.
36. Mountain Passes. Northern and Western sides of Pakistan are covered by
huge
mountains. They have many mountain passes out of which the important ones are: -

RESTD
 22
RESTD

a. Karakoram Pass. Connects Pakistan with China. Its is the part of

trading route known as the Silk Route. Which links China and other parts
of Asia with Europe.
b. Khunjrab Pass. Connects northern border of Gilgit-Baltistan with
Xinjiang region of China.
c. Darkot Pass. Connects Broghil valley in Chitral to Ghizer valley in
Gilgit-Baltistan.
d. Shandur Pass. Connects Gupis Gilgit with Chitral.
e. Dorah Pass. Connects Badakshan in Afghanistan with Chitral in Pakistan.
f. Babusar Pass. Connects Kaghan valley with Chilas.
g. Khyber Pass. Connects Peshawar with Jalalabad in Afghanistan.
Where it links to a route leading to Kabul. Widest and lowest of all
mountain passes.
h. Tochi Pass. Ancient route along Tochi river connecting Miranshah in
NWA with the Orgun City of Paktika province (Bannu with the Gazni).
i. Gomal Pass. Midway between Khyber Pass and Bolan Pass.
j. Khojak Pass. Connects Qila Abdullah with Chaman in the province
of Baluchistan. It is one of the two passes that connects the Middle East
with the Indian Subcontinent, the other is Khyber Pass.
k. Harnai Pass. Connects Ziarat to Harnai.
l. Bolan Pass. Connects Jacobabad and Sibbi to Quetta.
m. Lak Pass. Connects Kalat with Quetta.
n. Gonshero Pass. Connects district Chagi with the Nimroz province of
Afghanistan.
37. Bulges / Salients / Enclaves
a. Kashmir Sector
(1) Neelum
(a) Burzil Pass.
(b) Keran Salient.
(c) Jura Bulge.
(2) Tanghdar Salient. Between Jura Bulge and Lipa Bowl.

RESTD
 23
RESTD

(3) Lipa Bowl (Hattian). Between Tanghdar Salient and Uri

Salient.
(4) Uri Salient. Between Lipa Bowl and Bedori Bulge.
(5) Bedori Bulge (Haveli). Between Uri Salient and Mendhar
Enclave.
(6) Mendhar Enclave. Between Bedori Bulge and Nikial Bulge.
(7) Nikial Bulge (Kotli). Between Mendhar Enclave and Jhangar
Enclave.
(8) Jhangar Enclave. Between Kotli ad Bhimber.
b. Desert Sector
(1) Islamgarh.
(2) Kishangarh.
(3) Khokhrapar.
(4) Gadra.
(5) Nagarparkar.
38. Rivers, Major Dams and Barrages
a. Major Rivers
(1) Indus. The total length of the river is 3180 km. It is Pakistan’s
longest river.
(2) Jhelum. A tributary of the Chenab River with a total length of
about 725 km.
(3) Sutlej. Sutlej is 550 km long and also called as the Red
River.
(4) Chenab. Nearly 960 km long.
(5) Ravi. Nearly 720 km long.
b. Rivers of KP (8)
(1) Indus.
(2) Kabul.
(3) Swat.
(4) Chitral.
(5) Zhob.

RESTD
 24
RESTD

(6) Panjkora.
(7) Gomal.
(8) Kurram.
c. Rivers of Balochistan (7)
(1) Hangol.
(2) Nari.
(3) Bolan.
(4) Dasht.
(5) Mula.
(6) Rakhshan.
(7) Pishin lora.
d. Rivers of Punjab (5)
(1) Jhelum.
(2) Chenab.
(3) Ravi.
(4) Sutlej.
(5) Beas.
e. Rivers of Sindh (4)
(1) Hub.
(2) Mir Nadi.
(3) Arl Nadi.
(4) Malir Nadi.
f. Panjnad. Formed by successive confluence of the five Rivers of
Punjab. Combined stream joins Indus River at Mithankot.
g. Doabs. Tracts of land lying between the confluent rivers of Punjab
region of Pakistan and India (the Indus Basin) has a distinct name, said to
have been coined by Raja Todar Mal, a minister of Mughal Emperor
Akbar.
(1) Sind Sagar Doab. Between the Indus and Jhelum River.
(2) Jech Doab (Chaj). Between Jhelum and Chenab River.
(3) Rechna Doab. Between Chenab and Ravi River.

RESTD
 25
RESTD

(4) Bari Doab (Majha). Between Ravi and Beas River.

(5) Bist Doab (Jullundur or Doaba). Between Beas and Sutlej
River.
h. River Corridors
(1) Ravi – Chenab Corridor.
(2) Ravi – Beas Corridor.
(3) South of Sutlej.
39. Canal system
a. Indus River
(1) Chashma barrage in Mianwali District.
(2) Taunsa barrage in Muzaffargarh district, Punjab.
(3) Jinnah Barrage is near Kalabagh, Pakistan.
(4) Guddu Barrage is near Kashmoor in Sindh.
(5) Sukkar Barrage is near Sukkar city, Sindh.
(6) Kotri Barrage is near Hyderabad, Sindh.
(7) Ghazi Brotha Barrage is used for irrigation and flood control
purposes
b. Jhelum River
(1) Rasul Barrage is between Jehlum District and Mandi Bahauddin
District, Punjab.
c. Chenab River
(1) Marala headworks is situated near the city Gujrat and Sialkot in
Punjab.
(2) Khanki Headworks is situated in Gujranwala District, Punjab.
(3) Qadirabad Headworks is in Hafiz Abad District, Punjab.
(4) Trimmu Barrage is in Jhang District, Punjab.
(5) Panjnad Barrage is the last Barrage at downstream confluence
point of River Sutlej.
d. Ravi River
(1) Balloki Headworks in Punjab.
(2) Sidhnai Barrage.

RESTD
 26
RESTD

e. Sutlej River
(1) Suleimanki Headworks in Punjab.
(2) Islam Barrage, located about six miles north-west of Hasilpur town.
(3) Mailsi barrage and syphon is constructed on Sutlej river to control
water for flood and irrigation purposes.

40. Deserts
a. Thal Desert. Situated in Punjab. Total area is 11,000 Km 2. It is vast area
mainly between the Jhelum and Sindh rivers near the Pothohar Plateau.
(1) Cholistan Desert. Also locally known as Rohi. Total area is
26,300 km2. It adjoins the Thar Desert extending over to Sindh and
into India.
(2) Thar Desert. Pakistan’s largest desert, lies mostly in the Indian
state of Rajasthan. Total area is of 320,000 kms 2 out of which
80,000 kms2 lies in Pakistan. It covers eastern Sindh province and
the southeastern portion of Punjab province.
(3) Kharan Desert. Mountainous desert located in Kharan District,
Baluchistan. Total area is 20,000 km2.
(4) Rann of Kutch. Flat offshoot of Thar desert in the south west
along the Arabian sea remains dry from Oct – Apr becomes marshy
after rains or monsoons.
b. Coastal Area. Pakistan’s coastline is washed by the warm waters of
the North Arabian sea and extends from the Dasht River in Gwadar Bay at
the Iranian border to the eastern edge of the Indus Delta at Sir Creek at
the Indian Border. Total length of shoreline is about 1058 km.
41. Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ). It stretches from the baseline out to 200
nautical miles (nmi) from its coast. On 19 Mar 2015. UN’s Commission on Limits
of Continental Shelf (UNCLCS) completed its review and accepted Pakistan’s
claim for extension of its continental shelf limits, thereby extending Pakistan’s
sea limits from 200 Nautical miles to 350 nautical miles.

RESTD
 27
RESTD

42. Communication Infrastructure

a. Roads and Highways
(1) Peshawar – Karachi Motorway.
(a) M-1 - Peshawar – Islamabad.
(b) M-2 - Islamabad – Pindi Bhattian.
(c) M-4 - Pindi Bhattian – Multan.
(d) M-5 - Multan – Sukkur.
(e) M-6 - Sukkur – Hyderabad.
(f) M-9 - Hyderabad – Karachi.
(2) N-5 - Karachi – Lahore – Peshawar – Torkham.
(3) N-5A - Khanewal – Bahawalpur (Lodhran).
(4) N-10 - Makran – Coastal; Liari – Omara – Gwadar – Jiwani.
(5) N-15 - Mansehra – Naran – Jalkhad – Chilas.
(6) N-25 - Karachi – Kalat – Quetta – Chaman (Partial western
alignment).
(7) N-35 - Hassanabdal – Thakot – Khunjrab (Partial Northern
route).
(8) N-40 - Lakpass – Dalbadin – Taftan.
(9) N-45 - Nowshera – Dir – Chitral.
(10) N-55 - Kotri – Larkana – D.G Khan – Peshawar.
(11) N-65 - Sukkur – Sibi – Quetta.
(12) N-70 - Multan – D.G Khan – Loralai – Qila Saifullah.
(13) N-75 - Islamabad – Satra Mile – Lower Topa – Kohala.
(14) N-80 - Tarnol – Fateh Jang – Jand – Khushal Garh – Kohat.
(15) N-90 - Khwazakhela – Besham.
(16) N-95 - Chakdara – Kalam.
(17) N-105 - Larkana – Naudero – Lakhi.
(18) N-110 - Gharo – Keti Bunder.
(19) N-120 - Hyderabad – Mirpurkhas – Umarkot – Khokhrapar
(Indian Border).
(20) N-125 - Taxila – Khanpur – Haripur.

RESTD
 28
RESTD

(21) N-155 - Larkana – Moenjo Daro Road up to Airport.

(22) N-255 - Larkana – Nasirabad via Rasheed wagon.
(23) N-305 - Sarkand – Shaheed Benazirabad.
(24) N-455 - Larkana – Kamber – Shahdadkot.
(25) N-655 - Ratodero – Naudero Road incl International Road of
about 2 km.
(26) S-1 - KKH – Skardu Road (Strategic Road).
(27) S-2 - Kohala – Muzaffarabad.
(28) S-3 - Muzaffarabad – Chakothi.
(29) M-3 - Lahore Abdul Hakim.
(30) M-7 - Dadu – Hub.
(31) M-8 - Ratedaro – Gwadar.
(32) M-10 - Karachi Northern Bypass.
(33) M-11 - Sialkot – Lahore.
(34) M-14 - Hakla – D.I Khan.
(35) Hazara Motorway - Hasan Abdal – Mansehra.
43. China Pakistan Economic Corridor
a. Northern alignment -
b. Western alignment -
c. Eastern alignment -
d. Central alignment -
44. Miscellaneous Geographical Information
a. The Solar System. In 2005, Eris, a dwarf planet in the scattered disc
which is 27% more massive than Pluto was discovered. This led the
international Astronomical Union (IAU) to define the term “Planet” formally
in 2006, during their 26 General Assembly. That definition excl Pluto and
reclassified it as a “dwarf planet”.
b. Dwarf planets
(1) Pluto.
(2) Eris.
(3) Ceres.

RESTD
 29
RESTD

c. Phases of Moon
(1) New moon.
(2) Waxing Crescent.
(3) First Quarter Moon.
(4) Waxing Gibbous.
(5) Full Moon.
(6) Waning Gibbous.
(7) Last Quarter Moon.
(8) Waning Crescent.
d. Lunar Cycle is 29.53 days.
e. Layers of Earth and Atmosphere
(1) Layers of Earth
(a) Crust - 5 – 50 km.
(b) Mantle – 2900 km.
(c) Outer core – 5100 km.
(d) Inner core – 6370 km.
(2) Layers of Atmosphere
(a) Troposphere - 0 -12 km.
(b) Stratosphere - 12 - 50 km.
(c) Mesosphere - 50 - 85 km.
(d) Thermosphere - 85 – 690 km.
(e) Exosphere - 690 – 10000 km.
f. Rotation of earth and leap year
(1) Earth completes one revolution of the sun in 365 days and 6 hours
in an elliptical orbit.
(2) Period of Axial Rotation. 1 day / 23 hours 56 minutes and 4
seconds.
(3) Leap year. The year in which month of Feb is of 29 days. It
results after every 4 years.
(4) Common year is of 365 days (1/4 day short of a Tropical Year).

RESTD
 30
RESTD

(5) Tropical year is of 365.24 days (one complete orbit around the
sun).
(6) Leap year is of 366 days (3/4 days over a Tropical Year).
g. Some geographical Terms
(1) Antipodes - Two points that are on the exact opposite sides of the
earth, for example, the North and South Poles.
(2) Archipelago - A group or chain of islands, for example, the Malay
Archipelago.
(3) Atoll - A ring of coral that makes an island, for example, Lighthouse
Reef near Belize.
(4) Basin - A section of land eroded by water, causing it to be lower
than the surrounding land.
(5) Bay - A small body of water enclosed partially by land, for example,
Hudson Bay in Canada.
(6) Biosphere - The part of the earth capable of supporting living
things.
(7) Butte - A hill with a flat top and steep sides, for example, Merrick's
Butte in Arizona.
(8) Canal - A waterway made by man for irrigation or easier
transportation, for example, the Suez Canal.
(9) Canyon - A valley that is deep and has steep sides, for example,
the Grand Canyon.
(10) Cape - A section of land that juts out into the water, for example,
Cape Cod.
(11) Cave - A large open area in the ground or in the side of a mountain
or hill, for example, Mammoth Cave in Kentucky.
(12) Channel - A narrow stretch of water between to larger bodies of
water, for example, the English Channel.
(13) Cliff - A steep rock face often found by the ocean, for example, the
White Cliffs of Dover.
(14) Continent - A large land mass, for example, Africa.

RESTD
 31
RESTD

(15) Cove - A small bay that is sheltered and shaped like a horseshoe,
for example, Coron Island Cove in the Philippines.
(16) Delta - The area at the mouth of a river formed with deposits
brought down the river, for example, the Ganges Delta in India.
(17) Desert - An area with little rainfall and sparse vegetation, for
example, the Sahara Desert.
(18) Dune - A hill made of sand, for example, the White Sands in New
Mexico.
(19) Estuary - The area where the fresh water from a river meets the
salt water from an ocean, for example, the Amazon Estuary.
(20) Fjord - A long narrow inlet between steep cliffs, for example, the
Lysefjord in Norway.
(21) Geyser - A hot spring that occasionally sends up a column of water
and steam, for example, Old Faithful in Yellowstone Park.
(22) Glacier - A large mass of ice that moves slowly, for example, the
Easton Glacier on Mount Baker.
(23) Gulf - An area of ocean partially surrounded by land, for example,
the Gulf of Alaska.
(24) Hill - A raised mound of land, for example, the Chocolate Hills in
the Philippines.
(25) Ice shelf - A platform of ice floating near the coast, for example, the
Ross Ice Shelf in Antarctica.
(26) Island - A piece of land totally surrounded by water, for example,
Crete in Greece.
(27) Isthmus - A narrow strip of land that connects two larger land
masses, for example, the Isthmus of Panama.
(28) Lagoon - A body of water that is not very deep with a sandbank or
strip of land separating it from the ocean, for example, the Blue
Lagoon in Iceland.
(29) Lake - A large body of water totally surrounded by land, for
example, Lake Titicaca in the Andes.

RESTD
 32
RESTD

(30) Marsh - A wetland near lakes and streams, for example, the
Macoun Marsh in Ontario, Canada.
(31) Mesa - A large landform that is flat on top and has steep sides, for
example, Tucumcari Mountain in New Mexico.
(32) Mountain - A very tall landform, for example, Mt. Everest in the
Himalayas.
(33) Oasis - An area in a desert that has water and vegetation, for
example, the Siwa Oasis in Egypt.
(34) Ocean - A very large body of salt water, for example, the Atlantic
Ocean.
(35) Peninsula - An area of land surrounded on three sides with water,
for example, Italy.
(36) Plain - Flat areas of land, for example, the Great Plains in North
America.
(37) Plateau - A tableland that is fairly flat, for example, the Tibetan
Plateau.
(38) Pond - A small body of water surrounded by land, for example,
Walden Pond in Massachusetts.
(39) Prairie - A large flat area with grasses and few trees, for example,
the Midewin National Tallgrass Prairie in the United States.
(40) Range - A series of mountains, for example, the Appalachian
Mountain Range.
(41) Reef - A growth of coral under the sea and near the surface, for
example, the Great Barrier Reef in Australia.
(42) River - A large body of water that flows, for example, the Nile River.
(43) Sea - A large body of salt water, for example, the Black Sea in
Europe.
(44) Strait - A narrow body of water that connects two larger bodies of
water, for example, the Strait of Gibraltar.
(45) Swamp - A freshwater wetland with muddy land, for example, the
Amazon River floodplain.

RESTD
 33
RESTD

(46) Tributary - A river that flows into a larger river, for example, the
Missouri River is a tributary of the Mississippi River.
(47) Tundra - A flat, treeless area where the soil is permanently frozen,
for example, the Greenland Tundra.
(48) Valley - The low area between mountains, for example, the Rio
Grande Valley.
(49) Volcano - A mountain with a vent where lava, steam, and ash
comes out, sometimes violently, for example, St. Helen's.
(50) Waterfall - Water falling from a height, usually off a cliff or side of a
mountain, for example, Niagara Falls.
(51) Massif. A massif ia a large mountain mass or compact group of
connected mountains forming an independent portion of a range.
Massifs may form underwater such as the Atlantis Massif.
(52) The String of Pearls. Refers to the Chinese SLOCs and future
development plans, extending from Hong Kong to Port Sudan. It
includes sea lanes run through the strategic choke points of straight
of Mandab, Strait of Malacca, Strait of Hormuz and Strait of
Lombok with littoral ports incl Gwadar, Pakistan; Chittagong,
Bangladesh; Sittwe, Burma; Lamu, Kenya; Port Sudan, Sudan and
Hambantota, Sri Lanka.
(53) The Aurora Borealis or Northern Lights. An aurora is a
natural light display in the sky in the polar regions, caused by the
collision of charged particles directed by the Earth’s magnetic field.
In the northern latitudes, the effect is known as the aurora borealis
(or the northern lights).
(54) The Aurora Australis or Southern Lights. The aurora australis
(or the southern lights), has similar properties, but is only visible
from high southern latitudes in Antarctica, South America, or
Australasia. Australis is the Latin word for “of the South”.
(55) Drake Passage. The Drake Passage or Mar de Hoces-Sea of
“de Hoces”- is the body of water between the southern tip of South

RESTD
 34
RESTD

America at Cape Horn, Chile and the South Shetland Islands of

Antarctica. It connects the southwestern part of the Atlantic Ocean
(Scotia Sea) with the southeastern part of the Pacific Ocean and
extends into the Southern Ocean.
(56) Strait. A narrow channel joining two large bodies of water.
(57) Bay. Recessed, coastal body of water that directly connects to a
larger main body of water, such as an ocean, lake or another bay.
Large bays are called Gulfs.
(58) Gulf. A gulf is a large bay that is an arm of an ocean or a sea.
(59) Isthmus (Is-mus). A narrow strip of land connecting two larger
masses of land surrounded by the sea.
(60) Channel. A broad strait, especially one that connects two seas.
(61) El Nino. Periodic change of directions in the winds and ocean
currents following from Americas to Asia across the southern
Pacific.
h. Famous Lines
(1) Bar-Lev Line. Israel defence line in the Sinai desert with
Egypt during 1967 Six-day War.
(2) Durand line. Between Pakistan and Afghanistan.
(3) Goldsmith Line. Between Pakistan and Iran.
(4) McDonald Line. Between Pakistan and China converted into
international border in 1962.
(5) Curzon Line. Polish and Russian border during World War –
I.
(6) Maginot Line. Between France and Germany built by France
in 1930s to deter German invasion.
(7) Hindenburg Line. Between Germany and Poland, the Germans
retreated to this line in 1917 during WWI.
(8) Mason-Dixon Line. Line of demarcation between four states in the
United State.

RESTD
 35
RESTD

(9) Mannerheim Line. 320 km line of fortification between Russia and

Finland, drawn up by General Mannerheim.
(10) Macmahon Line. Between India and China drawn up by Sir
Henry Macmahon.
i. Famous Lines & Parallels
(1) Medicine Line. Between Canada and the United States.
(2) Order-Neisse Line. Between Poland and Germany, along the order
and Neisse rivers after World War – II.
(3) Radcliffe Line. Between India and Pakistan drawn up by Sir
Cyril Radcliffe.
(4) Siegfried. Between Germany and France built by Germany in
1930s opposite to French Maginot line.
(5) Wallace Line. It separates the economic zones of Asia and
Australia.
(6) Green Line. Divides Cyprus between Greek south and Turkey
North.
(7) 17th Parallel. Defines the boundary between North Vietnam and
South Vietnam before two were united, finished in 1975.
(8) 24th Parallel. Is the line which Pakistan Claims for demarcation
between India and Pakistan in Sir Creek, however is not recognized
by India.
(9) 38th Parallel. Is the parallel of latitude which separates North Korea
and South Korea.
(10) 49th Parallel. It is the boundary between USA and Canada.
j. World Choke Points
(1) Strait of Hormuz. Between Iran and Oman and connects Persian
Gulf to Arabian Sea (Gulf of Oman). World’s most important
chokepoint with an oil flow of 20% of oil trade (16 to 17 million
barrels per day).

RESTD
 36
RESTD

(2) Strait of Malacca. Links Indian and Pacific Oceans. Shortest sea
route from Middle East to SE and far Asia. One-quartor of the
world’s trade including oil passes through it.
(3) Sunda Strait. Between the Indonesian islands of Java and
Sumatra. An alternate route of Strait of Malacca.
(4) Strait of Makassar. Between Java sea and Celebes sea. An
alternate route to the Japan, Korea, North Pacific islands and US
Pacific Comd (USPASOM) in Guam.
(5) Strait of Lombok. Connects the Java Sea and the Indian Ocean,
located between the Islands of Bali and Lombok in Indonesia. It is
much deeper than the Strait of Malacca. Big ships that draw too
much water to pass often use the Lombok Strait.
(6) Bab-ul-Mandeb. Between the horn of Africa and the Middle
East. A strategic link between the Mediterranean Sea and the
Indian Ocean.
(7) Strait of Gibraltar. Between the Mediterranean Sea and Atlantic
Ocean. Europe and Africa are separated by 14.24 km.
(8) Strait of Bosporus. Is one of the busiest and most
dangerous chokepoints in the world. Supplies oil to Europe,
connects the Black Sea with the Sea of Marmora.
(9) Dardanelles. Also called Hellespont is a narrow strait in
Northwestern Turkey Connecting the Aegean Sea to the Sea of
Marmora.
(10) Suez Canal. Connects the Red Sea with the Mediterranean Sea.
(11) Panama Canal. Connects Pacific Ocean to Caribbean Sea and
Atlantic Ocean. It is 50 miles long and only 110 feet wide. Its
narrowest point is called Culebra Cut.
(12) Bering Strait. Between Cape Dezhnev, Russia, the
easternmost point of the Asian continent and Cape Prince of
Wales, Alaska, USA, the westernmost point of the North American
continent.

RESTD
 37
RESTD

(13) Palk Strait. Between the Tamil Nadu state of India and the
Northernmost part of Sri Lanka. It connects the Bay of Bengal in the
northeast with the Palk Bay and thence with the Gulf of Mannar in
the southwest.
(14) Tiran Strait. Joins Gulf of Aqba with the Red sea.

SWORD OF ALLAH
(Lt Gen A.I. Akram)

PART – 1
IN THE TIMES OF PROPHET (PBUH)

1. Soon after his birth Khalid was taken away from his mother, as was the custom
among the better families of the Quraish, and sent to a Bedouin tribe in the desert.
2. When he was five or six years old, he returned to his parents' home in Makkah.
3. Some time in his childhood he had an attack of small pox, but it was a mild attack
and caused no damage except to leave a few pock marks on his face.
4. His father, Al Waleed, was the Chief of the Bani Makhzum - one of the noblest
clans of the Quraish - and was also known in Makkah by the title of Al-Waheed the
Unique.
5. The great tribe of the Quraish that inhabited Makkah had evolved a clear-cut
division of privilege and responsibility among its major clans.
6. The three leading clans of the Quraish were the Bani Hashim, the Bani Abduddar
(of which the Bani Umayyah was an offshoot) and the Bani Makhzum.
7. The Bani Makhzum were among the best horsemen of Arabia.

RESTD
 38
RESTD

8. He had to be just as good on a camel, for both animals were vital for Arab
warfare.
9. He learnt to use all weapons-the spear, the lance, the bow and the sword.
10. The ones for which he appears to have had a natural gift were the lance, used
while charging on horseback, and the sword for mounted and dismounted duelling.
11. The sword was regarded by the Arabs as the weapon of chivalry, for this brought
one nearest to one's adversary.
12. The sword was the most trusted weapon.
13. As Khalid grew to manhood, he attained a great height-over six feet.
14. As a wrestler, he climbed high on the ladder of achievement, combining
consummate skill with enormous strength.
15. Al Waleed was one of six brothers.
16. The sons were Khalid, Waleed, Hisham, Ammarah and Abdu Shams. The
daughters were Faktah and Fatimah.
17. The Quraish were a surprisingly democratic people and everybody was required
to do some work.
18. In his spare time he was a blacksmith and butcher, slaughtering animals for the
clan.
19. On more than one occasion Khalid accompanied trade caravans to Syria and
visited the great trading cities of that fair province of Rome.
20. The latter's personal name was Amr bin Hisham bin Al Mugheerah, though he
was
to earn yet another name later: Abu Jahl.
21. Al Waleed was not only the father and mentor of his sons; he was also their
military
instructor, and from him Khalid got his first lesson in the art of warfare.
22. This warfare was essentially tribal, but the Arabs well knew the value of speed,
mobility and surprise, and tribal warfare was mainly based on offensive tactics.
23. On reaching maturity Khalid's main interest became war and this soon reached
the
proportions of an obsession.

RESTD
 39
RESTD

CHAPTER-2 THE NEW FAITH

24. This custom was not, of course, very widespread in Arabia. Among the famous
families of Makkah, the Bani Hashim, the Bani Umayyah and the Bani Makhzum-there
is not a single instance on record of a female child being killed.
25. The Kabah had been built by the Prophet Ibrahim as the House of God, but had
been defiled with gods of wood and stone.
26. In and around the Kabah there were 360 idols, the most worshipped of whom
were
Hubal, Uzza and Lat. Hubal, the pride of the Arab pantheon, was the largest of these
gods and was carved of red agate.
27. When the inhabitants of Makkah had imported this idol from Syria it was without
a
right hand; so, they fashioned a new hand of gold and stuck it on to its arm.
28. In the religion of the Arabs there was a curious mixture of polytheism and belief
in
Allah-the true God.
29. The position of the deity in the Arab mind was like that of a divine council, God
being the President of the council of which these other gods and goddesses were
members, each having supernatural powers, though subservient to the President.
30. What was wrong with Arab culture lay in the fields of ethics and religion, and in
these fields Arab life had hit an all-time low.
31. This period became known in history as the Ignorance.
32. The Ignorance was thus not only an era but an entire way of life.
33. This happened on a Monday in the month of August, 610 CE.
34. When Muhammad (SAWS) received this revelation, Khalid was 24 years old.
35. For three years the Prophet remained silent, receiving guidance through the
Angel
Jibril.
36. "This is my brother and deputy." The boy was the Prophet's cousin-Ali, son of
Abu
Talib. He was the first male to accept Islam at the hands of the Prophet.

RESTD
 40
RESTD

37. This opposition was directed mainly by four men: Abu Sufyan (whose personal
name was Sakhr bin Harb, and who was the leader of the Bani Umayyah), Al Waleed
(father of Khalid), Abu Lahab (uncle of the Prophet) and Abul Hakam.
38. Abu Sufyan and Al Waleed were men of dignity and self-respect. While they
directed the opposition against the Prophet.
39. Muhammad joined his own six generations back, and the family of Muhammad
was no less noble than his own.
40. Rukkana bin Abd Yazid, a champion wrestler who was proud of his strength and
skill.
41. Many of the men and women were tortured by the Quraish, The most famous of
these sufferers, of whom history speaks in glowing terms, was Bilal bin Hamamah-a tall,
gaunt Abyssinian slave who was tortured by his own master, Umayyah bin Khalf.
42. His prayer was answered in so far as it concerned Umar, who became the
fortieth
person to embrace Islam but Abu Jahl remained an unbeliever and died in his unbelief.
43. In 619, ten years after the first revelation, Abu Talib died.
44. The Prophet remained surrounded by a few faithful companions to whom he
continued to preach, and among these companions were 10 who were especially close
to him.
45. Then some men of Madinah (at the time known as Yathrib) met the Prophet and
accepted Islam.
46. In September 622, the Quraish finally made up their minds to assassinate
Muhammad.
47. Three months after the Prophet's departure from Makkah, Al Waleed called his
sons to his death bed.
48. The first is my blood feud with the Khuza'a.
49. The second is my money, accruing from interest due to me, with the Saqeef, See
that you get it back.
50. Feud with the son-in-law of Al Waleed, Khalid's brother, Hisham, decided that he
would be content with nothing less than the blood of Abu Uzeihar.
51. We do not know how many wives or children he had at this time, but we know of

RESTD
 41
RESTD

two sons: the elder was called Sulaiman, the younger, Abdur-Rahman.
CHAPTER-3
52. He caravan consisted of 1,000 camels and had taken goods worth 50,000 dinars,
on which Abu Sufyan had made a cent per cent profit.
53. Among those present were Abu Sufyan and his wife, Hind.
54. The Battle of Badr was the first major clash between the Muslims and their
enemies. A small force of 313 Muslims had stood like a rock against the onslaught of
1,000 infidels.
55. A total of 70 infidels had been killed and another 70 captured by the Muslims, at
a
cost of only 14 Muslim dead.
56. Among those killed were 17 members of the Bani Makhzum, most of them either
cousins or nephews of Khalid.
57. Abu Jahl had been killed.
58. Khalid's brother, Waleed, had been taken prisoner.
59. Ali had killed 18 men by himself and had shared in the killing of four others.
60. Hamza had killed four men and shared with Ali in the killing of another four.
61. The most vociferous at the conference were Safwan bin Ummayya and Ikrimah,
son of Abu Jahl
62. "And I have lost my son, Handhalah." said Abu Sufyan. "My thirst for revenge is
no
less than yours.
63. The entire profit from the caravans, amounting to 50,000 dinars, would be spent
on financing the expedition- Abu Sufyan was unanimously elected as the commander of
the Quraish army.
64. The rate of ransom varied. The top rate was 4,000 dirhams and there was a
graduated scale down to 1,000 dirhams for those who could not afford to pay more.
65. The sum of 4,000 dirhams was duly paid for the release of Waleed, whereafter
the
three brothers left Madinah and camped for the night at a place called Zhul Halifa, a few
miles away.

RESTD
 42
RESTD

66. Waleed slipped away from the camp, returned to Madinah.

67. While at the Quraish conference the main theme of the discussion had been
revenge, another factor which drove the Quraish to war with the Muslims was economic
survival.
68. The Holy Prophet came to know of this caravan and sent Zaid bin Harithah with
100 men to capture it, which Zaid did.
69. The preparations for the expedition now began in right earnest.
70. While they were in progress, an unbeliever of doubtful character approached Abu
Sufyan with a proposal. This man was Abu Amir of Madinah.
71. In the old days Abu Amir had been known as the Monk, but the Holy Prophet had
given him the nickname of the Knave! Thus the Muslims knew this man as Abu Amir the
Knave.
72. "I have 50 members of my clan with me", he said to Abu Sufyan. "I have much
influence with myclan, the Aws.
73. Parleys were begun with neighbouring tribes, and strong contingents were
received from the Kinana and the Thaqeef. Early in March 625.
74. In the second week of March, the Quraish set out from Makkah with an army of
3,000 men, of whom 700 were armoured. They had 3,000 camels and 200 horses.
75. With the army went 15 Quraish women in litters, whose task it was to remind the
Quraish of the comrades who had fallen at Badr and to strengthen their spirits.
76. Jubair bin Mut'im, spoke to his slave, who was known as the Savage-Wahshi bin
Harb. "If you kill Hamza, the uncle of Muhammad, in revenge for the killing of my uncle
at Badr, I shall free you.
77. The Holy Prophet had been warned by Abbas of the Quraish preparations before
they left Makkah.
78. On March 20, the Quraish arrived near Madinah and camped a few miles away,
in
a wooded area west of Mount Uhud.
79. On March 21, the Prophet left Madinah with 1,000 men, of whom 100 were
armoured.
80. The Muslims had two horses, of which one was the Prophet's. They camped for

RESTD
 43
RESTD

the night near a small black hillock called Shaikhan.

81. Uhud is a massive feature lying four miles north of Madinah (the reference point
in
Madinah being the Prophet's Mosque) and rising to a height of about 1,000 feet above
the level of the plain. The entire feature is 5 miles long.
82. He organised the Muslims as a compact formation with a front of 1,000 yards.
83. He placed his right wing at the foot of the spur and his left wing at the foot of a
low
hill, about 40 feet high and 500 feet long, called Ainain.
84. Behind the Muslims stood 14 women whose task it was to give water to the
thirsty,
to carry the wounded out of battle and to dress their wounds. Among these women was
Fatimah, daughter of the Prophet and wife of Ali.
85. The Prophet himself took up his position with the left wing of his army.
86. The Muslim dispositions were intended to lead to a frontal positional battle and
were superbly conceived.
87. They established a battle camp a mile south of the spur, and from here Abu
Sufyan
led his army forward and formed it in battle array facing the Muslims.
88. On the right was Khalid and on the left Ikrimah, each with a cavalry squadron 100
strong. The Quraish banner was carried by Talha bin Abi Talha, one of the survivors of
Badr.
89. It was the morning of Saturday, March 22, 625 (the 7th of Shawwal, 3 Hijri)-
exactly
a year and a week after Badr.
90. The Muslims repeated to themselves the Quranic words: "Sufficient for us is
Allah, and what a good protector He is." [Quran 3: 173] And they awaited the
decision of Allah.
91. "I am Talha, son of Abu Talha. Will anyone duel?" On his challenge, Ali strode
out

RESTD
 44
RESTD

and before Talha could deliver a single blow, Ali struck him with his sword and felled
him.
92. This man was killed by Hamza.
93. The Prophet himself participated in this action by firing arrows into the general
mass of the Quraish. Beside him stood Sad bin Abi Waqqas, who was an arrow-maker
by profession and was among the best archers of his time.
94. The mother of Saba used to perform circumcision operations in Makkah.
95. The Savage would fight more battles in his life, but there would be no more
battles
for the noble Hamza- "Lion of Allah and of His Prophet.
96. All the women ran except Amra, who remained where she had stood, close
behind
the original Quraish battle line.
97. They turned to their commander, Abdullah bin Jubair, and asked for permission
to
join their comrades, but Abdullah was firm in his refusal.
98. Khalid killed his first man-Abu Aseera.
99. The first of the Quraish to reach the Prophet's position was Ikrimah.
100. To shield the Prophet from the arrows, Abu Dujanah stood in front of him, with
his
back to the Quraish infantry, from which came most of the arrows. After some time the
back of Abu Dujanah was so studded with arrows that he looked like a porcupine.
101. About now he killed his second man-Sabt bin Dahdaha-with his lance. Every time
he brought a man down, he would shout, "Take that! And I am the Father of Sulaiman.
102. During this lull, one of the Muslims, noticed that the Prophet was looking
cautiously
over his shoulder. The man asked the reason for this, and the Prophet replied casually,
"I am expecting Ubayy bin Khalf. He may approach me from behind. If you see
him coming, let him get near me"
103. When the Quraish returned to Makkah, he went with them. While they were
camped at a place called Saraf, not far from Makkah, the wretched man died.

RESTD
 45
RESTD

104. Three of the Quraish managed to break through the cordon and got within stone
throwing distance of the Prophet. These three men were: Utbah bin Abi Waqqas,
Abdullah bin Shahab and Ibn Qamiah.
105. The first (a brother of Sad) landed four stones on the Prophet's face, broke two of
the Prophet's lower teeth and cut his lower lip.
106. Sad was later to say that he had never wanted to kill a man so badly as he
wanted
to kill his brother, Utbah, for wounding the Prophet.
107. "How can a people prosper who colour the face of their Prophet with blood,
while he calls them to their Lord
108. He later became known among the Arabs as Al Asram, i.e. the one without the
incisors.
109. Ibn Qamiah turned and rushed back to the Quraish, shouting at the top of his
voice:
"I have killed Muhammad! I have killed Muhammad.
110. Here Khalid killed his third man-Rafa'a bi Waqsh.
111. Of the group of 30 who had fought with the Prophet in the preceding few actions,
only 14 remained and most of these were wounded.
112. Sixteen of them had fallen-in defence of the Prophet and in the way of Allah.
113. One of them, a man named Kab bin Malik, wandering towards the defile, saw the
Prophet and recognized him.
114. This man had a powerful voice.
115. They murdered about 500.
116. The campaign of Uhud was over.
117. A total of 70 Muslims had fallen in battle.
118. Abu Sufyan had killed one. Safwan bin Ummayya, Khalid and Ikrimah had each
killed three Muslims.
119. On the Quraish side, 22 unbelievers had been killed including six by Ali and three
by Hamza.
120. It was a defeat for the Muslims, but not a decisive one.

RESTD
 46
RESTD

THE BATTLE OF DITCH

121. For the next two years there was no direct military clash between the Muslims
and
the Quraish.
122. There was, however, an incident known as the Incident of Rajee-a brutal and
horrible affair which further embittered relations between Makkah and Madinah.
123. This incident took place in July 625.
124. When these men, with their guides, reached a place called Rajee, not far from
Usfan, they were ambushed by 100 warriors from the tribe which had invited them.
125. Three of them were killed and three captured.
126. The two captives who eventually got to Makkah were Khubaib bin Adi and Zaid
bin
Al Dasinna.
127. On this day Ikrimah became a war criminal.
128. "I shall keep the rendezvous with the infidel even if I have to go alone"
129. In late March, the Muslims marched from Madinah. They numbered 1,500 men,
of
whom 50 had horses.
130. The army arrived at Badr on April 4, 626 (the 1st of Dhul Qad, 4 Hijri), but there
was no sign of the Quraish.
131. Their leader was Abdullah bin Ubayy, a man who commanded a position of
prestige in Madinah and felt that the arrival of the Prophet had somehow reduced him in
status and influence.
132. An important element in the population of Madinah consisted of Jews, comprising
three tribes known as Bani Qainqa, Bani Nazir and Bani Quraizah.
133. Bani Qainqa broke their pact and came out in open opposition to the Muslims.
134. As punishment for violating their pledge, the Bani Qainqa were banished from
Madinah, and they migrated to Syria.
135. As the summer of 626 came to an end, a delegation of the Jews of Khaibar set
out

RESTD
 47
RESTD

for Makkah.
136. Their leader was Huyaiy bin Akhtab, who had been the chief of the Bani Nazir in
Madinah.
137. The total strength of the force, including smaller tribes which have not been
mentioned, was 10,000, and Abu Sufyan assumed overall command of the expedition.
138. This became known as the collection of tribe.
139. Then came light in the form of a suggestion by Salman the Persian.
140. Muslims at the scale of 40 cubits per group of 10 men.
141. Hassaan bin Thabit walked about reciting his poetry and infusing fresh spirit into
the Muslims.
142. Hassaan was a poet, and perhaps the greatest poet of his day.
143. The ditch was lightly covered along its entire length by 200 men, most of whom
were placed as picquets on the hills commanding the ditch.
144. A mobile force of 500 men was employed to patrol the various settlements of
145. Madinah and deal with any infiltrators who might enter unseen, and also give
some
protection to areas not covered by the ditch.
146. "Muhammad promises us the treasures of Caesar and Chosroes, but he cannot
get us out of this simple predicament.
147. Little did they know how heavily they would pay for their perfidy!
148. Then rumours of the pact also spread, and the report was ultimately confirmed by
the incident of 'Safiyyah and the Jew'.
149. More brawn than brain, he was to earn from the Prophet the nickname of 'the
willing fool'.
150. "If the Ghatfan secede from the alliance and return to their homes, they shall be
given one? third of the date produce of Madinah", were the terms offered by the
Prophet.
151. These stout-hearted Believers could not understand the seriousness of the
military
situation or the intricacies of diplomacy as well as the Prophet did.
152. Anyway, tomorrow is Saturday and Jews are forbidden to fight on the Sabbath.

RESTD
 48
RESTD

153. Those who break the Sabbath are turned by Allah into pigs and monkeys.
154. This was Amr bin Abdu Wud. (We shall call him the Giant!)
155. This sword which the Prophet now gave to Ali had once belonged to an infidel by
the name of Munabba bin Hajaj.
156. This man had been killed at the Battle of Badr, and the sword had come to the
Muslims as part of the spoils of war.
157. Now in Ali's hand this was to become the most famous sword in Islam, killing
more
men in fair combat than any sword in history. This was the Zulfiqar.
158. The Giant knew Ali well. He had been a friend of Ali's father, Abu Talib. He now
smiled indulgently at Ali as a man might smile at a boy.
159. Know, O Amr", said Ali gently, "that victory and defeat depend upon the will of
Allah. Accept Islam.
160. A man known as Nofal bin Abdullah, a cousin of Khalid's, was not successful in
clearing the ditch and fell into it.
161. Since the opposition at the moment appeared too strong to overcome, Khalid
decided to resort to stratagem.
162. In the rear of the Quraish army rode Khalid and Amr bin Al Aas with their cavalry
squadrons acting as a rear guard in case the Muslims should come out of Madinah and
attempted to interfere with the Quraish movement.
163. The siege had lasted 23 days and had imposed a terrible strain on both sides.
164. The Prophet's words, "War is stratagem", were to be remembered and frequently
quoted in later Muslim campaigns.

THE CONVERSION OF KHALID

165. The Truce of Hudaibiya was signed in early April 628 (late Dhul Qad, 6 Hijri).
166. His intention was to perform the pilgrimage-the off?season pilgrimage known as
Umra-and he took with him 1,400 fully armed Muslims and a large number of sacrificial
animals.
167. 300 horsemen on the road to Madinah to intercept the Muslim army.
168. He arrived at Kura?ul?Ghameem, 15 miles from Usfan, and took up a blocking

RESTD
 49
RESTD

position in a pass through which the road crossed this hilly region. (See Map 4)
169. Pass known as Saniyat-ul-Marar. The march proved a strenuous one, but it was
successfully accomplished and Khalid's position bypassed.
170. The Muslims continued the march until they had got to Hudaibiya, 13 miles west
of Makkah, and pitched camp.
171. It was signed on behalf of the Muslims by the Prophet and on behalf of the
Quraish
by Suhail bin Amr.
172. As a result of the last clause of the truce, two tribes living in and around Makkah
joined the main participants: the Khuza'a as allies of the Muslims and the Bani Bakr as
allies of the Quraish.
173. After a stay of over two weeks at Hudaibiya, the Muslims returned to Madinah.
174. Conscious of his own ability and military prowess, he felt that he was truly
deserving of victory, but somehow victory always eluded him.
175. The greatest of these had been the Campaign of Khaibar, in which the last
resistance of the Jews was crushed.
176. It is incumbent on all sensible men to follow him."
177. Amr bin Al Aas and Uthman bin Talha (son of the Quraish standard bearer at
Uhud)
and there was mutual astonishment when they found that each was travelling to
Madinah with the same purpose, for each had regarded the other two as bitter enemies
of Islam.
178. The three seekers arrived at Madinah on May 31, 629 (the 1st of Safar, 8 Hijri),
and went to the house of the Prophet.
MAUTA AND THE SWORD OF ALLAH

179. While passing through Mutah this envoy was intercepted and killed by a local
Ghassan chieftain by the name of Shurahbil bin Amr.
180. Prophet appointed Zaid bin Harithah as the commander of the force.
181. If he were killed, the command was to be taken over by Jafar bin Abi Talib.
182. If he were killed, the command would devolve upon Abdullah bin Rawahah.

RESTD
 50
RESTD

183. The expeditionary force consisted of 3,000 men, one of whom was Khalid,
serving
as a soldier in the ranks.
184. Ghassan Chieftain of Busra, a large and powerful tribe inhabiting Syria and
Jordan.
185. When the force arrived at Ma'an, reports were received for the first time that
Heraclius, the Eastern Roman Emperor, was in Jordan with "100,000 Romans" and had
been joined by "100,000 Christian Arabs"-mainly from the Ghassan.
186. Men fight not with numbers or weapons but with faith.
187. It was the second week of September 29 (the third week of Jamadi-ul-Awwal, 8
Hijri).
188. The Christian Arabs, who were commanded by Malik bin Zafila, formed
themselves
into a deep mass confronting the Muslims.
189. This distressed the Muslims, for Jafar was held in great esteem and affection as
a
cousin of the Prophet.
190. When Abdullah had fallen, the standard was picked up by Thabit bin Arqam, who
raised his voice and shouted, "O Muslims, agree upon a man from among you to be the
commander."
191. For some time desperate hand?to?hand fighting continued; then Qutba,
commanding the Muslim right, dashed forward and killed the Christian commander,
Malik, in a duel.
192. This last round of the battle had ended in favour of the Muslims of whom so far
only 12 had been killed.
193. Khalid is the Sword of Allah.
194. He now became known as Saifullah, i.e. Sword of Allah.

THE CONQUEST OF MECCA

195. As stated earlier, two of the tribes of Makkah had entered the Truce of Hudaibiya,
the Khuza'a on the side of the Muslims and the Bani Bakr on the side of the Quraish.

RESTD
 51
RESTD

196. In this raid twenty of the Khuza'a were killed.

197. Abu Sufyan had not been directly concerned with the assistance given by the
Quraish in this raid.
198. On arrival at Madinah he first went to see his daughter, Umm Habiba, wife of the
Prophet, but she gave him the cold shoulder.
199. The move of the Muslim army started from Madinah on January 1, 630 (the 10 th
of Ramadan, 8 Hijri).
200. Thus the Muslim army soon swelled to an all-time high figure of 10,000 warriors.
201. With this force the Prophet arrived at Marr-uz-Zahran, 10 miles north?west of
Makkah, without the Quraish having any knowledge of his movement.
202. This was the fastest move the Muslim army had ever accomplished.
203. He was a proud leader of the Quraish, one of the nobles of the tribe, a
descendant
of Umayyah.
204. He had always regarded himself as second to none, and in this he was right.
205. "And how many do you think could fit into your house?" the people asked with
sarcasm.
206. Makkah lies in the Valley of Ibrahim and is surrounded and dominated by black,
rugged hills which rise in places to over 1,000 feet above the valley floor.
207. The main column, which was commanded by Abu Ubaidah and with which the
Prophet travelled in person, would enter Makkah along the main Madinah route, from
the north-west, via Azakhir.
208. The second column, under Zubair, would enter from the south-west, through a
pass west of the Hill of Kuda.
209. The third column, under Ali, would enter from the south, via Kudai; and the
fourth,
under Khalid, would enter from the north-east, via Lait and Khandama. (See Map 5
below).
210. The entry into Makkah took place on January 11, 630 (the 20th of Ramadan, 8
Hijri).
211. It proved a peaceful and bloodless operation except in the sector of Khalid.

RESTD
 52
RESTD

212. The two enemy leaders who were now opposing him in battle had been his
dearest
friends Ikrimah and Safwan; and the latter was also the husband of Khalid's sister,
Faktah.
213. This was a great moment in the life of Muhammad. It was more than seven years
since he had fled as a fugitive from Makkah with the Quraish at his heels, thirsting for
his blood.
214. In and around the Kabah there were 360 idols carved of wood or hewn out of
stone,
including a statue of Ibrahim holding divining arrows.
215. The Prophet's joyous cry (a Quranic verse) rose above the Kabah: "Truth has
come
and falsehood has vanished!"
216. At the head of the list was Ikrimah, and Hind also was one of them.
217. Safwan bin Umayyah, though not on the war criminals' list, feared for his life and
fled to Jeddah with the intention of crossing the Red Sea and seeking refuge in
Abyssinia.
218. Of the war criminals actually only three men and two women were killed.
219. The remainder were pardoned, including Hind, who became a Muslim.
220. Khalid was sent to Nakhla to destroy Uzza, the most important of the goddesses.
He set out with 30 horsemen.
221. It appears that there were two Uzzas, the real Uzza and a fake.
222. On or about January 20, 630 AH, after the destruction of the idols, occurred the
unfortunate incident of the Bani Jazima.
223. There was the Nakhla Valley, now known as Wadi-ul-Yamaniyya, through which
ran the main route between Mecca and Taif, and there was Nakhla, at which was the
goddess Uzza, and this lay north of the Wadi-ul-Yamaniyya, It was abut 4 or 5 miles
south of the present Bir-ul-Batha.
224. The expedition to the area of Tihama, south of Makkah, was commanded by
Khalid.
225. There was an old feud between the clan of Khalid and the Bani Jazima.

RESTD
 53
RESTD

THE BATTLE OF HUNEIN

226. The Hawazin lived in the region north-east of Makkah and the Thaqeef in the
area
of Taif.
227. The total strength of the assembled tribes was 12,000 men, and the over-all
commander was the fiery, 30-year-old Malik bin Auf.
228. On January 27, 630 (the 6th of Shawal, 8 Hijri), the Muslims set out from
Makkah.
229. The army consisted of the original 10,000 men who had conquered Makkah plus
2,000 new converts from among the Makkans.
230. Among them were Abu Sufyan and Safwan bin Umayyah.
231. The latter had been given four months in which to make up his mind about the
new
faith, but was now favourably inclined towards the Prophet and had gone so far as to
lend the Muslims 100 coats of mail for the forthcoming battle.
232. The Muslim advance from Makkah was led by a contingent of 700 men from the
Bani Sulaim, operating under the command of Khalid.
233. During the evening of January 31, the Muslims arrived in the Valley of Hunain
and
established their camp.
234. Hunain is a valley running from Shara'i-ul-Mujahid (new), which is 11 miles east
north-east of Makkah, to Shara'i Nakhla (old) which is 7 miles further east.
235. Before dawn on February 1, 630 (the 11th of Shawal, 8 Hijri) the Muslims formed
up in marching order to advance to Autas where they expected to engage the enemy.
236. Safwan snapped at him. "May Allah break your mouth! I would rather see a man
of the Quraish ruling over us than a man of the Hawazin!".
237. Muslim casualties in this battle were surprisingly few, thanks to the indifferent
archery of the Hawazin. While many Muslims had been wounded, only four lost their
lives.

RESTD
 54
RESTD

238. Seventy of the unbelievers were killed in the valley, at the pass and at Autas, and
these included the sage, Duraid, who had given such sound advice but in vain.
239. In the enemy camp at Autas, the Muslims captured 6,000 women, children and
slaves and thousands of camels, goats and sheep.
240. This was the first time that the Muslims had been ambushed in a large-scale
operation by their enemies.
241. This was the second instance in history of the ambush of an entire army by an
entire army (the first being the ambush of the Romans by Hannibal at Lake Trasimene
in 217 B.C.).
242. This was the first time that Khalid had been taken by surprise. He had always
known the value of surprise, but this time he had been at the receiving end of it.
THE SIEGE OF TAIF
243. The Prophet had routed the enemy at Hunain and driven him from Autas. He now
decided to give Malik bin Auf no time to recover his breath and organise further
resistance.
244. Khalid again led the army with the Bani Sulaim as advance guard.
245. The Muslims got to Taif on February 5, 630 (the 15th of Shawal, 8 Hijri), and
started
a siege which was to last 18 days.
246. A few Muslims were killed before the camp was moved away and established in
the area where the mosque of Ibn Abbas stands today.
247. Groups of Muslims were now deployed around the fort to prevent entry and
escape; and Abu Bakr was made responsible for the siege operations.
248. The Muslims would close up to the town and try to pick off the Thaqeef archers
on
the wall, but the Thaqeef had the odds in their favour as they had some cover in the
open.
249. So the Muslims got the worst of these engagements and many of them were
wounded, including Abdullah, son of Abu Bakr, who later died of his wounds.
250. After the fall of Makkah, the Prophet had sent two Muslims to Jurash, in the
Yemen,

RESTD
 55
RESTD

to learn all about siege warfare.

251. These two men did not, however, return till after the Siege of Taif and thus could
play no part in the siege. But Salman the Persian again came to the help of the Muslims
as he had done in the Battle of the Ditch.
252. Under his instructions, the Muslims constructed a catapult and used it to hurl
stones into the town.
253. One day Abu Sufyan also took part in a sally towards the town and stopped an
arrow with his eye. He lived thereafter as a one-eyed man.
254. On February 23, 630 (the 4th of Dhul Qad, 8 Hijri) the siege was raised.
255. The Muslims had lost 12 men and a large number had been wounded.
256. Every soldier responded to the Prophet's appeal and returned the captives in his
hands, with the exception of Safwan bin Umayyah, who refused to part with a girl who
had been given to him as his share of the spoils. She must have been very beautiful.
257. A few days later Malik slipped out of Taif and came to the Muslim camp.
258. He became a Muslim and was amply rewarded by the Prophet.
259. Thus ended the eighth year of the Hijra.
260. The year that followed was to become known as the Year of Delegations, for
during
this year most of the tribes of Arabia sent delegations to Madinah and submitted to the
Prophet.

ADVENTURE AT DAUMAT-UL-JANDAL

261. In the ninth year of the Hijra only one major operation was carried out by the
Muslims-the expedition to Tabuk, led by the Holy Prophet in person.
262. It turned out to be a peaceful operation; but no matter how peacefully other
people
went about their tasks, Khalid always managed to find adventure and violence.
263. In the middle of October 630, the Prophet ordered the Muslims to prepare for
battle
with the Romans.
264. In late October 630 (mid-Rajab, 9 Hijri) the Muslims set out for Tabuk.

RESTD
 56
RESTD

265. This was the largest army that had ever assembled under the standard of the
Prophet. It consisted of men from Madinah, from Makkah and from most of the tribes
which had accepted Islam.
266. One source had placed the strength of this army at 30,000 warriors, including
10,000 cavalry, but this is probably an exaggeration.
267. The important places in the region were Eila (near the present-day Aqaba),
Jarba,
Azruh and Maqna-all lying along the Gulf of Aqaba.
268. One important region which the Prophet wished to subdue was a little farther
away
from Tabuk.
269. This was Daumat-ul-Jandal (the present-day Al Jauf), ruled by Ukaidar bin Abdul
Malik, a Christian prince from the tribe of Kinda who was famous for his love of hunting.
270. Khalid arrived at the walled town of Daumat-ul-Jandal on a bright, moonlit night in
late November, 630 (mid?Shaban, 9 Hijri).
271. Ukaidar's brother, Hassaan, resisted capture and was killed; but the rest galloped
back to the fort and, once inside, locked the gate.
272. Ukaidar entered into a pact with the Prophet, paid a heavy ransom for himself
and
agreed to the Jizya.
273. After Tabuk there was no major military activity during the lifetime of the Prophet.
274. In July 631 (Rabi-ul-Akhir, 10 Hijri), the Prophet sent a military expedition under
the command of Khalid to the tribe of Bani Harithah bin Kab in Najran, which lies to the
north of the Yemen.
275. The instructions to Khalid were: "Call the tribe thrice to accept Islam.
276. If they respond favourably, do them no harm. If they refuse, fight them." 1 With
Khalid went 400 mounted warriors.
277. No blood was shed.
278. The Prophet sent Khalid an appreciative letter in reply and instructed him to
return
to Madinah and bring a delegation of the Bani Harithah bin Kab with him.

RESTD
 57
RESTD

279. Khalid returned with the delegation in January 632 (Shawal, 10 Hijri).

THE GATHERING STORM

280. Apostasy had actually begun in the lifetime of the Prophet, and the first major
action of the apostasy was fought and satisfactorily concluded while the Prophet still
lived.
281. The first major event of the apostasy occurred in the Yemen and is known as the
Incident of Aswad Al Ansi.
282. Aswad was a chief of the Ans-a large tribe inhabiting the western part of the
Yemen.
283. His actual name was Abhala bin Kab, but because of his very dark colour he was
called Aswad, i.e. the Black One.
284. Before this conversion the Yemen was governed, on behalf of the Persian
Emperor, by a noble-born Persian named Bazan.
285. But shortly before the last pilgrimage of the Prophet, Bazan died, and the
Prophet
appointed Bazan's son, Shahr, as governor at San'a.
286. Aswad had a donkey which he had trained to obey certain commands, and he
used this donkey to demonstrate his powers.
287. Because of this, Aswad became known in the region as Dhul Himar-the One of
the
Donkey, or 'Donkey-Walah'. Some chroniclers, however, maintain that he was known
not as Dhul Himar, but as Dhul Khumar, i.e. the Drunk.
288. Aswad organised a column of 700 horsemen and rode to Najran.
289. He had worked fast for his unholy mission, for it was now only 25 days since he
had first gathered his tribe and proclaimed his prophethood.
290. He began to feel discontented with the title of prophet and proclaimed himself
Rahman of Yemen. The word 'Rahman' means the Merciful One, and is one of the titles
by which Muslims know Allah.
291. By doing so he earned the bitter hostility of a stalwart and true Muslim by the
name

RESTD
 58
RESTD

of Fairoz Al Deilami-a member of this Persian family and a cousin of Azad.

292. Having received full reports of Aswad's mischief, the Holy Prophet sent Qais bin
Hubaira to organise the liquidation of Aswad.
293. The fateful night of May 30, 632 (the 6th of Rabi-ul-Awwal, 11 Hijri) was chosen
as
the night.
294. About the middle of May 632, the Holy Prophet, now ailing, had ordered a large
expedition to be prepared for the invasion of Jordan.
295. Every body was to join it. As commander of the expedition, he appointed Usama
a young man of twenty-two. Usama was the son of Zaid bin Harithah, the Prophet's
freedman, who had been the first of the Muslim commanders to fall at the Battle of
Mutah.
296. This was the last expedition ordered by the Prophet; and it could mean war with
the Romans.
297. Usama was given the Jordanian area of Mutah as his geographical objective.
"Go
to the place where your father was killed".
298. The army was still in camp when, on Monday, June 5, 632, (the 12th of Rabi-ul
Awwal, 11 Hijri) the Holy Prophet passed away.
299. On the same day Abu Bakr, son of Abu Quhafa, became caliph.

ABU BAKR STRIKES

300. The apostasy had become so general that it affected every tribe in Arabia with
the
exception of the people in Makkah and Madinah and the tribe of Thaqeef at Taif.
301. The flames of disbelief were fanned by two false prophets, Tulaiha bin Khuwailid
and Musailima bin Habib, and a false prophetess by the name of Sajah bint Al Haris.
302. These tribes were the Ghatfan, the Tayy, the Hawazin, the Bani Asad and the
Bani
Sulaim.
303. Quite a few warriors were still there, especially from the clan of Bani Hashim (the

RESTD
 59
RESTD

Prophet's own clan) who had remained behind to mourn their departed kinsman.
304. He needed quick tactical victory and he had got it.
305. As a matter of interest it may be noted that this is the first instance in Muslim
history
of a night attack-a tactical method which did not achieve popularity until the First World
War.
306. The capture of Zhu Qissa took place on or about July 30, 632 (the 8th of Jamadi
ul-Awwal, 11 Hijri).
307. On August 2, the Army of Usama returned to Madinah; the capital of Islam was
no
longer in danger.
308. The Army of Usama was warmly welcomed by Abu Bakr and the people of
Madinah, to whom its return brought comfort and assurance. It had been away for 40
days.
309. This Numan was later to achieve everlasting fame as the victor of Nihawand in
Persia.
310. The Caliph formed 11 corps, each under its own commander.
311. The 11 corps commanders and their assigned objectives were as follows:
a. Khalid: First Tulaiha at Buzakha, then Malik bin Nuwaira, at Butah.
b. Ikrimah bin Abi Jahl: Contact Musailima at Yamamah but not to get
involved until more forces were built up.
TULEIHA THE IMPOSTER
312. Of the false prophets who remained after the death of Aswad, the first to clash
with
the Muslims was Tulaiha bin Khuwailid.
313. He was a chief of the tribe of Bani Asad, and had been opposing the Holy
Prophet
off and on for many years.
314. The next occasion on which he opposed the Muslims was their campaign against
the Jews of Khaibar in 628 (7 Hijri).
315. To mark the severance of his ties with Madinah, Tulaiha expelled the Muslim tax

RESTD
 60
RESTD

collector of his area-a valiant young man by the name of Barar bin Al Azwar, of whom
the account of the Campaign in Syria will have much to say.
316. The most powerful single supporter of Tulaiha was Uyaina bin Hisn, the one-
eyed
chief of the Bani Fazara-a powerful clan of the Ghatfan.
317. Uyaina brought 700 warriors from the Bani Fazara. The largest groups were from
the Bani Asad and the Ghatfan.
318. Tulaiha was ready for battle when Khalid set out from, Zhu Qissa.
319. They were not nearly so staunch in their support of the impostor, and their chief,
Adi bin Hatim, was a devout Muslim.
320. A man, who was to live to the incredible age of 120 years, Adi was so tall that
when
he sat on his horse, his feet would touch the ground.
321. But one man remained, more of a bandit leader than a tribal chief, who was still
causing anxiety to the Muslims.
322. This man's name was Ayas bin Abd Yalil, but he was more commonly known as
Al Faja'a. He was an adventurer.

RESTD
 61
RESTD

HISTORY OF INDO PAK WAR – 1965

(Lt Gen Mehmud Ahmed)

CHAPTER 2
THE KASHMIR SECTOR
1. The State of Kashmir lies nestled among the lofty Himalayas with China towards
its north as well as east and India towards the south (Map 1).
2. In the words of Russel Brines, “The strategic location of the land, its beauty and
the peculiarities of its people have made Kashmir the plaything of kings and the pawn of
generals.”
3. In ancient times one pagan ruler to another subjugate ‘this other Eden’
4. In the fifth century BC, Ashoka founded the city of puranadisthana near the
junction of the rivers Sindh and Jhelum. Today this City is called Srinagar.
5. However , in the sixth century AD, following a long line of Hindu kings
Brahmanical
Hinduism prevailed in the Valley.
6. Islam made inroad in the Kashmir during the time of king Harsha of Kashmir
(1080
1101 AD ) who recuted the Muslims into his army
7. The real foundation of the faith was, however, laid by a number of Muslim
missionaries who migrated from central Asia and India during the twelfth and the
thirteenth centuries.
8. But it was not until the early fourteenth century when Rainchan Bhotta (a Tibetan
prince who became a Muslim ) replace the last of the Lohara dynasty as king of
Kashmir that islam spread far and wide in the valley.
9. Thence Kashmir remained a muslim domain, with Akbar annexing it to Mughal
Empire in 1586.
10. When the mughal influence declined in the mid-eighteenth century Kashmir came
under the Amirs Rajput in the service of Ranjit singh, conquered and made it a part of
Sikh Kingdom .
11. In 1820 ,Gulab singh acquired for himself the rulership of Jammu.
12. Gulab singh saw his opportunity toward the end of 1845 when the Sikhs unwisely

RESTD
 62
RESTD

embarked upon the first Sikh war, While the Khalsa were thoroughly defeated in the
field.
13. He then accompanied the young Sikh Maharaja Dulip Singh ( at the time at minor
) to the British camp to sue for peace.
14. On 9 march 1846, the Vanquished Sikhs signed the treaty of Lahore according to
which the ceded Kashmir and the area between the Ravi and Beas to the British and
agreed to pay ₤1.5 million as war indemnity.
15. A week later another treaty was signed, this time at Amritsar and Gulab Singh.
16. Under this treaty: The British Government invested raja Gulab Singh with the title
of maharaja and the confederation of his paying out of his wealth ,amassed during the
troublesome times, one million sterling* (75 lakh rupees )of war indemnity for the
dependencies was transferred to him as independent ruler and vassal of the british.
17. On the Eve of partition of the subcontinent, 562 semi-autonomous princely state
of British India were given the choice to join either India or Pakistan or remain the
Independent.
18. Knighted Hari Singh, last of the dogra rules of clan, he was loath to the idea of
union with Pakistan.
19. An open accession to india to would have invoked the Warth of his muslim
subjects
who constituted 17.12% of the total population of the state.
20. As early as 15 June 1947 Jawaharlal Nehru had declared that the congress
would
not recognize independence of any state with India.
21. The first to rise against the Maharaja were the people of punch.
22. Muslims of punch embarked on a struggle for freedom in July 1947.
23. Meanwhile, a fanatic Hindu organization Rashtriya Sevam Sevaksang (RSS) ,
entered Kashmir by way of Jammu for the sworn purpose of exterminating the Muslims
in Kashmir.
24. Pakistan was not allowed by its British C-in-C to employ its army for the support
of
the kashmiri Muslims.
25. The aircraft which participated in the airlift to Kashmir, were actually flown by
British pilots!.

RESTD
 63
RESTD

26. Meanwhile Jinnah on Oct 27 had ordered Sir Douglas Gracy, his temporary
British
commander-in-Chief ….. to send regular Pakistani troops into action.
27. Gracy temporised and the next dat with field Marshal Sir C Auckinleck the
supreme commander, persuaded Jinnah reluctantly to withdraw his orders.
28. In May 1948 rather Late in the day, Pakistan finely sent its regular troops in the
aid
of the hard-pressed freedom fighters.
29. By then the Indian had inducted two regular Divisions supported by tanks,
armored, cars and aircraft, and overrun the better part of Kashmir.
30. Invigilated on both sides by the united nation military observers group in India
and
Pakistan (UNMOGIP), it came to be called the cease fire line. (MAP 8)
31. The Indian process of integrating Kashmir began in august 1953, with the
removal
of Sheikh Abdullah and his replacement by the ever co-operative Bakhshi (Ghulam
Muhammad ).
32. In February 1954 an obliged bakhshi Ghulam Muhammad, head of the
constituent
assembly of Kashmir, ratified Maharaja Hari singh’s Accession to india.
33. Two month later the long-standing customs barrier between the two areas (India
and Kashmir) was the eliminated.
34. Kashmir’s new position as a part of India was indorsed in an order issued
president
Prasad on May 14, observing the legalities of article 370.
35. A state constitution was drafted and adopted on November 19 1956.
36. Under it Kashmir became an integral part of india on independence day, January
26 1957,and the act was made irrevocable.
37. The decade of the fifties was characterized by futile parlay between india and
Pakistan and a consistent soviet policy of using its power of veto in support of its new
found friend, india to sabotage any resolution move in the UN to focus the world body’s
attention on the Kashmir issue.

RESTD
 64
RESTD

38. In 1956 Nehru publicly abandoned his promise of plebiscite stressing that the US
Pakistan military pact had drastically altered the situation in the region.
39. In January 1960, the Indian Supreme Court’s assumption of jurisdiction over the
state of jammu and Kashmir set the stage for formal amalgamation of IHK.
40. Late in November 1962, smarting under the Chinese punitive attack in NEEFA,
Nehru agreed to start discussion with Pakistan at an early date the object of reaching an
honorable and equitable settlement on Kashmir.
41. On 4 October 1963, Bukhshi Ghulam Muhammad, the prime minister of Kashmir
“…. Announced a series of policy directives to his party which were designed to
integrate the state further.
42. On 27 December 1963, the Holy Relic kept in the mosque at Hazartble , a shrine
outside Srinagar was reported stolen which cased violent agitation not only in Kashmir
but caused uproar in india as well as in Pakistan .
43. In early in 1964, Pakistan called for the meeting of UN Security Council to protest
against the integration of Kashmir by india.
44. October 1964, President Ayub invited Lal Bahadur Shastri, the new Indian prime
minster to Pakistan.
45. On 21 december 1964, India enforced article 356 and 357 of her 1950,
constitution
on Kashmir which hitherto were inapplicable owing to the special status granted to the
state by the constitution.
46. Article 356, empowered the Indian head of state to dismiss the state government
and exercise the presidential rule to govern IHK; the second article replaced the terms
‘Chief of state’ and ‘Prime Minister’ , designation use for the two leading officials of
Kashmir under the special status by the titles ‘Governor’ and ‘Chief Minister’
respectively.
47. Her five year re-arrangement program, started some time after the NEEFA
debacle
in 1962, would tilt the balance of powr in the subcontinent overwhelmingly in her favour
by 1967 or 1968, and if the Kashmir issue still lingered, she would have the military
might to back her political arguments.
48. According to General Muhammad Musa (C-in-C Pakistan Army 1958-1967):

RESTD
 65
RESTD

49. An ad hoc orginisation called the Kashmir cell was also formed in early 1964
under
the chairmanship of Mr Aziz Ahmed, Pakistan foreign Secretary, with the amorphous
task of ‘defreezing’ the Kashmir issue.
50. Headed by Zulfqar Ali Bhutto, the hawks in the government urged execution og
guerrilla operations and raids in IHK to incite the inhabitants of the Valley whose
feelings had already been inflamed by theft of Holy Relic.
51. The miner tactical successes at Biar Bet and Chhad Bet in the Run of Kutch
during
april 1965 assuaged all hesitations and perhaps gave impetus to launching of guerrilla
operations in IHK.
KASHMIR – II OPERATION GIBRALTAR
52. Two massive mountain barriers, the Great Himalaya and the Pir Panjal Ranges
dominate Indian held Kashmir (Map 8).
53. Between these two ranges lies the Valley of Kashmir with its primordial lakes
drained by the River Jhelum.
54. There are only two proper entrances t o the valley of Kashmr, one from the south
east by way of the Banihal Pass through which runs the road Jammu-Udhampur-
Srinagar, and the other from the west at Baramula where the River Jhelum leaves the
Srinagar Valley, separating the Kafir Khan Ranges from the Pir Panjal Ranges.
55. The terrain on the south-western side of the Pir Panjal Range is drained by two
main tributaries of the Jhelum, namely, the River Nilam (also known as Kishanganga in
its upper reaches) and the River Punch.
56. Starting in the north from a point called JN 9842 which lies south-west of the
Karakorum Pass, the Cease Fire Line followed a 470 mile zigzag course over jagged
peaks creating awkward bulges and salients in the disputed State of Kashmir (Map 8).
57. Holding this enormous line on the Azad Kashmir side was the oversized 12
Division with the head of a golden stag as its emblem.
58. In 1965, it had eighteen infantry battalions mostly belonging to AKRF (Azad
Kashmir Regular Forces) and twenty irregular (Mujahid) companies. On the Indian side,
XV Corps with tits headquarters at Udhampur, was responsible for the Indian Held
Kashmir and Ladakh areas.

RESTD
 66
RESTD

59. Before the outbreak of hostilities in 1965, it comprise 3 Infantry Division at Leh,
19
Infantry Division at Baramula and 25 Infantry Division at Rajauri.
60. In addition to these three infantry division, XV Corps had three independent
infantry brigades (68, 121 and 191 Brigades) and a large number of second line forces
such as police, Jammu and Kashmir (J & K) Militia and Ladakh Scouts in IHK.
61. On 25 December 1962, Major General Akhtar Hussain Malik, a large-hearted,
bold
energetic and an aggressive personality, took over command of 12 Division.
62. The formation he inherited was divided into four sectors, each commanded by a
brigadier (map9).
63. The territory generally referred to as the Northern Area, which in the sixties
extended from the Karakorum Pass on the Pakistan-China border to athmuqam in the
Nilam Valley, was guarded by such second line forces as the Northern Scouts,
Karakorum Scouts and Gilgit Scouts, all grouped under the DIG Northern Area.
64. In early 1965, the Northern Area was placed under 12 Division’s operational
command.
65. South of Athmuqam lay the area of responsibility of Number 1 Sector,
commanded
by Brigadier Fazle Rahim Khilji with its headquarters at Muzaffarabad (Map 9).
66. This sector was responsible for the area from Athmuqam to Pir Kanthi in the
Jhelum valley.
67. Immediately on the right of number 1 sector was Brigadier Rafiq’s Number 2
Sector
at Bagh which held the area from Pir Kanthi to Hot Sprng guarding from Hot Springs to
Mirpur was the repnsibility of Number 3 Sector, commanded by Brigadier Qazi Abdul
Wahid.
68. The extreme southern end of 12 Division from Mirpur to the junction of the Cease
Fire Line with the boundary line dividing Punjab and the Kashmir State (near Burejal)
was held by Nmber 4 Sector commanded by Brigadier Abdul Hamid.
69. The area from the Junction of the Cease Fire Line with the Punajb and Kashmir

RESTD
 67
RESTD

boundary to the River Chenab was the responsibility of 102 Brigade, a regular
independent infantry brigade (nick-named GUJRAT Force_ which until 1964 operated
directly under GHQ.
70. Bhutto perchance found in General Akhtar Malik the man he needed to de-freeze
the Kashmir Issue.
71. In 1962, the Indan Army comprised only nine divisions, it was not nineteen
divisions strong.
72. On 9 May 1965, General Akhtar sent another paper to the CGS.
73. This was more specific in details regarding preparation, planning, organization,
communications, logistics, execution and launching of the insurgency operations in
occupied Kashmir.
74. The President and the C-in-C were accompanied by Major General Malik Sher
Bahadur (CGS), Brigadier Gul Hassan (DMO) and Irshad (DMI).
75. The military aim of launching the guerrilla operations was threefold.
76. Firstly, disrupt Indian civil and military control of the State.
77. Secondly, to encourage, assist and direct an armed revolt by the people of
Kashmir
against Indian military occupation, and thirdly, to create conditions for an advance by
the Azad Kashmir forces into the heart of occupied Kashmir and eventual liberation of
IHK.
78. The operation was code-named GIBRALTAR.
79. General Akhtar Envisaged Operation GIBRALTAR to be conducted in two, broad
phases.
80. The first phase was to create a shock wave by launching raiding attacks on
selected targets and thus prepare the ground for a general uprising.
81. The second phase was incorporation of the civil uprising in the guerrilla
operations
and, therefore depended entirely on the success of the first phase.
82. On 16 May, Brigadier Ishaq and isx other officers reached Headquarters 12
Division to form the “GIBRALTAR” Planning Staff, with the brigadier as the Chief of
Planning Staff.
83. On 17 May 1965, two days after General Akhtar’s briefing in Murree, the Indians
occupied three Pakistani posts opposite Kargil.

RESTD
 68
RESTD

84. This study highlighted tow main hypothesis.

85. The first hypothesis envisaged Indian reaction confined to the territory of Kashmir
in which several variations were considered depending on whether the enemy adopted
a defensive or offensive posture.
86. The second hypothesis stated that GIBRALTAR could lead to an all out war
between India and Pakistan.
87. GIBRALTAR Forces were organized into six groups named TARIQ, QASIM,
KHALID, SALAHUDDIN, GHAZNAVI and BABUR (Map 10).
88. All except the BABUR Force comprised three ro more companies BABUR Force
was only a platoon of thirty-four men.
89. Each company of the five main GIBRALTAR groups consisted of three platoons
of
thirty-four men each and a company headquarters of seven personnel.
90. Correspondingly there were five to six officers in each force to command its
companies.
91. The force headquarters consisted of fourteen members.
92. The hard core of each of the five main GIBRATAR Forces was twenty men
including an officer from the Special Services Group (SSG).
93. All forces headquarters were equipped with a long-range wireless set (GRC-9)
with
wihci the force commanders were to communicate on the GIBRALTAR command net.
94. Below the company level communication was only through messengers.
95. On 4 June 1965, Headquarters 12 Division issued instructins on administrative
and
logistic planning for GIBRALTAR.
96. Each rifle was allotted 200 rounds, sten gun 400 rounds, light machine gun 900
rounds, rocket launcher thirty rockets and each man eight grenades.
97. To ensure the secrecy of Operation GIBRALAR, ‘watertight’ security was
maintained.
98. Towards the end of the second week of July, Headquarters 12 Division issued six

RESTD
 69
RESTD

sets of operation instructions, erhaps separately to each commander of the

GIBRALTAR Forces.
99. Four out of the six GIBRALTAR Forces were tasked to operate in the Kashmir
Valley proper while the objectives of GHAZNAVI and BABUR lay south of the Pir Panjal
Range (Map 10).
100. In the words of Lieutenant Colonel Waqi Uz Zaman (GSO-1 GIBRALTAR
Planning
Saff), “Most of the infiltration routes which were to be taken ……. Passed above 12000
feet (and) were under snow October onwards till April and in some cases till May.
101. Tairq Force was made up of three companies provided by Number 1 and 4
Sectors.
102. It was to operate in the extreme north of the Kashmir Valley mainly astride Zoji
La.
103. The operation area of KHALID Force lay west of the Wular Lake.
104. Comprising four companies, contributed by Number 1, 3 and 4 Sectors, it was
assembled and trained at Batrasi (north of Abbottabad, see Map 8).
105. The strongest of the GIBRALTAR Forces was named SALHUDDIN Force
consisting of six companies which were assembled and trained at Mang Bajri (Map 10)
106. Its manpower was drawn from Number 2 and 4 Sectors, and the AKRF elements
of 102 Brigade.
107. It main task was to isolate Srinagar by demolishing the Banihal Pass Tunnel (in
co-operation which GHAZNAVI Force).
108. SALAHUDDIN Force was also to raid several military installations including
Headquarters of 19 Division at Baramula and ‘render ineffective’ Bakhshi Ghulam
Muhammad, DP Dhar, Maharaja Kiran Singh, (Hari Singh’ son), Mir Qasim and GM
Sadiq.
109. The fifth group of GIBRALTAR was GHAZNAVI Force which consisted of five
companies raised entirely by Number 3 Sector at Dungi in the Khuiratta valley (Map 10).
110. Cease Fire Line nine miles south-west of Rajauri), raid the Headquarters of 25
Division and 80 Brigade, and destroy several military installations,
111. It was to base itself at Sundartop (the height immediately west of the Banihal
Pass
referred to as Point 12725) and deny the road Ramban-Islamabad.

RESTD
 70
RESTD

112. It was also to assist SALAHUDDIN Force in demolishing the tunnels at Banihal
Pass.
113. The sixth group called BABUR Force consisted of only thirty-four men providedby
Number 4 Sector.
114. Its mission was to raid Headquarters XV Corps at Udhampur after which it was to
inflict maximum damage on the telephone communication radiating from Udhampur
(Map 10).
115. The facilitate GIBRALTAR Forces in penetrating and striking deep into the IHK,
another group of infiltrators was organized by General Akhtar which be named NUSRAT
Forces.
116. Their task was to contain the enemy forces deployed along the Cease Fire Line.
117. NUSRAT Forces comprised fourteen groups each approximately 350 strong
(Map
10).
118. Three groups each were provided by Number 1, 2 and 3 Sectors and two each
by
Number 4 Sector and the Northern Scouts.
119. The task of NUSRAT groups was to infiltrate into IHK a few days befoe the D
Day
set for Operation GIBRALTAR, and then harass the enemy holding the Cease Fire Line
and prevent employment of the Indian Forces in the depth against GIBRALTAR Forces.
120. NUSRAT operations were to commence on 7 August, simultaneously with
Operation GIBRALTAR and last about a fortnight.
121. The men selected for GIBRALTAR were divided into three categories according
to
their aptitude and qualifications and put through six weeks training which began on 1
June 1965.
122. The NUSRAT Forces got only four weeks for training.
123. By July, 12 Division was ready to launch GIBRALTAR.
124. On 10 July, a co-ordination conference was held in Headquarters 12 Division in
which details regarding tasks, movement, infiltration routes and administration were
finalized.
125. Three days later, on 13 July, General Akhtar presented the final plan to President

RESTD
 71
RESTD

Ayub and General Musa.

126. 7 August was fixed as the D Day. On this day, all the GIBRALTAR Forces were
to
be in position to strike their targets.
127. In precisely ten weeks General Akhar had assembled, equipped and trained
men,
and stocked material for the guerrilla operations.
128. In 1965, the Indian XV Corps Commanded by Lieutenant General KS Katoch
was
responsible for the whole of IHK (Map 9).
129. It comprised three infantry divisions, one armoured regiment (20 Lancers) and
three independent infantry brigades.
130. With its headquarters at Leh, 3 Infantry Division was essentially deployed along
the border with China.
131. Headquarters 19 Infantry Division was located at Baramula, with 104 Brigade.
132. The area south of the Pir Panjal Range from Punch to Munawwar Gap was
entirely
25 Infantry Division’s responsibility.
133. Incidents of firing and shelling across the Cease Fire Line, large scale intrusions
and similar provocative activities rose to the enormous figure of 1800 during the period
January to July 1965 as compared to only 522 throughout the previous year.
134. Therefore, despite undetected infiltration across the Cease Fire Line, all the
GIBRALTAR Forces, with the exception of GHAZNAVI, ran into trouble at the very
outset of their operations.
135. The Indian authorities received the first new about the presence of infiltrators in
IHK on 5 August 1965 when the local Kashmiris of different areas reported the presence
of strangers near their villages.
136. The first to be discovered were perhaps men from SALAHUDDIN Force’s
company
near Dara Kassi (about 3-4 miles south-east of Tangmarg), and some elements of
NUSRAT Forces in the Mendhar area.
137. An infiltrator of SALAHUDDIN Force caught near Buna Danwas (about four miles

RESTD
 72
RESTD

south of Gulmarg) on 5 August , “…

138. On 8 August, two officers belonging to AK battalions were captured near
Naushahra area from whom the Indians obtained information sufficient to form a
reasonable picture of the scale of infiltration and the guerrilla operations already under
way.
139. TARIQ Force under Major Sikandar infiltrated from Gultari over the Great
Himalaya
Ranges and reached their operational base in Bat Kulan Gang (Point 1476) which lies
north0east of Zoji La.
140. TARIQ Force eventually exfiltrated on 10 September having suffered ten
casualitie.
141. QASIM Force eventually commanded by Major Murtaza began infiltration on the
night of 29-30 July.
142. In spite to adverse flying conditions over IHK, the PAF flew five sorties during the
nights between 21-23 August delivering sixteen packages, fourteen of these were
recovered and QASIM Force managed to stay inside IHK until the third week of
September.
143. QASIM Force suffered sixteen casualities, including five killed.
144. Major Mehraj Din commanded Khalid Force comprising four companies.
145. Four days later the Kumaonese were to mourn the death of Colonel Gore at the
hands of another band of infiltrators (Group E of NUSRAT Force) led by Major Haq
Nawaz Kiani.
146. The six companies strong SALAHUDDIN Force was commanded by Major
Mansha Khan who had west experience and knowledge of the Srinagar Valley.
147. From Its base at Dungi in the Khuiratta valley, GHAZNAVI Force commanded by
Major Munawar, made its way to Rajauri-Budil area without detection (Map 11).
148. Undoubtedly, the most successful of all the GIBRALTAR Forces was GHAZNAVI
Force.
149. The General Officer Commanding 25 Infantry Division, Major General AMREEK
SINGH, gave out on the map and ground the latest situation regarding the infiltration,.
150. Operations GIBRALTAR was supported by NUSRAT Force.
151. The orders fr planning these operations were contained in the directive issued by

RESTD
 73
RESTD

Headquarters 12 Division on 17 May 1965.

152. NUSRAT operations were to commence on the same day as GIBRALTAR, i.e., 7
August .
153. Based on he general concept outlined by General Akhtar.
154. The first targets to be shelled in AK territory were the villages of Chanir, opposite
Paur, and Koil opposite Moel (all places in he Chhamb sector).
155. The enemy had no fear of retaliation from AK side because there were only six
25
Pounder guns belonging to 81 AK Field Battery in the Bhimber area.
156. Therefore, on request by General Akhtar, a few units of IV Corps Artillery (at that
time concentrated at Kharian) were ordered to replay to the Indian shelling.
157. Pakistan artillery responded with devastating accuracy which was to be its chief
characteristic during the war.
158. Brigadier B.F. Master, and his GSO 3 were killed in shelling by the Pakistanis.
159. Taking advantage of the chaos caused by the shelling, Number 4 Sector’s 5 and
19 AK Battalions captured the vacant Indian Positions at Laleali, Point 2086 and Point
1760 (in the Chhamb Sector).
160. However, all three posts had to be given up three days later when the Indians
recovered from their shock and recaptured these posts, all three were vital to the enemy
for surveillance of the approach through the Munawwar Gap.
KASHMIR – III INDIAN RETALIATION
1. 12 Division’s staff study on Enemy’s Reactions which was issued to the sector
commanders on 25 May 1965, began with a paragraph that was as ominous as it was
prophetic.
2. Reaction is confined to Indian Held Kashmir and Azad Kashmir territory only.
3. Within this overall contingency there can be variations depending on whether
India
adopts a defensive or offensive posture.
4. Indian anticipatory measures in Kashmir can be dated from 8 May 1965 when
Sheikh Abdullah and his lieutenant, Mirza Afzal Beg were re-arrested on their return to
India after a three-month tour abroad which included a meeting with the Chinese
Premier Chou en Lai on 30 March.

RESTD
 74
RESTD

5. 3 Infantry Division was at Leh.

6. Further south lay 25 Infantry Division with its headquarters at Rajauri.
7. The Munawar Gap was looked after by 191 Infantry Brigade located at Akhnur
until
the beginning of September when the newly created Headquarters 10 Indian Division
moved in and took over.
8. On 14th August 1965, this Headquarters came into being and was designated
Headquarters SRI Force with Major General UMRAO SINGH in command.
9. Division Tactical Headquarters moved back to BARAMULA.
10. The Indian Army’s retaliatory operations across the Cease Fire Line began on 15
August with the re-occupation of the three posts in the Kargil Sector which had been
occupied by the Indians on 17 May 1965, and vacated after signing of the Kutch Accord
on 30 June 1965.
11. The Indian occupied Talpatra and Burzi posts in Uri area on 16 August and
Kontal
post (Map 13) in the Lipa Valley on 23-24 August.
12. However, the main operations of the Indian Army were launched in he two
important areas of Jura and Bedori Bulges situated in Numbers 1 and 2 Sectors
respectively (Map 12 and 16).
13. Furthermore, although fighting on the regular borders between India and
Pakistan
ended on 23 September 1965, the Indians prolonged the war in Kashmir up to 20
October 1965 (particularly in the Jura Bulge) with the sole aim of capturing a large
chunk of AK territory to improve their bargaining position at the negotiation table.
14. Jura and Bedori Bulges protrude well into IHK and this in 1965 both served as
ideal
launching areas for infiltrators.
15. Bedori Bulge rests on the very foothills of the Pir Panjal Range which facilitated
infiltration towards the central parts of the Srinagar Valley.
16. Lieutenant General KS Katoch, the commander of Indian XV Corps.
17. I reached strongly to this rather passive course of action and in reply made it
clear
that HAJIPIR offensive would be launched on due date, 24 th August 1965. My signal No
O 2048 of same date was as follows.

RESTD
 75
RESTD

18. Chief, Lieutenant General Harbakhsh Singh issued the orders for a three-
pronged
attack against Azad Kashmir.
19. Commanding XV Corps to be prepare for undertaking the following offensive
actions by 25th August 1965.
20. An advance on the HAJIPIR pass by 68 Infantry Brigade operating under 19
Infantry Division, combined with a limited coordinated action from the direction of
PUNCH as link up operation.
21. The improvement of defence posture by 104 Infantry Brigade by destroying the
MIRPUR Brigade and elimination of enemy posts on RICHHMAR Ridge including ALI
KOH.
22. The clearance of all area between River Punch and BALNO1.
23. Another area of concern was Chhamb where reverses had been suffered
primarily
from the firing by Pakistan artillery, resulting in a large number of fatal casualities
including the commander of 191 Brigade (Brigadier BF Masters) and the destruction of
the Deva Camp.
24. The Corps Commander replied that he would prefer such a coure in the DEVA
BATALA area provided he was allowed ot keep the medium battery and 2 Sikh.
25. The Indian Army Chief, however, emphasised that the operation against Haji Pir
Pass should be launched by 27 August and preferably earlier, on the night of 25-26
August 1965.
26. Jura Bulge lay in the operational area of Number 1 Sector.
27. Brigadier Khilji had four ARF battalions under his command to look after his
sector
from Athmuqam to Pir Kanthi which included both Jhelum and Nilam valleys.
28. Like all the other sector commanders of 12 Division, Brigadier Khilji had been
given
the triple role of creating a GIBRALTAR Force (Khalid), raising and launching NUSRAT
Force (Groups C, D and E) and defending a sixty-five mile long border.
29. According to Brigadier Khilji, on 16 or 17 August 1965, Number 1 Sector was
bifurcated perhaps for better command and control of Jhelum and Nilam Valleys.
30. The area from Lipa to Pir Kanthi including the Jhelum valley was designated as

RESTD
 76
RESTD

Number 1 Sector RIGHT with Brigadier Amir Abdullah Khan Niazi, formed commander
of 14 Para Brigade (7 Division) brought in as the commander.
31. The task of reducing the Jura Bulge had been entrusted to 104 Indian Infantry
Brigade which was responsible for defence of the Tangdhar-Ththwal area.
32. Commanded by Brigaider Chauhan, this brigade had four battalions, 1 Sikh, 2
Rajput 4 Kumaon and 3/8 Gurkha Rifles.
33. Kontal Post (Called Ring Contour by the Indian) in the Lipa valley.
34. The first proper Indian attack was directed toward Richhmar ridge – Pir Sahaba.
35. The Sikhs resumed the attack against Pir Sahaba on the night of 25-26 August.
36. On learning about the Indian attack at Pir Sahaba, Brigadier Khilji requested
Headquarters 12 Division for release of 5 Punjab, the nearest uncommitted reserve,
located at Batrasi.
37. Two days later the battalion headquarters of 5 Punjab arrived at Nauseri with
another company and Brigadier Khilji entrusted the area south of River Nilam to
Lieutenant Colonal Syed Ali Zamin Naqvi CO 5 Punjab.
38. Having captured Pir Sahaba from where Nauseri could be effectivel dominated
the
Indian 104 Brigade turned their attention toward Surjoi, their next objective in the Jura
Bulge.
39. Upon designation as commander of Number 1 Sector, Brigadier Niazi was given
under command six battalions in situ namely, 1 Punjab, 5 Punjab, 8 AK, 9 AK, 13 AK
and 16 AK.
40. For artillery support he was given 101 Composite Battery and 89 Mortar Battery.
41. General Akhtar Malik’s appreciation and orders to the KHILJI Force were sent in
the form of a written operation instruction issued under 12 Division’s letter number G-
0877 dated 29 August 1965.
42. On 30 or 31 August 1965 Brigadier Khilji shifted his tactical headquarters to
Surjoi
inside the Jura Bulge whence he could easily descend into the Tangdhar valley.
43. To commemorate the Kumaonese’ victory at Point 9013,the hill was named the
Kumaon Hill.
44. The task of capturing the central part of the Jura Bulge up to the River Nilam was

RESTD
 77
RESTD

entrusted to 104 Indian Infantry Brigade (Map 15) while 268 Indian Infantry Brigade was
tasked to reduce the area north of Jura bridge. 4 Kumaon led 104 Brigade’s operation.
45. Firing continued from both sides until perhaps 20 October when a cease fire was
finally brought into effect in the Nilam Valley.
46. The main Indian operation in Azad Kashmir was launched against the Bedori
Bulge
which lay in the operational area of Number 2 Sector.
47. With its headquarters at Puthimalewan (two miles west of Rawalakot), the
operational area of this sector extended from Pir Kanthi to Battle, a frontage of sixty-five
miles.
48. Dominated by he 12330 feet high Bedori Peak, the area called Bedori Bulge
stretches deep into IHK with its nose resting on the western spurs of the Pir Panjal
Range.
49. Colonel Rafiq took over command of this Sector in the middle of May 1965 from
Brigadier Muhammad Ishaq who had been appointed Chief of GIBRALTAR Planning
Staff.
50. This operation was code named operation BAKSHI while the thrust from the
south
was to be launched by 93 Brigade (25 Division) with the code name of Operation
FAULAD (Map 16).
51. The attack on the Bedori Bulge was to be launched on 24 August 1965,
concurrently with the attack in the Tithwal sector.
52. The Indian troops moved into their assembly areas n rain that had been pouring
for three days.
53. Consequently, the D Day of Operation BAKSHI was postponed to 25 August
1965.
54. 93 Infantry Brigade (25 Infantry Division) planned to achieve the link-up by
capturing a series of features en route of which the most important was Chand Tekri
(Point 7702).
55. To that extent the contribution of Operation FAULAD to the overall HAJIPIR
offensive was considerably reduced.
56. Lieutenant Colonel Fazale Hamid, the CO of 6 AK launched a prompt counter

RESTD
 78
RESTD

attack with a company held in reserve on the reverse slope of Bisali.

57. The third element was an ad hoc organization actually made up of troops taken
from 3 Rajputana Rifles and 3 Rajput with the name of MEGHDOOT Force under the
command of Major Megh Singh which concentrated at Gutrian to attack Nezapir and Ari
Dhok through Mantahar Nala.
58. The intrepid Commanding Officer of 2 SIKH, Lieutenant Colonel NN KHANNA,
was
also fatally wounded as he led his battalion into the attack.
59. For this act of bravery Lieutenant Colonel NN KHANNA was awarded the MVC.
60. With the capture of Chand Tekri by 93 Infantry Brigade and Haji Pir Pass by 68
Infantry Brigades, the enemy had secured the southern and northern approaches to the
Bedori Rulge.
61. To recapitulate the positions on the Pakistani side it may be recalled that Number
2 Sector had readjusted its defensive positions after the fall of Haji Pir Pass (Map 19).
62. On night 7-8 September the enemy launched four separate attacks from the
direction of Haji Pir Pass on 20 Punjab positions at Sar-Gitlan.
63. Praval writes, “When cease fire came, Point 8777 was still in enemy hands”.
64. After the capture of Chand Tekri, the two regular battalions of 93 Infantry Brigade
(2 Sikh and 3 Dogra) had been tasked to mp up and exploit up to Degwar Tirwan and
Chhan
65. Jal bridge while the ad hoc MEGHDOOT force had been assigned the task of
raiding the ammunition dump pat Kahuta (Map 20).
66. The Gurkhas were also ordered to establish a base on he spur next to Chakias
and thence carry out a raid on Palangi in addition to their main task (Map 21).
67. This Indian operation was code named Operation PANNE SHAH.
68. Number 2 Sector lost 180 killed and 352 wounded during the battle the Bedori
Bulge.
69. The loss of Bedori Bulge, especially the capture of Haji Pir Pass by the Indians
echoed far and wide on both sides of the Subcontinent.
70. Thinning out of defences along the Cease Fire Line for allocation of troops for
Operation GIBRALTAR and NUSRAT was a risk which GHQ should have covered by
replacing the AK units with the regular forces.

RESTD
 79
RESTD

71. On the other hands loss of space in upper AK (Jura and Bedori) should have
been
acceptable in the context of the overall plan whereby the coup de grace was to be
delivered through the Mnawwar Gap.
72. In spite of their failure, GIBRALTAR and NUSRAT were no ordinary operations.
73. While it cannot be denied that the Indians retaliated violently and captured some
vital areas across the Cease Fire Line in Jura and Bedori Bulges., the true quality of
good generalship lies n retrieving a hopeless situation.
74. At the time when the Indians were making rapid gains in his sector, Colonel Rafiq
confided in General Akhtar his fears of defeat and its ignominious consequences.
75. By end of August, the Indians had already pulled out at least two brigades from
Jammu which were committed in IHD against the
76. Infiltrators or for the offensive operations across the Cease Fire Line.

KASHMIR IV – OPERATION GRAND SLAM

77. There are three main approaches to Jammu eastern, southern and western (Map
23).
78. The western approach is through a geographical appendage of IHK called the
Munawwar Gap, which lies between the Cease Fire Line and Akhnur.
79. Munawwar Gap, the area over which General Akhtar contemplated launching his
coup de main, is Kalidhar ridge and in the south by the River Chenab, with the base
along the Cease Fire Line, and the apex at Akhnur (Map 24).
80. Covered by low bushes, the ground is undulating and slopes from north to south
interspersed with numerous non-perennial streams (loally called Khads) which flow
down from the foothills into the River Chenab.
81. Munawwarwali Tawi (commonly referred to as the River Tawi) is one of the main
perennial tributaries of the Chenab in this region.
82. The River Chenab itself emerges from the mountains at Akhnur, flowing south
westwards, sprawling on the plains like a delta formed by its several small channels all
of which reunite at Marala Head-works.

RESTD
 80
RESTD

83. River Chenab had a bridge (class 18) at Akhnur which had been reinforced by
the
railway department of India after the skirmish in the Rann of Kutch.
84. General Akthar Hussain Malik had his eyes on the Munawwar Gap approach
even
before Operation GIBRALTAR was approved.
85. As early as 9 May 1965, he had written to the CGS in the demi official letter
accompanying the paper titled Commando/Guerrilla Activities inside IHK.
86. As may be recalled on 15 May 1965 (six days after he had written the letter
quoted
above), General Akhtar’s plan for the guerrilla operations in IHK was approved by
President Ayub which set in motion planning and preparations for the covert operations.
87. Grouping of forces and their assembly were left to the very last moment at the
end
of August 1965, when the decision was finally taken to launch the offensive.
88. It would be recalled that between 24 and 28 August 1965, the Indians first
captured
Pir Sahaba in the Nilam valley and then Haji Pir Pass in the Bedori Bulge.
89. The Directive imposed a self defeating restriction on the military of defreezing the
Kashmir issue without provoking a general war.
90. An attack through the Munawwar Gap threatened Indian lines of communications
to Rajauri and Punch.
91. Brigadier Irshad, the DMI pointed out that the attack through the Munawwar Gap
should be limited t othe line of the River Tawi on reaching which it should be called of.
92. “This would mean war with India” General Akhtar remarked, “You’ve been paid
long enough to make a war”.
93. The responsibility of launching the attack through the Munawwar Gap was given
to 12 Division.
94. Major General Akhtar Hussain Malik assigned it the code name Operation
GRAND
SLAM.

RESTD
 81
RESTD

95. The forces employed for this operation totaled a little over three brigades and two
armoured regiments.
96. One infantry Brigade (102 Brigade) and an AKRF Battalion (19 AK) were drawn
from 12 Division, to brigades (10 and 25 Brigades) were taken from 7 Division while the
two armoured regiments (11 Cavalry and 13 Lancers) were shed by the newly created 6
Armoured Division.
97. Brigadier Azmat Hayat Khan, the commander of 20 Infantry Brigade was given
orders separately on 30 August uon his arrival from Bhai Pheru (South of Lahore).
98. The D-Day for GRAND SLAM was fixed on 1 September 1965.
99. After General Musa’s talk, GHQ issued an operation instruction addressed by
name to the Commander of 1 Corps (Lieutenant General Bakhtiar Rana) and all the
division commanders (Including General Akhtar), and the commanders of 51 and 105
Independent Infantry Brigades.
100. When it came to the role of 10 Infantry Brigade, Major General Yahya Khan,
GOC
7 Division.
101. 7 Division had been literally stripped of all its fighting forces by the end of August
1965.
102. Here was the first case in the 1965 War where the absence of a corps
headquarters was the ruin a brilliant military enterprise.
103. Number 4 Sector, commanded by Brigadier Abdul Hamid, consisted of 5, 14 and
19 AKRF Battalions.
104. 102 Infantry Brigade, Commanded by Brigadier Zafar Ali, had enjoyed an
independent status until March 1964 when it was grouped under 12 Division for
operational convenience.
105. 10 Brigade was located at Bhai Pheru, Commanded by Brigadier Azmat Hayat
Khan.
106. 11 Cavalry had moved from Nowshera (NWFP) to Gujranwala in May 1965 as
part
of 6 Armoured Division.
107. 13 Lancers too was part of 6 Armoured Division and located at Gujranwala.
108. The apparent aim of Operation GRAND SLAM was to capture Akhnur with a view

RESTD
 82
RESTD

to launching further operations towards Rajauri (Map 23).

109. That was in the (written) operation order …. But in the verbal orders GOC 12
Division said that once we’ve got Akhnur, then we can decide whether we go in the
direction of Rajauri or Naushahra or Jammu.
110. Order issued by 12 Division on 31 August clearly laid down Rajauri as the final
objective although General Akhtar’s real objective after Akhnur was to be Jammu.
111. Perhaps the best direction and certainly the shortest to Jammu was from Sialkot.
112. In this area the Pakistani territory is contiguous to the disputed State of Jammu
and Kashmir.
113. In fact the traditional border between the State of Jammu and Kashmir and the
Province of Punjab runs over a distance of 120 miles starting from the Cease Fire Line
(which in 1965met the boundary of Gujrat District slightly west of Burejal) up to Abial
Dogran north-west of Shakargarh.
114. Owing to the disputed status of Jammu and Kashmir, this particular stretch of line
is termed as Working Boundary to differentiate it from the formal international boundary.
115. As per the written orders issued on the eve of Operation GRAND SLAM, the
offensive was to be executed in three phases.
116. The second phase was to start possibly by midday on 1 September, on code
word
EXCELSIOR.
117. In the third phase beginning with issue of code word SPRING BOARD.
118. On the second day of Operation GRAND SLAM towards Jhangar on the code
word
ROLL TOP.
119. The Preparatory bombardment was to last an hour and a half commencing at
0330
hours on 1 September.
120. The H Hour was set at 0500 hours on 1 September 1965.
121. The relative strength situation in IHK on the eve of Operation GRAND SLAM was
much the same as before and remained so throughout the seventeen days war.
122. Off the three infantry Divisions, 3 Division was committed in Kargil area, 19
Division

RESTD
 83
RESTD

was in Baramula and 25 Division in Rajauri area.

123. However in view of the situation in IHK its first GOC, Major General DB Chopra
was moved on 25 August 1965 and placed under command XV Corps.
124. During this conference the Chief of Army Staff defined the future task of XV
Corps
in the following order of priority.
a. To hunt out the infiltrators.
b. To complete the Uri-Punch link up.
c. To be prepared for an offensive by Pak.
125. The entire Munawwar Gap was the responsibility of 191 Infantry Brigade from the
Kalidhar ridge in the north to the Working Boundary in the south.
126. Brigadier Manmohan Singh had taken over command after Brigadier BF Master
had been killed in the artillery duel on 15 August.
127. The Punjab Armed Police (PAP) was positioned in the border posts along the
working boundary from excluding Burejal to Akhnur.
128. The Headquarters of 191 Brigade was said to be in Akhnur.
129. The success of Operation GRAND SLAM’s first phase depended on 102 infantry
Brigade comprising three infantry battalions.
130. The quick assembly n the night before battle, involving almost seventeen miles
of
approach march by tanks and up to twelve miles by infantry, was a remarkable
achievement for the brigade staff and the units.
131. At 0330 hours on 1 September, massive artillery fire, the heaviest of the war
announced the commencement of Operation GRAND SLAM.
132. Enjoying an overwhelming superiority over the Indians, 110 pieces of artillery
under Brigadier Amjad Ali Chaudhry, commander of IV Corps Artillery, pounded every
conceivable target lying fin the path of the attacking troops of 12 Division for one and a
half hour.
133. Major General ML Thapan, GOC of 26 Indian Infantry Division at Jammu had
Been tipped off by a UN observer.
134. An Indian company position was captured by 0700 hours and Dingwali cleared
half

RESTD
 84
RESTD

an hour later.
135. Khairowal was contacted by 0810 hours but en route Lieutenant Colonel
Muhammad Hanif, CO 9 Punjab, was wounded by a splinter from an enemy tank shell
which delayed the infantry advance for some time.
136. At 0905 ours, the first tank to tank battle started at road-nala junction in which the
enemy lost three tanks while B Squadron suffered no casualities except track of one
tank was damaged by enemy RR from the Mandiala ridge.
137. 9 Punjab bean to advance from Khairowal under their second-in-command Major
Abdul Majeed Babar but were held up by stiff enemy opposition around Chhamb-
Sakrana.
138. C Squadron was actually the first to make contact with the enemy on 1
September
when its leading troop ran into an Indian anti-tank next in Dalla and lost two M36B2 tank
busters to the fire of enemy recoilless rifles.
139. Major Main Raza Shah, was left with only one tank at this stage.
140. After a quick foot reconnaissance, he gallantly advanced with his tank towards
village Chak Pandit, which was his squadron objective for Phase 1.
141. Without caring for the personal safety, this officer kept moving in a solitary tank
through enemy shelling and thick growth of vegetation without infantry.
142. He finally reached his objective single handed at 0900 hours.
143. Unfortunately, his tank was knocked out by an enemy recoilless rifle hidden in a
maize field north of Chak Pandit, where he was killed.
144. According to 102 Infantry Brigades operations record. This very courageous
officer
changed four tanks, one after the other to be able to control the advance of his
squadron.
145. Despite the fact that all other tanks had either bogged down or hit by enemy anti
tank fire, this officer continued the advance with his solitary tank.
146. Just after the capture of Chak Pandit his tank received a direct hit from the
medium
gun killing all members of the crew except the driver.
147. For his bravery this officer was recommended for the award of “Nishan-e-Haider”.
148. In the words of Lieutenant General ZUlfiqar Akhtar Naz, adjutant of the battalion

RESTD
 85
RESTD

during the war.

149. 6 Sikh Light Infantry the best Indian Battalion. I Thnk, we faced during the war.
150. Lieutenant Colonel Muhammad Siddique Khan, Commanding Officer 8 Baloch,
ordered his C Company to attack and clear Burejal.
151. Major Shah Nawaz’s body was found at the edge of the Indian defences.
152. Ultimately at 6 p.m four Vampires and four Mysteries were over the battle-field.
153. The Vampires circled over 3 Mahar localities and strafed their positions.
154. All four Indian planes were knocked down by PAF aircraft over 3 Mahar area in
area Uparla Batala within sight of the Battalion.
155. General Chaudhuri, the Chief also happened to be at Srinagar on that day (1
September)
156. Notwithstanding the delayed fall of Chhamb, the capture of the area wwst of the
Tawi in less than twenty-four hours was no small success for 12 Division.
157. The change of command which took place between General Akhtar and General
Yahya in the afternoon on 2 September 1965, has been a matter of great controversy
over since.
158. It may be recalled that the crisis in Haji Pir Pass was over with the loss of the
pass
on 28 August 1965, after which thee was no major Indian activity in the Bedori or Jura
Bulges until 5 September when the enemy resumed the attacks in upper Azad Kashmir.
159. Akhnur itself was to be captured in the third phase by the whole brigade.
160. The commander IV Corps Artillery was told by his GSO-2 Operations Major Alim
Afridi that a message had been received from the brigade major of 10 Brigade at about
2230.
161. Commander 10 Brigade (Brigadier Azmat Hayat Khan).
162. Neither code word EXCELSIOR (start Phase 2) nor COCO COLA (guns were
ready, start advancing) was received throughout the morning in spite of four or five
inquiries from the Division Headquarters and Headquarters 4 Corps Artillery.
163. Azmat Hayat proved his loyalty to his real GOC who was also the future C-in-C.
164. The battle of Chhamb was practically over by the afternoon (on 1 September).
165. After searching for some time, Brigadier Amjad drove towards Chak Pandit
where
he met Lieutenant Colonel Muhammad Sher, CO 13 Lancers, who also was to meet the
commander of 10 Brigade at the cross road.
166. If commander 10 Brigade had been sincere about his task, he could have
reached
General Akhtar through various radio nets including that of CO 27 Field Regiment.

RESTD
 86
RESTD

167. Brigadier Khurshid, the Commander Artillery 7 Division, arrived and informed
Brigadier Amjad that the command of troops participating in Operation GRAND SLAM
had been changed and given to General Yahya.
168. In Late afternoon I sent Gulzar and Vahid, my P.M officers, to try and locate him,
but they too failed.
169. Brigadier Iqbal Ahmad Shamim (GSO-1 Operations) who was manning the
Tactical Headquarters of 12 Division at Kharian.
170. In an ‘OPERATIONAL IMMEDIATE’ message signed at 1825 hours on 1
September, the GHQ placed 6 Infantry Brigade under 7 Division.
171. On 2 September 1965, General Musa accompanied by Brigaider Abid Bilgrami,
the VCGS, flew from Rawalpindi in two separate helicopters to the Tactical
Headquarters of 12 Division at Kharian.
172. The delay in launching the second phase of Operation GRAND SLAM enable 41
Mountain Brigade to strengthen the positions hurriedly occupied by its two infantry
battalions, 9 Mahar and 1/8 Gurkha Rifles.
173. Three AMX-13 tanks (all that remained of 20 Lancers’ C Squadron) had been left
at Jaurian by 191 Brigade.
174. The total number of tanks available with the Regiment were accordingly on 14.
175. I held frantic consultations on telephone with General Officer Commanding XV
Corps, and later with the Vice Chief of Army Staff Lieutenant General PP
KUMARAMANGALAM.
176. During the night an enemy mine laying party consisting of an engineers officer
and
thirty five men (including two junior commissioned officer) blundered into 14 Punjab’s
positions and were taken prisoners.
177. 161 Field Regiment had abandoned all its gun (twenty-four in number) which
were
later captured by the advancing Pakistani troops.
178. Jaurain finally fell at 0900 hours on 5 September.
179. The Chief Indian Army spoke to Brigadier Pritpal over the telephone from Delhi at
4 p.m (on 5 September) and congratulated him for holding the Fatwal ridge against all
odds.

RESTD
 87
RESTD

180. Operation GRAND SLAM, which had started with great fanfare of artillery on 1
September, came to a mute, unceremonious and abrupt end on September.
181. This took away the striking potential out of 10 Infantry Division and our position at
FATWAL took a permanent shape.

182. One company of 19 AK Battalion with a mortar platoon occupied the Kalidhar

feature (Trigonometric Height 3774) and Budhi Dhak.

183. In the Battle of Akhnur, the Indians fought a text book operation of withdrawal

though at an unnecessarily high price in equipment.

184. 13 Lancers and then 11 Cavalry, both of which had two squadron each of M-48

Pattan Tanks, a superiority over enemy armour which nether unit was able to exploit to
its advantage.

185. The blame for the failure of GRAND SLAM must rest squarely first on the
shoulders

of General Musa for the unplanned, unnecessary and ill-timed change of command
which caused unnecessary delay, and then on General Yahya Khan who needlessly
imposed further delays in execution of the operation.

186. It would be recalled that the Indian Army Chief, General JN Chaudhri, after

discussing the situation with General Katock in Srinagar on 1 September had flown to
New Delhi to obtain his government’s permission to attack Pakistan across the
international border.

187. From the time the decision was taken in May 1965 to the time of guerrilla forces

were launched at the end of July, there were barely three months in which the forces
had to be recruited, trained, equipped and launched – a remarkable achievement
judging by standards of conventional military operations which GIBRALTAR was not,
Operation GIBRALTAR was doomed to failure from the beginning because it had a
deadline to meet on 6 August 1965, and neither the brilliance of General Akhtar Malik’s
planning nor the willingness of the ‘holy’ warriors of GIRRALTAR to lay down their lives
could compensate for the inherent shortcomings of the operations.

188. The guerrilla forces were launched over a very large area resulting in dilution of

their efforts.

189. Operation GRAND SLAM was a logical move after the failure of the guerrilla

RESTD
 88
RESTD

operations.

190. But Nehru had sounded an unequivocal warning to Pakistan as early as 1952
when

he said, “… if Pakistan by mistake invades Kashmir, we will not only meet them in
Kashmir but it will be full-scale war between India and Pakistan.

191. Bhutto kept insisting that his sources has assured him that India would not attack

if we did not violate the international border.

192. It I got you by the throat, it would be silly for me to expect that you will kill me for
it.
193. Because I was certain that war would follow, my first choice as objective for

GRAND SLAM was Jammu.

194. From there we could have exploited our success either towards Samba or
Kashmir

proper as the situation demanded.

195. In any case whether it was Jammu or Akhnur, if we had taken the objective, I
don’t

see how the Indians could have attacked Sialkot before clearing out either of these
towns.

196. Operation GRAND SLAM itself was ruined by the unnecessary intervention by

General Musa who ordered a meaningless change of command at an important

moments.

197. At 2230 hours on the night of 4-5 September, a small group of men led by Major

Nazir called BABR force (the sixth of the GIBRALTAR Force) intercepted a dispatch
rider east of Sialkot, on the road between Samba and Jammu.

198. The mail bag captured from the Indian dispatch rider contained letters belonging

to the units of Indian 1 Armoured Division.

199. The satchel was brought to Headquarters 15 Division at Sialkot on 5 September

from where it was immediately flown in a light army aircraft to GHQ.

200. However, neither Headquarters 15 Division nor GHQ took any serious note of the

RESTD
 89
RESTD

vital information revealed by the contents of the mail bag.

TRAGEDY OF ERRORS

CAUSES OF ALIENATION

1. The most significant effect of the geographical separation of the two wings of

Pakistan was the alienation of East Bengal from the rest of the Country.
2. What were the main causes for the alienation? These could be grouped under

cultural, economic, political and military.

3. The Bengali language was formed as an interaction between Sanskirt and Pali.
4. In the distant past the inhabitants of the land of Bengal spoke their own dialect

which had been mothered by the tow ancient languages. As Islam spread over the
region Persian and Urdu began to be spoken amongst the urban elite.
5. A.M.K Maswani, goes to great length to prove that Urdu was the language of the

Muslims of Bengal earlier in the century and that modern Bengali was introduced by the
Hindus.
6. Colonel Syed Farooq Rehmani, president of the Freedom Party of Bengladesh,

maintains that the Bengali script was introduced by Ram Nivas Banerjee, principal of
Hindu College Benaras (India) in 1862.
7. Raunaq Jahan, the well known analyst of South Asian Affairs, accepts that the

“Secular Renaissance of Bengali started in the 19 th and 20th century due to contribution
of Hindu writers.
8. Azizur Rehman Mullick, a one time ambassador of Bangladesh to India, also
writes

in his Ph.D thesis on the ‘British Educational policy for the Muslims of Bengal’ that the
court language of Bengal was Persian in the days of the Moghuls.
9. It is also true that in all the All India Muslim League sessions held since its
inception

in 1905 the representatives from Bengal spoke in English or Urdu.

RESTD
 90
RESTD

10. Non spoke in Bengali,

11. Written Bangla remained the domain of Hindu Bengalis which reached its heights

because of the writings of Sarat Chander Chatterjee, Bankin Chander Banerjee and the
legendary rabinder Nath Tagore.
12. In February, 1948 (less than a year after the creation of Pakistan) Mr.

Dhirendranath Dutt. A Hindu member of the East Bengal Copngress Party, moved an
amendement ot the proposed constitution pleading that Bengali should also be made
the official language of Pakistan.
13. Dr. Aafia Dil, a Bengali lady with a Ph.D in linguistics from Michigan, USA, while

tracing the history of the Bengali language movement felt that the spirit of independence
in Bengal was expressed in the form of having the freedom to make their mother tongue
the means of all communication.
14. According to her the demand for Bangla to be made an official language of

Pakistan was initially made by a small group of communists.

15. When the communist party was banned the Bengali language movement entered

the Dacca University (Fazalul Haq Hall) from where it spread far and wide and assumed
a volatile configuration.
16. Mr Jinnah made a statement in the Constituent Assembly on 25 February, 1948

that Pakistan being a Muslim state Urdu would be its state language.
17. The students asked Khawaja Nazimuddin, the then chief minister of East Bengal,

the put forward their demand for Bengali to be accepted as one of the state languages
of Pakistan.
18. The students could not have been very happy when the founder of the nation told

them during his speech at Dacca on 19 March, 1948 that “Urdu and Urdu alone will be
the lingua franca of Pakistan”.
19. Khondkar Mushtaq Ahmed, a leading lawyer of of Dacca and an active politician,

who had served jail sentences during the Quit-India movement of 1942, was among
those who raised a ssilent protest against the Quaid, on family of Deshpara, Daud
Kundi in Comilla and supporter of a United Pakistan ahe was willing to go to jail again in
support of his mother tongue.

RESTD
 91
RESTD

20. Language riots broke out when the National Educational Conference

recommended only Urdu to be the national language.

21. Khawaja Nazimuddin had promised that the East Bengal Assembly would adopt
a

resolution making Bengali the official language of the province and would request the
central government to adopt it as one of the state languages but he failed to keep his
word.
22. Nazimuddin, who had by then become the prime minister of Pakistan, made a

statement in February 1952, about Urdu becoming the only state language of Pakistan,
He is reported to have said “except for a few persons none in East Bengal demanded to
make Bengali a state language”.
23. There was a strike in the Dacca University which spread to the rest of the city.

Curfew was imposed on 21 February. The next day section 144 was violated.
24. Two students, far removed from the scene, were killed by stray bullets in a hostel

of university.
25. The unfortunate students became martyrs.
26. A shaheed minar was soon erected to commemorate their ‘sacrifices’.
27. Chaudhry Nur-ul-Islam, a Bengali lecturer at the Dacca University, along with a

professor of political science, were jailed for propagating the demand for Bengali to be
also given the status of a national language.
28. The significance of this event can be judged from the fact that the first stamp
issued

by the government of Bangladesh commemorated the two students who died during the
language riots.
29. Brigadier Abdul Hafeez, the director of the Bangladesh Institute of International

and Strategic Studies (BIISS), felt that Nazimuddin became extremely unpopular in East
Bengal because he had not supported the Bengali Language movement.
30. “The seeds of the secessionist movement were sown in the 1950x when Urdu
was

declaed to be the only national language said Professor Shamsul Haq, a former minister
in the Yahya Cabinet and later chairman of the BIISS.

RESTD
 92
RESTD

31. Nazimuddin, was dismissed by Malik Ghulam Muhammad the eccentric and

paralytic but power ful governor-general of Pakistan.

32. Ghulam Muhammad’s answer to the language riots was the language of bullets,
a

response which comes easily to a government servant.

33. Field Marshal Muhammad Ayub Khan, as president of Pakistan, also could not
rise

above parochial issues when he said “It is quite clear to me that with tow national
languages we cannot become one nation.
34. He should have known that there are three official languages in Switzerland and

two in Canada.
35. It was only after the spilling of a lot of bad blood between the two wings that the

1956 Constitution accepted Bengali as one of the state languages.

36. “Janab Isi Wajhe sy Pakistan toot gaya” According to professor Abdul Qayyum,

President of the Institute of Regional Studies, Islamabad, lay in the language issue.
37. None of the demographic dissimilarities would altered the loyalty of the Bengalis

towards Pakistan if they had not been treated as inferiors or if they had not been
deprived of their legitimate rights.
38. The Language riots had already resulted in a bitter feeling against the centre.
39. Emotions were again aroused when Governor Abdul Monem Khan of East

Pakistan and Khawaja Shahabuddin, the minister of information and broadcasting,

himself a Bengali, but from the urban elite, banned the songs of Rabinder Nath Tagore
from being broadcast from Radio Dacca and 0other radio stations in East Pakistan.
40. Tagore (1861-1941), was born in Kushtia, East Bengal, which added to his

credentials in the eyes of the East Bengalis.

41. He occupied a place of pride in Bengali literature.
42. Writings of Khushal Khan Khattak in the Frontier and his poetry was not banned
in

the West Pakistan.

RESTD
 93
RESTD

43. He said that he was not reminded of the verses of Allama Iqbal in praise of the
All

Mighty at that instance but it was a stanza from Tegore’s Gitanjali which came to his
mind. “Prabhoo (Hindu name for Allah), please give me just a little more strength to be
able to reach you so that I can put this mala (garland), which I have bought for you,
around your neck before its flowers wither away recited Qayyoom.
44. The admiration of Tagore’s poetry by the people of East Bengal can be judged

from the fact that his famous poem Amar Sonar Bangla (My golden Bengal) depicting
the beauty of the flora and fauna of Bengal is the national anthem of Muslim
Bengladesh today.
45. Jadu Nath Sarkar’s History of Bengal – The Muslim period, could have been

replaced by another comprehensive and authentic history book which would have given
a more accurate picture of the Mughal rule in Bengal
46. Khalid Bin Sayeed, a well known author, correctly points out that it was the semi

literate religious leaders in West Pakistan who thought that the Bengali Muslims needed
‘Purification”.
47. The Indonesian Muslims are quite different to the Saudia Arabians in their dress

and festivals.
48. Even their National symbol is the Garuda a mythical figure in the Hindu religion.
49. Even the word Assalam-o-Alaikum which is a common form of greetings in most

Muslim countries is not always son in the Arab world were Ahlan wa Sahlan or Saba-al-
Khair are more in use.
50. The Bulbul Academy was reviving he performing arts of East Bengal.
51. Dance and music, which the conservative elements of Muslim society consider
un

Islamic, was very much part of Muslim Bengali culture.

52. Bengali girls (both Muslims & Hindus alike) were required to be proficient on
some

musical instruments.
53. Knowing how to perform a classical dance was an added qualification for
marriage.

RESTD
 94
RESTD

54. G.W Chaudhry, himself a Bengali, writes that “East Pakistani’s began to look
more

and more towards West Bengal for cultural affinity”.

55. Mr. Aziz Ahmed, who was chief secretary in East Bengal in the early 50s, is

reported to have held open hatcheries (Public meeting) while sitting within a mosquito
net to save himself from the omni-present hordes of mosquitos.
56. On the 23rd of March, 1969, General Agha Muhammad Yahya Khan, commander

in-chief of the Pakistan Army declared Martial Law.

57. East Pakistani soldiers in various army units were often addressed by their fellow

soldiers as ‘Bengali’ rather than being called by their proper names.

58. What angered the East Pakistanis, politicians and intellectuals more than just

cultural attitude, was their inability to have their due share in the administration of the
country.
59. Ilyas Shah and his successors defied the directives coming from a distant capital

at Delhi during the Khilji period.

60. Raunaq Jahan, professor of political science at the University of Dacca,
considers

the Bengalis to be “The most political peoples of the subcontinent”.

61. Khawaja Nazimuddin was made the first chief minister of East Bengal.
62. Nazimuddin also ran into trouble because of the flood of 1949 which destroyed
the rice crop.
63. In December, 1949 the East Bengal Muslim League adopted a resolution

demanding full provincial autonomy in all matters except defence and foreign affairs.
64. They objected to the Basic Principle Committee Report (BPC), presented by
Liaqat

Ali Khan in 1950, according to which the House of the People (Lower House) would be
elected on the basis of population with East Bengal getting 165 seats and the remaining
four provinces in West Pakistan getting only 135.
65. Kamaruddin and Ata-Ur-Rehman, both budding East Bengali politicians began to

RESTD
 95
RESTD

arouse east Bengali feelings against the BPC.

66. On 4 November 1950 the Grand National Convention in Dacca demanded full

regional autonomy conceding only three subjects to the Centre i.e, defence, foreign
affairs and currency.
67. After Liaqat Ali Khan’s death the Muslim League split into a Bengali faction
headed

by Khawaja Nazimuddin and a Punjabi faction supported by Governor General Ghulam

Muhammad.
68. The major damage to the integrity of the country was done, in the initial stages,
by

Ghulam Muhammad, who began to rule over Pakistan as if it was his personal fiefdom.
69. His tampering with the constitution could only be given sanction by the timid

judiciary.
70. By dismissing Khawaja Nazimuddin, on 17 April, 1953 when he was still

commanding the majority in the constituent assembly and against whom no mass street
demonstrations or agitation had started Ghulam Muhammad set as wring precedent.
71. It is a pity that an unconstitutional act should have been done by one who
claimed

to be the disciple of Haji Waris Ali Shah, a most revered personality of Deva Sharif
(United Provinces, India) and who in spite of being the governor general of Pakistan
wanted to be buried at Haji Saheb’s feet at Bara Banki, in India.
72. The provincial election held in East Bengal in 1954 not only saw the demise of
the

Muslim League in that province but it also threw up political and socio-economic issues
which had been laying dormant so far.
73. In December, 1954 the One-Unit scheme, whereby the four provinces of West

Pakistan, viz Punjab, NWFP, Sindh and Balochistan were grouped together to form one
political unit to be called west Pakistan with its Capital in Lahore, was approved.
74. The grouping of the provinces of West Pakistan into one administrative unit was

RESTD
 96
RESTD

initially mentioned in 1948 and ‘aired’ again in the constituent assembly by Malik Feroze
Khan Noon in 1949.
75. The 1956 Constitution was passed on 2 March, 1956, Pakistan then took the
shape

of two administrative units one in the East and one in the West, with parity between
them.
76. In 1957, the East Pakistan Legislative Assembly re-affirmed the demand for the

Centre to have jurisdiction over three subjects only viz. defence, foreign affairs and
currency.
77. Development of infrastructure, granting of permits and licenses, sanctioning of

loans, educational policies, raising of revenues were in most cases being controlled by
ministries located in Karachi.
78. The only person who had the ability and the stature to keep the two wings
together

was Hussein Shaheed suharwardy who was also alienate when he was forced to esign
from the prime minister in October, 1957.
79. On 7 October, 1958 General Ayub, with Sinkander Mirza’s connivance, staged a

successful coup.
80. The Field Marshal, introduced his own form of democracy.
81. The 1962 Constitution took away the right of the people to chose their own

representatives directly to the national and provincial legislature.

82. The 1962 Constitution did include constitutional assurances that ‘disparity would

soon be removed between the two wings’ but having aroused the expectations and hot
being able to fulfill them created greater bitterness that here-to-fore.
83. In the first Ayub Cabinet barring the four serving general officers the remaining

eight ministers were equally divided between East and West Pakistan.
84. However, out of 198 Ministers ,ministers of state and deputy ministers appointed

in the cabinets during the period 1947-1971, one hundred and twenty were from West
Pakistan and only seventy-eight from the eastern wing.
85. From 1958 to 1971 there was military government and they also failed to remedy

RESTD
 97
RESTD

the situation.
86. Numerical distribution of gazetted and non gazetted officers in 1966 also
indicates

that the East Pakistanis in spite of Having a majority, were outnumbered in corridors of
power as Table 3 Shows.
NUMERICAL DISTRIBUTION OF GAZETTED
AND NOT GAZETTED OFFICERS (1966)

West Pakistan East Pakistan

Gazetted Not Gazetted Not Gazetted

Gazetted

3708 82944 1338 26310

87. Khan Bahadur Abdul Aleem Chaudhry was an additional district magistrate in

1940. This was the highest civil service post held by a Muslim in Bengal at that time.
When Pakistan came into being out of 101 Muslim members of the central services of
India only 18 had been from Bengal.
88. Thirty five were from areas which became West Pakistan and the remainder forty

eight came from the Muslim Minority provinces of India.

89. The Majority of whom were from the United Provinces.
90. Bengalis, therefore, occupied only 17.9% of the government posts in Pakistan at

the time of partition.

91. Section to the central services was on the basis of examinations conducted by
the

Public Service Commission of Pakistan headed by a senior retired judge or civil servant.
92. Consequently in 1951 out of a total 30 persons selected from East Bengal 14
were

refugees. Only 16 were local Bengalis.

93. Numbers of persons qualifying on merit from East Pakistan was nil in 1970 but

even then 67 were inducted from East Pakistan.

RESTD
 98
RESTD

94. Punjab, Madras, Bombay and United Provinces had even before Partition a
higher

number educational Institutions than in the other provinces.

95. United Provinces alone, in the 40’s had six Universities.
96. Unfortunately, East Bengal at the time of Partition had only the Dacca University.
97. In order to get some representation from provinces other than Punjab a quota

system was introduced.

98. The flaw in the argument remained the comparison between one province and
four other provinces cabined.
99. If each province was taken separately East Pakistan would not have been
singled

out.
100. An impression that the East Bengalis have been really discriminated against as

there was no secretary from East Bengal till July, 1962.

101. The Fact that there were three joint secretaries and seventeen deputy
secretaries

by 1962 when there was none at independence should not have gove unnoticed to a
more impartial observer.
102. The point that is often forgotten is that asking for appointments in the civil service

on the basis of population alone is not conducive to an efficient administration.

103. Education in West Pakistan was growing at a faster rate than in East Pakistan.
104. Between 1965 – 1971 and matriculates in the West increased by 143.7%.
105. In East Pakistan the increase was 6.3%.
106. It was the Bengali Hindus who benefited from the the centres of learning in their

province.
107. The number of primary schools even went down and only a marginal increase in

the secondary schools was achieved though education at these levels was a provincial
subject.
108. The Muslims of East Bengal, even before independence, were not enthusiastic

about joining the armed force.

RESTD
 99
RESTD

109. It was during World War II, when the British Indian army expanded greatly, to

support the British War effort, that some Bengalis and Balochis were also recruited.
110. Toward the end of the war the ration of Bengalis in the British Indian army rosee

to only 2 percent.
111. Out of 45 Muslim cadets of the second post-war regular course at the Indian

military academy, Dehra Dun, only four were from Bengal who got their commission in
the Pakistan Army in October, 1947.
112. In the third course known as the IMA/PMA course, there was not a single Bengali

Muslim amongst them.

113. In 1947 only one percent o the Pakistan Army was from East Pakistan.
114. The total number of Bengalis who were recruited in the army in that year was 87

as against 2708 from West Pakistan.

115. The newly established cadet school at Dacca could only attract 15 students in

1952.
116. In the days of the M=oghul rule the main elements of their army were Pathans,

Mughals and Punjabis.

117. The British, after the war of Independence completely banned the recruitment of

Bengalis and Hindustani Musalmans.

118. The Simon Commission recommended a figure of 86000 from the Punjab, 5600

from the Frontier and only 300 from Balochistan and none at all from Bengal and other
provinces of India.
119. They distrusted the Bengalis and the Hindustani Musalmans as they had

‘mutineed’ in 1857.
120. In the officers rank the difference was, however, still substantial as there was
only

one Brigadier, one Colonel and Two Lieutenant Colonels out of 308 of equivalent ranks
from West Pakistan.
121. One of the demands brought out by Sheikh Mujib-ur-Rehman in his famous 6

RESTD
 100
RESTD

Points, which has been discussed in greater detail in subsequent, chapters, was that
East Pakistan’s share in the defence budget should be in accordance to its strength in
the defence force.
122. The revenue of the Central Government of India amounted to Rupees 121
Crores

in 1944.
123. Out of this Rupees 51 crore was spent on the Army.
124. In his own 9th PMA long course (1952-1954) there were only 6 Bengali Cadets
out

of 100. In the subsequent 10, 11 and 12 PMA long courses there were not more than 11
from the eastern wing in each course.
125. There was a Pre-Cadet Training School in East Pakistan but not many applied

from entry into the armed forces.

126. The most vociferous complaint by the intellectuals and the politicians of East

Pakistan was the so-called economic domination of their province by West Pakistan.
127. “Internal Colonialism” East Pakistan was taken to be ‘a colony of West Pakistan,

Western authors accepted this theory lock, stock and barrel.

128. East Bengal was underdeveloped and was the hinterland of Calcutta.
129. It could only provide raw materials for the industries in West Bengal.
130. Sir Fredric Burrow, Bengal’s last British governor, predicted that ‘East Bengal
was

condemned in the event of India’s partition to turn into the greatest slum in history’ a
land seared by droughts that alternated with frightening typhoon-shipped floods.
131. Out of total of 1414 factories in undivided Bengal only 314 were in East Bengal at

the time of Partition. Even these were owned by the Tatas, Birlas and Dalmias, all Hindu
industrialists who closed their business when Pakistan came into being.
132. In 1947 East Pakistan had not jute mills at all, although all the jute consumed by

the jute factories in Calcutta was grown in East Bengal.

133. It was primarily for economic reasons that the Muslims of Bengal voted for

Pakistan.

RESTD
 101
RESTD

134. The Bengali Muslims did not own a single firm in 1947.
135. By 1959 they were the owners of 11 percent of all industrial assets.
136. Ibn the first seven years of Pakistan the western wing received Rs. 8017 million

while the figure for the eastern wing amounted to Rs. 2750 million only.
137. Rubber was first imported from the Far East to Karachi and then re-shipped to

Chittagong which raised the price unnecessarily.

138. Similarly camouflage nets made out of jute in East Pakistan used to be sent for

dyeing to West Pakistan and then re shipped to East Pakistan.

139. Trading with India had bene always a thorny issue due to the bitter relations

between the two countries.

140. East Bengal wanted to open up trade with its neighbor and saw no sense in

importing coal from China at Rs. 172 per ton whereas it could be bought from India at
Rs. 53 per ton.
141. Similarly cement from West Pakistan was costing Rs. 16 per bag when it was

available at Rs. 8 per bag from Assam.

142. According to them the main beneficiary was the ‘Gujrati and Punjabi merchant’

who got Rs. 8.61 for every dollar woth of jute which was exported.
143. That is why when the decade of development was celebrated on Ayub’s orders

that East Pakistanis displayed a skeleton on their Shaheed Minar in Dacca.

144. Foreign aid was another bone of contention, as most of it was being utilized in

West Pakistan.
145. The term colonial exploitation has been used quite often by Indian, western and

Bengali writers. Colonial Exploitation.

146. Military assistance primarily benefited the armed forces and defence related

industries which were nearly all located in West Pakistan.

147. Rapid development could not take place because of a lack of foreign assistance

and foreign aid was not being provided because of economic under-development.

RESTD
 102
RESTD

148. The result of all this was that two thirds of the nation’s industry and four fifths of

the banking and insurance assets were being controlled by West Pakistan.
149. The main reasons for the comparatively slow economic growth in East Pakistan

were (1) incorrect economic policies. (2) Lack of adequate infrastructure (3) insufficient
allocation of funds (4) East Pakistan did not possess the absorption capacity of the
funds allotted for the purpose of economic development. (5) the educational level was
comparatively low and the managerial skill was lacking. (6) less aware of commercial
complexities than his western counterpart (7) most of the Muslim entrepreneurs of
undivided India came to West Pakistan. (10) The investment capacity in East Pakistan
was much less than in West Pakistan (12) USA’s interest in improving the defence and
prosperity of West Pakistan (15) It was not, therefore, economic disparity that produced
the conflict but the conflict that produced the issue of displarity (a wise comment by W.
Wilcox).
150. The author, while travelling, with Maulana Abdul Hameed Khan Bhashani, the

Bengali leader of the Awami National Party, in June 1969 asked him about is slogan
“Deekho Dekho Agun Jalo” (burn everything you can see).
151. The very heavy expenditure on defence irked the Bengalis most as they did not

feel threatened from India.

152. According to Mahboobul Haq, “underdeveloped countries to shelve all ideas of

equitable distribution and welfare state”.

153. Financial resources in a free market economy, generally gravitate towards areas

which promise quicker and greater returns.

154. Foreign exchange obtained from the export of jute was not doubt over fifty
percent

of the total export earnings of Pakistan.

155. The “Occies”, as the East Germans are called, do not have the capacity to
absorb

the money which Bonn is prepared to spend on them.

156. Without communication infrastructures, power generation, skilled labour,

managerial expertise, technical, and scientific education, entrepreneurship and a

willingness to take risks, rapid economic progress is not possible.

RESTD
 103
RESTD

157. Bengali was finaly accepted as the second language of Pakistan in 1956 when it

was included in the 1956 Constitution.

158. So is the case in the Rajya Sabha in India where each state has been allotted

equal number of seats.

159. Utter Pradesh, with the largest population has the same representation in the

Rajya Sabha as Rajastan with a vry small population.

160. In the first, constituent assembly out of a total of 74 members 44 were Bengalis.
161. As regards the two most important posts of the governor-general and the prime

minister of the country, after the death of the founder of the nation and that the Liaqat
Ali Khan, both the appointments were held by Bengalis.
162. Khawaja Nazimuddin followed the Quaid-e-Azam, as the head of state and

Muhammad Ali Bogra became the chief executive after Liaqat Ali Khan.
163. All the chief ministers of East Pakistan from 1947 to 1958 were indigenous and
not

imported from West Pakistan.

164. Ayub’s Martial Law of 1958.
165. The younger generation of Bengalis should have recalled that their elders had

fought for separate electorates which was conceded to them by E.S. Montague, the
then secretary of state for India, and Lord Chelmsford, the viceroy of India in 1919.
166. East Bengal was the poorest part of the province of Bengal in undivided India.
167. It was they who controlled the jute trade, repatriating their earnings from the 900

million rupee worth of jute being sent to India.

168. It goes to the credit of the central government that in the very first Five Years
Plan

(1955-1960) the objective of ‘rapidly increasing the rate of development in East Bengal
was clearly stated.
169. Article 145 of the 1962 Constitution stated that economic disparity between the
two

wings should be reduced.

RESTD
 104
RESTD

170. The primary object of the National Economic Council (NEC) was to ensure that
the

difference in the per capita income between East and West Pakistan was to be
removed.
171. Customs duty for machinery and spare parts in East Pakistan was reduced from

12 and ½ percent to 7 and ½ percent

172. In the 3rd Five years Plan (1965-1970) Rs. 1600 crores were allotted to East

Pakistan as against Rs. 1400 crores to West Pakistan.

173. A very large number of factories came up after independence in the eastern half

of Pakistan.
174. Karnaphuli paper mills with a capacity of producing 33000 tons of paper annually

which started functioning in 1953.

175. An iron and steel mill went into trial production at Chittagong in 1967.
176. Total number of factories complete during the Third Plan (July 1965 to December

1969) alone was twenty seven at a total cost of Rs. 89 crores.

177. East Pakistan Small Industries Corporation (EPSIC)
178. Approximately 600 small and big factories were built in twenty four years.

Averaging tow industrial units every month.

Administrative Measures for Economic Development of East Pakistan
179. The shifting of the Industrial Development Bank Headquarters to East Pakistan.
180. Investment Corporation of Pakistan was established in the eastern wing in 1966.
181. The decision to make Dacca the second capital and the permanent legislative
seat.
182. The establishment of a cadet college.
183. The raising of the East Bengal Regiment, the East Bengal Rifles and the Ansars
–

all of them pre-dominantly filled in from the people of East Bengal.

184. Major General Fazal Muqueem, former general officer commanding East
Pakistan

Division.

RESTD
 105
RESTD

185. S.A. Kermani was the Commander Royal Pakistan Service Corps (CRPSC) at

Infantry Division in East Bengal in 1950.

186. During Yahya’s rule there was a ‘massive increase of net capital inflow into East

Pakistan.
187. The reason for not utilizing the total foreign exchange earning of jute in East
Bengal

was its lack of absorption capacity.

188. East Pakistan could utilize only 41 percent of the funds allotted while West

Pakistan utilized 49 percent. The allocation being roughly the same.

189. The allocation in the Annual Development Plan in the public sector in 1969/70
was

higher for East Pakistan (Rs. 231 crores) than for West Pakistan (Rs. 190 crores)
190. Expect for Rice medium quality and Sugar and prices of all other essential itesm

were lower in East Pakistan in 1970 when Sheikh Mujib-ur-Rehman was blaming West
Pakistan for all the woes being faced by the East Bengalis.
191. Forty percent seats were reserved for the East Pakistanis in the civil service in

addition to the twenty percent taken on merit.

192. In 1966, sixty percent of all government seats were reserved for East Pakistanis,
193. President Yahya Khan appointed an equal number of secretaries in the Centre

from East and West Pakistan.

194. Major General Muhammad Rafi Khan, the military secretary of Field Marshal
Ayub,

recalls that in 1963 there were 22 vacancies for the central services of Pakistan.
195. Merit should be the criteria for selection to government posts if quality and

efficiency is the objective.

196. A quota system satisfies the ‘backward’ regions to some extent no doubt but it is

not conducive to better administration.

197. In 1947 there was only one officer in the civil service from East Pakistan.

RESTD
 106
RESTD

198. By 1966 sixty percent of all seats were reserved for East Pakistan.
199. In the Jute Board of which Ayesha Jalal in her book, ‘The State of martial Law’,

makes so much of a fuss, all nine.

200. Education was given priority in the development of East Pakistan.
201. 67000 schools, 225 colleges and 5 Universities were raised in East Pakistan

between 1947-1971.
202. The Rajisthan University was established in 1953 follwoed by the Agricultural

University in Mymensingh and the University of Engineering and Technoloby in 1961.

203. The Jahangirnagar Muslim University north of Dacca came up in 1964 and the

University of Chittagong in 1966.

204. On January 29, 1968, Field Marshal Ayub suffered a severe heart attack and

remained seriously ill for about 10 days which kept him out of his office for a month and
a half.
205. According to the constitution the speaker of the national assembly should have

been handed over power during the period of his illness.

206. In West Pakistan, Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto’s agitation against the Field Marshal began
to

gain ground.
207. On November 7 1968, the students of the polytechnic school just ouside

Rawalpindi clashed with the police.

208. One student by the name of Abdul Hameed, was killed.
209. Bhutto, chairman of the newly formed Pakistan People’s Party, took advantage of

this and turned the funeral procession into a political gathering.

210. One November 11, 1969 Ayub asked Nawabzada Nasrullah Khan president of
the

Democratic Action Committee (DAC) to meet him along with other politicians at a Round
Table Conference (RTC).
211. 11 Points of the Student Action Committee.
212. By now the 11 point’s demand of the radical students of the East Pakistan ahd

RESTD
 107
RESTD

become part of the Awami League’s manifesto.

213. Withdrawal of a book entitled Pakistan Dresho Krishti from the syllabi.
214. Remaining East Pakistan to Bengladesh.
215. Mr. A.B Awan, the home secretary, after visiting the provincial capitals in March,

1969 reported a complete defiance of authority specialy in Dacca and Karachi.

216. Air Marshal M. Asghar Khan, chief of newly created Justice Party was
demanding

that the government must quit t one.

217. Bhutto was, at the very early age of 32, commerce minister in Ayub’s cabinet.
218. Lal Bahadur Shastri, had himself drafted the Tashkent Declarant he used that

document to blame Ayub for a let down at Tashkent.

219. Bhutto used to compare Ayub with Mao and d’Gaulle but when he was removed

by the President, he became his bitterest enemy.

220. The Second alternative was also not feasible as Ayub was no longer a member
of

the armed forces and could not declare himself CMLA. A title usually reserved for
soldiers in uniform (Thgough Bhutto, did make himself CMLA in 1971 against all norms).
221. He sent a letter to the C-in-C of the army General Agha Muhammad Yahya
Khan,

handing over his responsibilities to the army on March 24, 1969.

222. The letter drafter by Altaf Gohar, was delivered to General yahya, at the C-in-Cs

house by him at 5 p.m the same day.

223. Admiral S.M Ahsan, C-in-C Pakistan Navy and Air Marshal Nur Khan, C-in-C

Pakistan Air Force.

224. General Zia Ul Haq staged a coup d’ etate in July, 1977 and toppled Zulfiqar Ali

Bhutto without taking any service chief or the chairman joint chief of staff committee into
confidence.
225. Nur Khan, though he was later removed by Yahya, made no mention of a

RESTD
 108
RESTD

conspiracy theory in his interview to Brigadier A.R. Siddiqui of the Defence Journal
which was taken much after Yahya’s Death.
226. On March 20, a PSOs conference was held in GHQ where the politicial situation

was discussed.
227. Major General Khawaja Wasiuddin who was then the master general of ordnance

(MGOs).
228. Major General Muhammad Akbar, director General Inter Services Intelligence

director (ISI).
229. The final decision to assume power was take n on the night between 22/23
March,

1969.
230. Major General Rao Farman Ali Khan, Major General political affairs with the East

Pakistan government said that when Major General Gul Hassan, visited Dacca on April
10, 1969 he told him that “Yahya was not taking over I (Gul Hassan) forced him to do
so.
231. On March 25, 1969 in a broadcast to the nation Field Marshal Muhammad Ayub

Khan (62) tendered his resignation.

232. On March 26, the self appointed President and Chief Martial law Administrator

(CMLA) General Agha Muhammad Ayub Khan (52) addressed the nation “Fellow
Pakistanis” .
233. The CMLA Headquarters was controlled by Lieutenant General Syed Ghulam

Muhammad Mohiuddin Peerzada (51), who was the principal staff officer (PSO) to the
President.
234. Brigadier Martial Law (Brigadier M. Rahim Khan).
235. The President appointed a Council of Administration which consisted of himself
as

the CMLA and his three service chief, Lieutenant General Abdul Hamid Khan, Vice
Admiral S.M. Ahsan and Air Marshal Nur Khan and Martial Law administration (MLAs).
236. General Peerzada acted as the secretary of the Council of Administration.
237. Each member of the Council had three or four ministries under him.

RESTD
 109
RESTD

238. Later in August 1969 a civilian cabinet of ten members, five from each wing

including one retired general was installed.

239. The effective element of president Yahya’s government was the CMLA
Secretariat

headed by General Peerzada, and the Martial Law Administrator (not governors) in the
provinces.
240. General Peerzada was indeed the key person in the chain of command.
241. Direct access of ministers and secretaries to General Yahya was rare as the
PSO

kept a tight reign on the governmental machinery.

Routine Regt Aspects /

KYE – 20 MCQs

 Army offrs Hand Book – 1985

 GSP No 1823 Mil & Gen Science Vol I
 GSP No 1823 Mil & Gen Science Vol 2
 GSP No 1823 Mil & Gen Science Vol II, Part 4
 GSP No 1955 Customs of Svc
 GSP – 1989 Health of Tps 1989
 KYE – 2019

RESTD
 110
RESTD

ARMY OFFICERS HAND BOOK - 1985

CHAPTER 1 – DISCIPLINE
1. An officer is subject to Pakistan Army Act and remains so until duly retired,
released, removed or dismissed from svc.
2. The trial commences within 6 months after the officer has ceased to be subject to
this Act.
3. However, the restriction for trial within six months will not apply for an offence of
desertion
Responsibilities
4. An officer is responsible at all times for enforcing good order, rules and discipline
of the service, he will afford the utmost assistance to the commanding officer. It is his
duty to notice, repress and report any negligence or impropriety of conduct on the part
of all rank junior to him, whether on or off duty and whether or not the offenders belong
to his unit.
5. The publication of official documents or communicating their contents verbally or
in writing or using them for any private purpose without due authority, will be treated as
a breach of the Official Secret Act 1923.
6. Any such request through any other source will be referred immediately to the
Adjutant General (Personnel Services Directorate) for orders.

RESTD
 111
RESTD

Conduct
7. Medical, Dental and Veterinary officers may, however, accept their legitimate
fees
for professional service rendered in other than their military capacity, subject to
conditions laid down from time to time.
8. Officers on duty or courses in foreign countries, should discreetly avoid accepting
gifts, presents, etc from the heads or representatives of foreign states. If it is not
possible to do so without causing offence they shall accept the gift etc and report its
detail immediately to General Headquarters, through normal channels, for obtaining
orders regarding its final disposal.
9. No officer will engage in any trade and no private financial transaction of any
nature
will be permitted between an officer or subordinate and a contractor with whom he has
any official dealings.
10. Religious customs and prejudices will be respected.
11. The officer will ensure that he does not take loans from moneylenders other than
banks. Officers below the rank of field officers will obtain the commanding officer's
approval in writing before taking any loan, overdraft, etc from the banks.
12. Military pensioners are not allowed to take part in active politics within two years
of their retirement without prior permission of the Federal Government.
13. Government servants are not permitted to allow their wives to seek employment
in
foreign diplomatic missions in Pakistan.
14. The law on the subject is contained in Pakistan Army Act Sections 167 and 168.
15. The subsidiary instructions are contained in Army Regulations (Instructions) 193
and 194.
16. In case an officer deems himself to have been wronged by his Commanding
Officer

RESTD
 112
RESTD

or any superior officer and on due application made to the Commanding Officer, does
not receive the redress to which he considers himself entitled, he may complain to the
higher authority through normal channels vide Army Regulations (Instructions) 193 and
194.
17. Airing of grievances and expression of views through the press or members of
the
legislative assemblies or through outside influence is forbidden and constitutes an
offence under the Pakistan Army Act.
18. Arrest for Debts. An officer is not liable to be arrested for debt under any Process
issued by, or by the authority of, any civil or revenue court or revenue officer as long as
he is in service.
19. Property Exempt From Attachment. Neither an officer's arms, clothes,
equipment,
accoutrement or necessaries, nor any animal used by him for discharge of his duty,
shall be seized, nor shall his pay and allowances or any part thereof, be liable to be
attached, by direction of any civil or revenue court or any revenue officer, in satisfaction
of any decree or order enforceable against the officer. Pakistan Army Act Section 171
refers. Also see Section 60 of Civil Procedure Code.
20. Priority of Rearing. Non-observance of this rule will be submitted to the Provincial
Government through the Formation Commander concerned. For issue of a certificate of
priority of hearing (PAFD-902) by the Commanding Officer, see Pakistan Army Act
Section 173.
21. Foreign Agency. Referred to para 4 e & f means any office or establishment of
the
diplomatic or consular representative ora foreign government by whatever name called,
and includes any information, public relations, trade or commercial agency, service
centre or foundation established or maintained by any such Government or by any
person who is a national of a foreign country. Authority:-Army Regulations (Rules) 322
& 322-A
22. Criminal Proceedings. The power of the civil police to investigate cases are laid

RESTD
 113
RESTD

down in chapter XIV of the Criminal Procedure Code.

23. Under certain circumstances persons subject to Pakistan Army Act, charged with
criminal offences, are entitled to defence at Government expense. Rules are contained
in Army Regulations (Rules) 375 & 375-A.
24. By Administrative Action. The Federal Government may dismiss or remove from
the service any officer subject to the Pakistan Army Act (Pakistan Army Act Section 16).
25. By Sentence of Court Martial. An officer may be dismissed from service by
sentence of a court martial, in addition to other punishment awarded under the Pakistan
Army Act (Pakistan Army Act Section 60 and 62 refer).
26. Retirement and Release. The Federal Government may retire or release any
army
officer (Pakistan Army Act Section 18).
27. Dismissal from Service when out of Pakistan. An officer, who is dismissed from
the
service when serving out of Pakistan, shall be sent to Pakistan with all convenient
speed.
CHAPTER 2 - PAY AND ALLOWANCES
28. Cost of Living Allces. Cost of living allce @ Rs 7% of basic pay has been allowed
to govt wef 1.6.95.
29. Move-Over. Move-over has been allowed to the officers with effect from 01 June
1994 up to Colonel equivalent after completion of one year at the maximum of the pay
matrix and subject to the fulfillment of conditions of move-over as prescribed by General
Headquarters.
30. Grant of Disturbance Pay to Officers. In accordance with Rule 31 of Pay and
Allowances Volume I (1992) an officer is not entitled to Disturbance Pay, married
accommodation and passage concessions for family until he attains the age of 26 years
or has completed 6 years.
31. A duplicate Last Pay Certificate should be enfaced "duplicate". If the original be
subsequently forthcoming it should be forwarded to the Audit Officer concerned.

RESTD
 114
RESTD

32. The Last Pay Certificate for self must be signed, by his successor or superior.
CHAPTER 3 - SENIORITY AND PROMOTIONS
33. Commissions. On passing out of an officer from Pakistan Military Academy,
Casualty Return must be initiated by Pakistan Military Academy/unit within one week
after commission, showing grant of commission, allotment of personal numbers,
posting/map reading examination and nomination etc.
34. PAFZ-2041 (Record of Service Officers). Unit copy is to be maintained by the
unit
and Record copy by Central Officers Record Office vide para 61 of Army Personnel
Documentation Regulations (1989). Vide Pakistan Army Order 277/60, the officers are
not entitled to ask information from Central Officers Records Office as it is the
responsibility of the unit to maintain it.
35. PAFZ-2041-A (Service Record Officers). It is used for Annual Confidential
Reports.
36. Officers of Engineers, Electrical and Mechanical Engineering and Signals who at
the time of joining service possess Bachelor of Science degree/equivalent in
engineering, on grant of commission will be granted the acting/temporary rank of
Captain with effect from date of joining serviced either as a cadet or an officer.
37. The antedate of service equivalent to3 years granted by virtue of appointment in
the rank of captain will count for the purpose of seniority, promotion and increment.
Promotions
38. Type of Promotions. Promotions are of three main types viz substantive,
substantive temporary and temporary.
a. 2nd Lieutenant to Lieutenant Two years
b. Lieutenant to Captain Six years
c. Captain to Major Thirteen years
d. Major to Lieutenant Colonel Seventeen years
e. Lieutenant Colonel to Colonel and above Twenty-One years (also
reference to conditions laid down in Army Regulations (Rules) 205.
Note. Cadet/Former Service is countable towards pension.

RESTD
 115
RESTD

39. Age Limit-Officers not governed by Joint Services Instructions 10/88

a. Officers of All Arms and Services Except Army Education Corps, Judge
Advocate General, General List, Army Medical Corps, Army Dental Corps,
Remount, Veterinary and Farms Corps and Electrical and Mechanical
Engineering: -
(1) Major and Below 48 years
(2) Lieutenant Colonel 50 years
(3) Colonel 52 years
(4) Brigadier 53 years
(5) Major General 55 years
(6) Lieutenant General 57 years or on completion of 4 years of tenure
in the rank whichever is earlier.
b. Officers of Army Education Corps and General List: -
(1) Major and Below 54 years
(2) Lieutenant Colonel 56 years
(3) Colonel and Brigadier 57 years
(4) Major General 59 years
c. Officers of Army Medical Corps, Army Dental Corps and Remount,
Veterinary and Farm Corps
(1) Major 55 years
(2) Lieutenant Colonel 57 years
(3) Colonel and Brigadier 59 years
(4) Major General and Lieutenant
General 60 years age or on completion of 4 years tenure in the
rank whichever is earlier but not before the age of 57 years.
d. Officers of Electrical and Mechanical Engineering. Refers Army
Regulations (Rules) 1986 Volume-I, 262-C (4): -
(1) Major and below 52 years
(2) Lieutenant Colonel 54 years
(3) Colonel 55 years
(4) Brigadier 56 years
(5) Major General 58 years
e. Officers of the Judge Advocate General's Department. Refer to Army
Regulations (Rules) 262-C.
(1) Major 55 years
(2) Lieutenant Colonel 56 years
(3) Colonel 58 years
(4) Brigadier 58 years

RESTD
 116
RESTD

Note. Cadet, Former Service and reserve training service will be counted
as commissioned service. Completion of age limit and extension of
2 years in age for optees vide Joint Services Instructions 10/88 up
to the rank of Major General is subject to the approval of Service
Review Board vide Army Regulations (Rules) 262-A.
40. Substantive Temporary Promotions. All officers holding non-regular commissions
are eligible for substantive temporary promotion upto and including Major provided they
are qualified for it as per qualifications/service limits laid down for substantive promotion
vide para 48 b and c.
Temporary Promotions
41. All officers, whether regular or non-regular, are eligible for temporary promotions.
42. All non-regular officers when promoted to the rank of Lieutenant Colonel will be
granted permanent regular commission.
43. When a new appointment is created and delay in excess of 22 days occurs in the
arrival of the first incumbent.
44. When officer proceeds on temporary duty not exceeding three months.
45. When an officer proceeds on a course not less than ten weeks duration.
46. On casual leave/privilege leave.
47. On sick list under Army Leave Regulations Rule 37.
48. An out-going officer should be Struck of Strength on the date of expiry of his
joining time and not from the date he relinquished appointment or on the day he
leaves unit.
49. Date of Taken on Strength should be the same as Struck of Strength.
50. Army in accordance with Army Regulations (Rules)
51. In accordance with Army Regulations (Rules) 45a(l) and (2) the word
Forenoon/Afternoon is required to be bracketed after the date of Struck of
Strength/Taken on Strength.
52. Low category officers who appeared before Special Medical Board for
selection/promotion and changes in their medical category will not be mixed with

RESTD
 117
RESTD

the Permanent Medical Category and will not be published in Central Officers
Records Office Part-II Order.
CHAPTER 4 – LEAVE
53. Leave Not an Entitlement. Leave is a privilege and cannot be claimed as a matter
of right. It is always granted subject to exigencies of service.
54. Casual Leave. Casual Leave is normally limited up to 10 days at a time. It may
be
extended up to 20 days in exceptional circumstances by the next higher sanctioning
authority not below a brigadier or equivalent commander. Casual leave counts as duty.
It cannot be combined with any other form of leave.
55. General Principles. Privilege leave is inadmissible in respect of a calendar year
until an officer has actually performed duty in that year.
56. The period spent on sick list shall, however, be treated as actual performance of
duty.
57. Officers may be granted privilege leave for one month in a calendar year.
58. Privilege leave can be earned upto 12 months for Leave Pending Retirement.
59. The officers granted commission form ranks can now carry forward half of their
accumulated privilege leave in their credit as Junior Commissioned Officers/Other
Ranks to their leave account as officers vide para 13 Army Instructions 41/77.
60. Leave earned in the borrowing organization will be availed of as far as 'possible
before reversion to the services. Failure to avail this leave withinthe period of tenure will
be presumed as Voluntary Surrender of the leave in question.
61. Furlough is not admissible until an officer has completed one year's service. It
may
be granted either by itself or in combination with privilege leave.
62. Furlough may be granted upto, a total of 18 months during their entire service;
not
more than 3 months at a time in Pakistan and upto 9 months at a time ex-Pakistan.
Furlough upto 9 months may also be granted if combined with study leave in Pakistan.

RESTD
 118
RESTD

63. Furlough may be availed in conjunction with sick leave or leave on medical
certificate.
64. Furlough is authorized to officers vide Army Leave Rule 12, 36and Special
Pakistan Army Order 49/73. Three months can be availed at a time in Pakistan during
service. It can be combined with accumulated privilege leave for Leave Pending
Retirement up to 6 months.
65. During furlough pay shall be reduced vide Army Leave Rule 13and Rule 118 to
122 Pay and Allowances Regulations Volume I, 1982.
66. Provided the sickness is due to reasons beyond the control of the officer, the
authority competent to, sanction privilege leave may place him on sick list for a period
not exceeding l. month (4 months in case of sickness/injury being attributable to military
service).
67. Any period spent on sick list will be treated as duty for all purposes. However,
sick
list concession will not be admissible to, an officer falling sick while on leave other than
casual leave.
68. After sick list concession, officer's accumulated privilege leave is exhausted
against sickness
69. After privilege leave is exhausted against sickness, officers are allowed leave on
full pay by converting furlough maximum upto 4 months.
70. After availing all the concessions vide para 62 a to c above, if an officer is still
under treatment in hospital, he reverts to 75% rate of pay of his substantive rank as long
as he remains under treatment.
71. Any period exceeding 18 months in case of regular officers, and 12 months in
case
of non-regular officers, would require Government sanction to regularize. Therefore, the
officers will be medically boarded out before this period elapses.
72. Sick Leave. Period of sickness in hospital. (Excluding the period if any, spent on
sick list referred to in sub para a above) will be treated as sick leave.

RESTD
 119
RESTD

73. Those who resign commissions to suit their own convenience or are removed
from
service on disciplinary grounds will not be granted any leave.
74. When an officer retires on completion of service or age limits, or extended
service,
his leave shall start on the last day of his service. In such cases the period of leave shall
not count towards pension.
75. When an officer retires prematurely, his leave pending retirement shall start on
the
date he is Struck Off Duty. Leave period shall count towards pension.
76. Officers; who are declared by a medical board to be completely and permanently
unfit for further military service, may be granted leave pending invalidment.
77. Officers who are invalided out will be granted full privilege leave plus furloughs
vide
Army Leave Rules 40read in conjunction with para. c of Special Pakistan Army Order
49/73. The officer being invalided out will be Struck of duty from the date of issue of
PAFA-861 (Release Order) by Military Secretary Branch. Irrespective of the date of
discharge from hospital or leaving the unit for home, Leave Pending Retirement will be
started from the date of issue of PAFA-861 (Release Order).
78. No one is permitted to leave his place of duty or station in anticipation of grant of
any type ofleave including weekend leave.
79. Sanctioning Authority. General Headquarters, Personnel Services Directorate.
80. A female officer on the death of her husband, may be granted special leave on
full
pay, when applied-for not exceeding four months and ten days. This leave shall not be
debited to her leave account.
81. Maternity Leave. Will be granted for three times in the entire service to a female
officer. The period of leave will be maximum two months, each time, which may be
extended to three months in exceptional circumstances.

RESTD
 120
RESTD

82. Leave will commence from the date of confinement vide Army Leave Rules 1967,
Rule 80 (3).
83. 72. Extraordinary Leave (Leave Without Pay). This leave may be granted on any
ground upto a maximum period of five years provided the officer has been in continuous
service for not less than ten years; in case the officer has not completed ten years of
continuous service, extraordinary leave without pay for a maximum period of two years
may be granted at the discretion of the authority competent to sanction it.
84. In case an officer dies while in service, lump sum payment equal to full pay upto
6
months out of privilege/service leave at his/her credit may be made to the family for the
purpose of family/dependent pension.
85. Leave Ex-Pakistan on full pay upto a maximum period of four months will be
granted to the Armed Forces personnel from their accumulated privilege leave at a time.
86. Officers retiring on completion of age/service limits/extended service (including
cadet/former service) are eligible to opt for encashment of Leave Pending Retirement
and can draw lump sum payment maximum upto six months pay. In that case they will
have to surrender entire period of Leave Pending Retirement and will Struck of
Duty/Struck of Strength with effect from the same date.
87. An officer having credit less than 12 months (365 days) leave on full pay is
entitled
to encash Leave Pending Retirement subject to maximum 6 months(180 days). In case
the period of leave on full pay at credit is less than 6 months (180 days), encashment of
Leave Pending Retirement is allowed for the actual period of Leave Pending
Retirement.
88. Leave Pending Retirement once opted and sanctioned cannot be increased to
extend the date of Struck of Strength. In exceptional circumstances, it can be curtailed
by Pay, Pension and Accounts Directorate. Officers who are boarded out cannot opt for
encashment of Leave Pending Retirement and instead may opt for Leave Pending
Invalidment.
89. The officers, whose commissioned service is less than the service prescribed for

RESTD
 121
RESTD

the rank, but after taking into account their previous service, (i.e. cadet and former
service etc.) their pensionable service is more than the service prescribed for the rank,
they can encash their Leave Pending Retirement, even if the nature of retirement is: -
a. Premature compulsory due to no fault of the officer.
b. Service no longer required.
90. The officer will retain the appointment during accumulated privilege/leave, portion
of Leave Pending Retirement and not during furlough portion of Leave Pending
Retirement. The officer posted/officiating in his appointment will also get benefits of rank
and appointment (refer to, Rule 16 of Pay and Allowances Regulations Volume-II (1982)
and Rule 133 of Army Regulations (Rules) 1986.The pay will be reduced during
furlough but pay last drawn at the time of Struck of Duty will be taken for calculation of
pension.
CHAPTER 5 - CONVEYANCE, TRAVELLING ALLOWANCE/
DAILY ALLOWANCE BAGGAGE ETC
91. For the purpose of claiming travelling allowance/daily allowance and baggage
allowance etc, officers are governed by Passage Regulations (PR), Joint Services
Instructions and Government Letters issued from time to time.
92. An individual is considered for the purpose of these rules to be on duty when
performing a journey within the charter of duties laid down by the service headquarters
of the individual and which is in the interest of public service and not that at request, or
for the personal convenience, or in consequence of transfer due to misconduct of the
individual concerned. A Divisional or Logistic Area Commander or his equivalent in
other services may, however, at his discretion permit an individual transferred for
misconduct to travel on duty. Duty is of two types permanent and temporary:-
93. Temporary duty can be converted into permanent duty when the duration
exceeds
90 days by Military Secretary who is the competent authority for conversion of
temporary duty into permanent whenever considered essential.
94. Actual fare of Air Conditioned Class less cost of Form E.
95. An officer when detailed or permitted to attend an examination or course of

RESTD
 122
RESTD

instruction within Pakistan is entitled to conveyance (Vide Rule 635 of Passage

Regulations).
96. When attending the Staff College Entrance Examination on second and
subsequent occasions-conveyance is admissible on each occasion on which an officer
qualifies, whether admitted or not (Vide Rule 635 of Passage Regulations).
97. On transfer an officer will be granted the following, (vide Joint Services
Instructions
11/87) against each:-
a. Transfer Grant
(1) If possessing a family One month's pay
(2) If not possessing a family Half month's pay
(Authority: Passage Regulations 440 & Joint Services Instruction
11/91)
b. Daily Allowance During Journey Period. One daily allowance at special
rate shall be payable for every 480 km of road distance. (Rule 447
Passage Regulations).
c. Daily Allowance on Arrival at the New Place of Posting. One daily
allowance at the rate applicable to the station shall be payable in respect
of officers and in respect of each member of his family above 12 years
and one half of the full rate for every child above the age of 12 months, for
the day of arrival at the new place of his posting (Rule 447 Passage
Regulations).
98. Conveyance is admissible when detailed for deputation, delegation, permanent
or temporary duty or a course of instruction in a foreign country (Vide Rule 633 Passage
Regulations).
99. Conveyance is admissible to an officer who is on duty in a country abroad and
proceeds on leave other than privilege leave when recalled form such leave (Vide Rule
580 Passage Regulations).
100. Officers who proceed abroad for study of foreign language will be entitled to

RESTD
 123
RESTD

onward and return conveyance. If an officer except for ill health fails to qualify as a 2nd
class interpreter will be required to defray the cost of return conveyance (Vide Rule 634
Passage Regulations).
101. Cadets undergoing course of instruction abroad of not less than 4 years duration
are entitled to the same concession as are laid down for commissioned officers (Vide
Rule 637 Passage Regulations).
102. Participation in Pakistan Day ceremonial parades will be treated as bonfire duty
and Traveling Allowance/Daily Allowance at temporary scale will be admissible (Vide
Rule 631 Passage Regulations).
a. Officers when travelling on duty by service transport/aircraft or on railway
warrant/requisition, are entitled to normal daily allowance during the transit
periods and enforced halts at the intermediate station due to lack of
onward rail, road or air accommodation (Vide Joint Services Instructions
10/81).
b. Officers when travelling by air, are entitled to conveyance on air passage
warrant (PAFF-1782).
Pay Limit Special Rates Per day Rupees Ordinary Rates Per day
Rupees
Rupees
1245-to-2000 80 65
2001-to-3000 100 85
3001-to-4000 120 100
400l-to-5000 145 120
5001-to-6000 175 150
600l-to-7000 215 180
7001-to-8000 260 225
8001-to-9000 300 230
9001-to-10000 350 300
10001 and above 400 350

RESTD
 124
RESTD

Notes: (1) Daily allowance will be admissible only for the actual night (s) at
the out-station for which Daily Allowance claimed. When claimed.
Where night stop is not involved and if absence from headquarters
exceeds four hours half Daily Allowance will be allowed.
(2) Special rate of Daily Allowance shall be admissible at Hyderabad,
Islamabad, Karachi, Lahore, Faisalabad, Multan, Peshawar, Quetta
and Rawalpindi.
(3) For the purpose of calculation of Daily Allowance calendar day will
be reckoned as commencing from the midnight and ending on the
following midnight (Vide Joint Services Instructions 2/74).
103. Government servants’ upto Basic Pay Scale 1-19 may stay in Government Guest
Houses, Public Sector Corporations Rest Houses and Hotels. They can claim actual
room rent charges on production of receipts subject to a maximum of three Daily
Allowance at non specified stations.
104. Government servants in Basic Pay Scale 20 and above may stay in hotels and
claim room rent subject to a maximum of three Daily Allowance for specified stations. If
however, the rooms rent charges are in excess of the maximum ceiling aforementioned,
fifty present of the additional amount will be paid by the Government.
105. An officer on tour is himself the judge of the necessity for staying in a hotel.
106. In the case of departure form headquarters, the rate of daily allowance during
transit will be the same as admissible at the station of immediate destination.
107. The period of forced delays in transit will be treated as part of the total transit
period.
108. Daily Allowance at full rate shall be admissible for the entire period on temporary
duty without any special sanction or subject to reduction in rate.
109. Daily Allowance shall be admissible on Fridays and public holidays falling during
the period of officer's temporary duty at an outstation.
110. Daily Allowance may not be drawn for any day on which an officer does not
reach

RESTD
 125
RESTD

a point outside of 16.09 km from his headquarters or return to his headquarters from a
similar point.
111. The Daily Allowance consists of the following elements:-
a. Messing 45%
b. Accommodation 30%
c. Conveyance 25%
If any of the above elements is supplied free by the Government the Daily
Allowance will be reduced accordingly.
112. An officer is entitled to conveyance when recalled from leave (Vide Rules 580 to
583 Passage Regulations).
113. The rate of mileage allowance for journey by road vide Rule 412 Passage
Regulations & Joint Services Instruction 11/91 will be as under:-
Mode of Travel Rate per Kilo
Metre
a. Personal car or by engaging a full taxi Rupees 3.00
b. Travel by Air. Government servants in basic pay scale 17 and above and
those in receipt of pay exceeding Rs. 4000.00 per month shall be allowed
to travel by air:-
(1) The terms personal car means a car registered in the name of the
officer or in the name of any member of his family for purpose of
travelling allowance rules.
By Road
114. One mileage allowance at the rate of rupees 2/- per Kilometre.
115. One additional mileage allowance, if two members of his family accompany him,
and a second, if more than two members accompany him.
116. Travelling Allowance at temporary duty scale is admissible when an officer is
appearing before a medical board for a prescribed medical examination and when
returning there from, or while moving in connection with completion of Annual
Confidential Report (Vide Rule 633 Passage Regulations).
117. An officer while moving to another station for inoculation against yellow fever is

RESTD
 126
RESTD

authorized conveyance on warrant from the place of duty to the nearest inoculation
centre and back for inoculation with moves abroad.
118. Medical officer summoned to treat an individual residing in another station will
travel on duty.
119. An officer when attending a course of instruction abroad when admitted to a
military hospital in that country, is entitled to receive actual travelling expenses from his
residence to the first hospital to which admitted, from one hospital to another, and when
returning to his residence
120. An officer is entitled to conveyance to and from any asylum, on being declared
insane.
121. When an officer is ordered. to attend an investiture ceremony to receive a
decoration is entitled to conveyance.
122. A commissioned officer, dismissed/removed from service, allowed to resign/retire
when unable to pay for his own/family conveyance he may be authorised free
conveyance by Chief of the Army Staff on application.
123. Conveyance is admissible to an officer when detailed or summoned either’s a
witness or as an accused to attend a civil court in a criminal case.
124. Travelling Allowance is admissible to officers attending authorized conference.
125. A Colonel Commandant or Colonel, serving/retired residing in Pakistan shall be
entitled to free conveyance or one return journey in a financial year to visit his
regiment/corps or unit. He shall draw travelling allowance at the temporary duty scale.
Eligible officers may use Form E.
126. Government servants in Basic Pay Scale 17 and above and those in receipt of
pay
exceeding rupees 4000.00 per month shall be allowed to travel by air.
127. Officers of the Armed Forces will be entitled to business class accommodation
while travelling by air on official duty at government expense within the country
128. Officers of the rank of brig and above and equivalent when procceding abroad on
duty and vice versa are allowed to travel in first class.

RESTD
 127
RESTD

129. On first appointment of the officer to his permanent unit

130. Family of an officer is entitled to free conveyance to join the head of the family
who
is recalled for further service, on rejoining for duty after retirement/ release and when
returning there from on expiry of re-employment, during war provided that period of
recall/re-employment, rejoining is for a period exceeding three months.
131. As an exception, wives may be allowed to accompany their husbands, who are
sent on course of instruction to countries abroad other than the United Kingdom,
provided that the duration of the course or any attachment or visits arising out of it, will
entail a stay of eight months or longer inthe country abroad. Sanction for free passages
both ways for wives will be given in each case by Government on the recommendation
of the commander of the service concerned.
132. The family of commissioned officer, who marries while outside Pakistan, will be
entitled to free passage to Pakistan when accompanying or joining the head of the
family consequent on reposting to Pakistan.
133. The widow and children of a commissioned officer who dies whilst in the service
are entitled to conveyance to their homes in Pakistan.
134. A commissioned officer will not become entitled to passage concession for his
family unless he has either attained the age of 26 years, or shall have completed six
years total service excluding boy service.
135. Nursing officers are entitled to free conveyance on first appointment from place
of
residence to the station to which posted. Cost of conveyance of baggage (upto 634.6
kg) by passenger train is admissible. \
136. The maximum limit upto which personal effects of an officer can be transported
at
Government expense vide Rule 747 Passage Regulations shall be as follows:-
a. If possessing family (4500 kg) (120 Mounds)
b. If not possessing family (2240 kg) (60 Mounds)
137. Cost of carriage of personal effects upto the maximum number of kgs as shown

RESTD
 128
RESTD

above shall be allowed at the rate of 0.148 paisa per km per unit of 20 kg from
residence of the officer at the old station to his residence at the new station
138. On being detailed escort/collect/deliver Government stores, movement of which
is
to be carried out under second under the rules, Baggage will be restricted to air/railway
free allowance (Vide Rule 635 Passage Regulations).
139. The rate of allowance admissible to, an officer who transports his motor car or
motor-cycle/scooter by road between stations connected by rail or steamer or partly by
rail or partly by steamer shall be paid @ Rs. 1.20 per km in respect of a motor car and
Rs. 0.40 per km in respect of motor-cycle/scooter (Vide Joint Services Instructions
11/91)
140. Private cars belonging to-Service officers will be transported at public expense
through a passenger train on EVK and the cost therefore will be claimed along with the
Travelling Allowance claim.
141. Officers of the rank of major and below on permanent move from one duty
station,
to another with in Pakistan can transport their private motor cycle/scooters by goods
train at public expense. The cost thereof can be claimed along with Travelling
Allowance claim.
142. Service Officers when proceeding abroad on permanent transfer or returning
there
from and on transfer to another country while serving abroad will be entitled to free
conveyance of baggage by the cheapest approved routes at the following scale in
addition to air/shipping companies allowance (Vide Joint Services Instructions 18/60):-
a. If possessing family (2240 Kg)
b. If not possessing family (1493 Kg).
143. Officers of the rank of Major General and above are entitled to First Class
accommodation while travelling on temporary duty abroad will be entitled at public
expense baggage not exceeding (6.35 kg) in addition to free baggage allowed by Air
Company (Vide Joint Services Instructions 2/75).

RESTD
 129
RESTD

144. An officer is entitled to conveyance when rejoining for duty after retirement and
returning there from on completion of period of employment within Pakistan.
In Aid of Civil Powers
145. The commitments involving the employment of troops etc, in aid of civil powers
are
normally:-
a. Maintenance of law and order.
b. Fighting national calamities, ie, flood, fires, earth quakes, famines,
cyclones, locusts, wild board, epidemics and other clarifies in which the
assistance of services is required by the civil authorities.
c. Anti-smuggling measures.
d. Maintenance of essential services during shrike.
e. Assistance sought by the civil authorities in any other cases.
146. Out of all the tasks mentioned above, the most difficult task is to maintain law
and
order specially when the people are disobeying the law.
147. So observe the principle of good faith by using minimum troops and minimum
autocratic weapons. Never use the word, "enemy". Always fire for effect but not with a
view to kill a person. Aim at legs so that a person is only injured. Ring leaders do not
join the mob. Mob is of innocent people.
148. Daily allowance will be paid to service officers and all the categories of personnel
at normal rates (vide Joint Services Instructions 10/87) for the entire period of their
employment in aid of the civil powers irrespective of the provisions of Rules 288 and
331 of Passage Regulations whereby continuous period of duty at the same station
exceeding three months is treated as permanent posting at the station.
149. Occasions on which an officer may travel on cash Traveling Allowance are
contained in Rule 23 of Passage Regulations.
150. Free in case space is available in the transport authorised for children of Junior
Commission Officers/Other Rank.

RESTD
 130
RESTD

151. Settlement of Travelling Allowance/Daily Allowance claims will be

prepared/submitted in accordance with the instructions contained in Pakistan Army
Order 1/75.
CHAPTER 7 - ACCOMMODATION AND ALLIED FACILITIES
152. The married accommodation available in a station is allotted to individual officers
by the Station Headquarters in accordance, with their seniority on the station waiting list.
153. Those officers serving in non-family stations termed as "hard stations" and had
not
availed the concession of married accommodation in specific peace stations are given
six months ante-date seniority for the purposes of allotment of married accommodation
when posted back to normal peace station.
154. Within a maximum period of 10 days after the allotment of accommodation, an
officer must occupy it, otherwise the allotment is liable to be cancelled. It is the personal
responsibility of the allottee officer to watch submission of occupation return to the Unit
Accountant, Garrison Engineer and others concerned as quickly as possible, and
likewise the submission of vacation return within seven days period. The correct and
timely submission of these two returns is essential because these form the basis for rent
recovery from officers.
155. An officer transferred from a station is expected to vacate Government
accommodation within 10 days of relinquishing his charge in the station. If, however, the
officer cannot get family accommodation in the new station, the officer's family may
continue occupation with prior approval of the competent authority for a period of 2
months from the date of handing-over charge to give him time to make other
arrangements.
156. In genuine and hardship cases, however, respective service Chiefs may allow
retention of the accommodation for 12 months.
157. Accommodation can be retained for the period of Leave Pending Retirement plus
2 months (on market rat).
158. The officers Struck of Duty and Struck of Strength simultaneously can retain

RESTD
 131
RESTD

Government accommodation for two months on payment of normal rent.

159. On Posting to Non Family Stations. These stations are normally located, in
border
defence areas of Azad Kashmir territory and Northern Areas.
160. The allocation of married accommodation is reviewed on yearly basis with a view
to accommodate as many officers as possible depending upon the overall availability of
accommodation.
161. Rent recovery is made from officers at the rate of 5 percent of their pay or
average
assessed rent of accommodation whichever is less. While calculating the amount of rent
recoverable from an officer at 5 percent of emoluments as defined in Rule 2 b of
Quarters and Rents 1985will be added in his basic pay for finding out the correct
recoverable amount.
162. No rent to be recovered for single, accommodation in messes. Free water and
free
electricity upto 40 units per month to be allowed.
163. Will pay rent at the existing rate and will draw house rent allowance as
admissible
under the rules.
164. If the accommodation allotted is electrified and water-piped, the officers will be
required to pay for electric current and water consumed by them.
165. Metered Quarters
a. For first 50 units at 34 paisa per unit.
b. 51 to 200 units at 40 paisa per unit.
c. For the balance of monthly consumption above 200 units at 50 paisa per
unit. These rates are subject to review from time to time.
166. Unmetered Quarters. 30 per cent of the rent payable by the officers.
167. Water Supply (where Metered). Normally water supply will be metered and
charged for actual consumption.

RESTD
 132
RESTD

168. Water Supply (where Unmetered):-

Dry Rs Sanitation Water Borne Rs
a. Single Quarters 2.00 3.00
b. Married Quarters 4.00 6.00
169. Payment for water obtained direct from cantonment authorities will be made in
accordance with the procedure laid down in Military Engineering Service Regulations
and Rule 78 of Quarters & Rents, 1985.
170. 25 per cent rebate on water and electricity charges is given to the officers
provided
they pay these charges at the rates mentioned in para 161 a (1).
171. 25% refund on all Pakistan rates of water will be allowed on the officer's
production
of official receipt for the payment. This rebate will be allowed quarterly. \
172. The widows shall retain the accommodation for ONE YEAR on payment of
normal
rent which was being paid by the deceased allotted when he was alive.
173. Hire charges at the rate of 10% per annum of the capital cost of furniture ate
recoverable for the furniture issued to the officers mentioned in sub para b above.
174. Government furniture issued on hire or on rent free basis will be repaired and
maintained free of charge under the arrangements of Station Furniture Yards. Washing
of 'newar'or 'durries' issued on hire, is however, the responsibility of the officer
concerned, but the responsibility in case of rent-free issue is that of the Station Furniture
Yards.
175. When an officer occupies furnished quarter it will be incumbent on him to use the
furniture and pay normal hire charges. Furniture will not be removed from the building
under any circumstances except for repair.
176. Rebate at Rs. 3.00 pm per servant quarter per mender will be allowed to officers

RESTD
 133
RESTD

in case the number of servant quarters falls below that authorised for the class of
accommodation by more, than one servant quarter and provided the officer employs full
time servants in excess of the number of servants quarters available.
177. Similarly where, a garage is not available in quarters occupied by major and
above
at stations other than Karachi, a rebate of Rs. 3.00 pm will be allowed provided the
officer actually maintains a car.
178. One electric geyser of 27.28 live or gas geyser of 68.19 live capacity is
authorized
in A,B and C type of bungalow at Quetta, Lahore and all stations to the North of Lahore.
Additional electric/gas geysers will be provided to Corps/Division Commander as
under:-
a. Corps Commander- One in the main house. One in guest room.
b. Division Commander One in guest room.
c. D&E type bungalows One geyser when occupied by Foreign Students at
Command and Staff College Quetta
Notes.1 Major Generals and above on staff living in accommodation not
connected with gas will be provided an electric geyser of 68.19-liter capacity in
lieu
of 27.28-liter capacity geyser
2 Owner of the house will be responsible to provide geyser at the
above scale at their own cost before their houses are
hired/requisitioned
179. No rent will be recovered from the Adjutants/Commanders of the President's
Body
Guards/Aid-de-Camp (ADC) to the President/Chief of Army Staff residing in the
President's/Chief of Army Staff Houses.
180. Officers are authorised to the free use of squash courts as a part of Military
training.
181. The need for shelter is felt most in the mind of a retiring officer.

RESTD
 134
RESTD

182. A Housing Directorate under Adjutant General's Branch has been established at
General Headquarters. This Directorate has been tasked to provide accommodation to
retiring member officers. The first Army Housing Scheme called Part-I was introduced in
1982. In this the down payments and installments were tied to Length of remaining
service.
183. A financial and functional review revealed that the rate of down payment for
obtaining membership, that stood at around Rs. 70.000/- was out of the reach of an
average income junior officer. This scheme has been revised and named Part III. It was
opened to offices in end December 1990.
184. As an initial response over four thousand and installments are now tied to the
rank.
However for meting the terminal cost the officer has been advised to inculcate the habit
of additional saving. Its details are reflected in Housing Directorate News letter No 7
issued in June 1991. Under this scheme the cost of apartment has been fixed as Rs
6,57,018/- in year 1991 and increasing @ 8% per annum. On the other hand, a profit @
8% on the contribution will be credited to the personal account of the members.
185. Allotment of houses will be made on retirement, completion of 23 years
commissioned service and minimum 3 years membership period. Chief of the Army
Staff has also been pleased to extend part III scheme to Armed Forces Nursing
Services of the rank of Major and above upto 31 December 1991.
186. The service condition varies for different arms and services. Houses will be
constructed for officers and full cost recovered. This scheme is being run as self-
financing wherein the members have to pay the full cost generally in four installments.
First installment on becoming a member second and third after 3 and 6 months and 4th
installment at the end as final payment.
CHAPTER 10 – PERSONAL AFFAIRS
187. Personal Affairs: -
a. Legal matters concerning estates, income tax, bills and debits.
b. Saving and investments.
c. Defence Services Officer Provident Fund.

RESTD
 135
RESTD

d. Army Officer Benevolent Fund.

e. Insurance personal and group.
f. Religious and spiritual guidance.
g. Matrimonial and births.
h. Burial rights and benefits.
i. Batman.
188. Correct filing of income tax returns is officer's responsibility. Officers are liable to
penal action under the Income Tax Act for failure in filing or incorrect completion of
returns.
189. Income tax return is required to be furnished by 15th September each year by
every officer whose total income during the previous year exceeds to prescribed limit.
190. It is advisable to make a will, specially when you are not married and next of kin
has not been officially declared. If married, your wife is the next of kin, which will be
recorded with Central Officers Record Office.
191. Proper entry should also be made in your AB-439 (Officer's Record of Service).
192. Even though you are not liable to arrest for indebtedness under any process of
civil law while you are in service, administrative action can be taken against you.
193. As a leader of man, you are a religious and spiritual guide to all members of your
command and, in turn, expect similar guidance from your superiors.
194. Births, marriages and deaths must be registered with the local civil authorities
immediately on occurrence.
195. Casualty Returns must accompany birth reports of Military Hospital/Combined
Military Hospital, Nikah Nama and death certificates etc.
Marriage
196. Government is averse to officers getting married either Wore attaining the age of
26 years (24 years in case of Armed Forces Nursing Services Officers) or completion of
6 years of commissioned service whichever is earlier.
197. Officers are not allowed to contract marriage with any foreign ladies except with

RESTD
 136
RESTD

prior permission of the Ministry of Defence. Application for such permissions are to be
submitted in accordance with Rule 604 of Army Regulations (Rules).
198. Original Nikah Nama, photocopy of National Identity Card and nomination form
will
be sent along with the Casualty Return for publication of Part II Orders of marriage.
Rule 31 of Pay and Allowances Volume I 1982.
199. Proper Talaq Nama as per family law will be sent along with the Casualty
Returns.
200. Adoption of Children Act 1926 as clarified vide page xxxiii of Passage
Regulations
-1980 does not apply to Muslims, For all others cases government approval if required
vide terms definition of family given in Passage Regulations 1980 (Page xxxiii)
201. For change of name of officers, procedure laid down in Annexure Jalong with
cuttings of advertisement from three different news papers and an affidavit duly signed
by the Magistrate.
202. Belated Casualty. Units/formations do not initiate Casualty Returns within 48
hours of occurrence as required vide para 44 of Army Personnel Documentation
Regulations 1989.
203. In case casualty of birth of children is delayed for more than 3 months, the
formations/units and officers will justify die late initiation of Casualty Return.
204. Death During Service. Action will be taken vide Army Regulations (Rules) 801 C
and D, Court of Inquiry and fatal case documents will be sent to Central Officer Record
Office within 10 days vide President Directive issued in the meeting held at Joint Staff
Headquarters on 26 November 1980.
205. Lump sum payment equal to full pay up to 6 months out of Privilege/Service
Leave
at the credit of deceased officer will be made to the deceased's family.
206. The widow should apply to Central Officers Record Office for family pension.

RESTD
 137
RESTD

207. If an officer who contracted disease/disability during service and dies within 7
years
of retirement, his family will be entitled to special family pension instead of Ordinary
Pension vide Rule 47 of Pension Regulations Volume I 1986.
208. The injury report must accompany Court of Inquiry or statements of two
witnesses
countersigned by Commanding Officer/Assistant Adjutant and Quartermaster General
for grant of disability pension if attributable or aggravated.
209. Whenever, the officers desire to change their permanent addresses, they would
initiate Casualty Return along with copy of National Identity Card and all nomination
forms for record at Central Officers Record Office.
210. If an officer dies while he is on the active list, his burial arrangements may be
carried out by the Army or privately by relatives/friends, depending on the latter's
choice.
211. If the Army authorities conduct the burial arrangements, the actual total cost will
be incurred by the State. If the arrangements are conducted privately, the deceased's
estate will be credited with the cost incurred, up to a maximum of Rupees 800.00 for
eventual payment to relatives/friends who actually incurred the expenditure.
Army Officers Benevolent Fund
212. The Army Officers Benevolent Fund was instituted with effect from 01 October
1953. The fund affords financial refer to families of deceased subscribers (serving
officers) and those invalided out of service with 100% disability and ex-subscribers
(retired officers) who get incapacitated or die within ten years of retirement.
213. The last actuarial examination was carried out in 1986 and the scales of benefits
were enhanced with effect from l August 1986 with compulsory subscriptions based on l
% of maximum salary. A study was again carried out in 1989 and as a result it has been
decided to further increase the benefits with effect from 01 July 1990 without any
corresponding increase in the rate of subscriptions.
214. Army Miscellaneous Welfare Fund. Relief grants are sanctioned by Director

RESTD
 138
RESTD

General Welfare and Rehabilitation/Adjutant General to alleviate distress amongst

serving or retired officers and their families. Rupees 600.00 (Rupees six hundred) are
granted in lump sum to next of kin of officers who die while in service to meet immediate
expenses towards funeral and other social customs.
Compensation for Accidental Deaths
215. The Next of Kin of Armed Forces officers required to fly or sail in submarines in
peace time in case of fatal accident will be paid compensation, of 2,00,000/- The
compensation will also be been admissible to Next of Kin of officers and cadets on the
event of death caused due to the following: -
a. Arms/Ammunition explosion.
b. Parachute training exercise/demonstrations.
c. Mechanical Transport Accident (where the casualty is attributable to
military service.
216. It is advisable for officers to take out an insurance policy.
217. The Integrated Self Subscribed Compulsory Group Insurance Scheme,
introduced
with effect from l April 1980 vide Special Pakistan Army Order 12/80 and revised vide
Special Pakistan Army Order 6/85, has been further extended for a further period of 3
years from l April 1990 to 31 March 1993. A formal contract to this effect has been
concluded with State Life Insurance Corporation, of Pakistan Group and Pension
Division Karachi.
218. Premium is to be recovered compulsorily from all ranks as per Welfare Package.
219. Postal Life Insurance. These policies are financed out of pay and the premium of
such policies is recoverable monthly from the pay and allowances of army officers on
receipt of intimation from General Manager Postal Life Insurance Karachi.
220. To provide you with assistance in looking after your person, in the way of "wear
and wash", you are authorised a soldier batman to the found from within the sanctioned
establishment of unit, etc on the following scale:-
221. In order to enable Committee of adjustments to collect/dispose of the

RESTD
 139
RESTD

estate/property of a deceased officer, a record of particulars of the wife/next of-kin on

PAFE-939 is required to be submitted by every serving officer and maintained by
Central Officers Record Office.
222. On marriage a family card AB-568 will be issued by the formation headquarters
for
officer’s wife:
223. By section 64 of the Pakistan Army Actthe pay of officers is protected from any
deductions other than those authorised by or under that Act or any other law in force.
224. All government pensions (including military pensions) are protected from
attachment in the execution of the decrees of civil courts
225. A power of attorney to institute or defend a suit when executed by an officer is
exempted from fees under Section 19 of the Court Fees Act, 1870.
226. All persons subject to the Pakistan Army Act whiIst serving under war conditions
are specially protected in respect of civil and revenue litigation under the provisions of
the Soldiers (Litigations Act, 1925), which is given in Manual of Pakistan Military Law
Volume II 1987.
227. All officers of the Armed Forces on duty or on the march, as well as their
authorized
followers, families including the families of such followers, horses, baggage and
transport are exempted from all tolls except certain tools for the transit of barges etc,
along canals.
228. The Arms Act does not apply to the bearing or possession of two revolvers or two
pistols or one, revolver or one pistol of any pattern but one must take service
ammunition of the authorized bore or caliber in the course of duty.

RESTD
 140
RESTD

GSP No 1823 Mil & Gen Science Vol I

CHAPTER - 18
AMMUNITION
1. Explosives are substances which, when suitable initiated, decompose rapidly,

yielding a large quantity of gas. They may conveniently be subdivided into three groups
according to their uses: -
a. Propellants. They are materials the decomposition of which is a ‘burning’
process, which is controllable and slower than the decomposition of high
explosives.
b. High Explosives. They are materials which, when subjected to an
adequate shock, undergo ‘detonation’ with an extremely rapid form of

RESTD
 141
RESTD

decomposition which can be regarded as a shock wave passing through

the high explosive from the point of initiation.
c. Miscellaneous Explosives. They are materials which, are normally
employed to undergo combustion, but are not employed as propellants.
2. Ideally, only one nature of propellant should be used in any one equipment.
3. Categories.
a. Single Base - Nitrocellulose
b. Double Base - nitrocellulose, and nitroglycerine
c. Triple Base - nitrocellulose, nitroglycerine
4. Single-Base Propellants
a. Disadvantages
(1) They are usually more hygroscopic, subject to deterioration in
storage, less easy to ignite, less powerful.
(2) They require a solvent in their manufacture, in which the
consumption of solvent is high.
(3) They are too brittle for use in cord form, and are therefore
manufactured in granular form. This is disadvantage in BL cartridge
which have no rigidity when filled with granular propellant.
b. Advantages
(1) They are cooler in burning, and so usually less erosive.
(2) They usually give less flash (though more smoke).
(3) Their ballistics are less affected by changes in charge temperature.
5. Double-Base Propellants. These propellants consist of a homogeneous
mixture of NC and CQ, together, with some stabilizing agent.
a. Disadvantages
(1) Bright Flash.
(2) High Flame temperature, so cause raid wear in guns.
b. Some double-base propellants contains a large percentage of ‘picrite’
(nitroguanidine) which assists in making them flashless. These are known
as Picrite propellants.
(1) Advantages
(a) Cooler burning so less Erosive.
(b) The quantities of nitrocellulose and nitroglycerine required in
manufacture and considerably less.
(c) They give no flash.
(2) Disadvantages
(a) They are bulkier than ordinary cordites (an increase of 15
percent in charge weight is necessary to obtain the same
ballistics as with cordite W).
(b) They are harder and more brittle.

RESTD
 142
RESTD

(c) They produce more smoke.

(d) They are more difficult to ignite.
6. Flash and Smoke
a. The gases released at the muzzle on fire a gun may cause flash or
smoke.
b. Smoke, flash and dust are undesirable, since they result in the loss of
concealment and, particularly in direct shooting, interfere with laying and
the observation of tracer.
c. Flash is caused by the very hot gases (carbon monoxide and hydrogen),
which are released by the gun, coming into contact with the oxygen of the
atmosphere, in igniting.
(1) Making the propellant cooler burning so that the liberate gases are
not hot enough to combine with the atmospheric oxygen.
(2) Adding certain metallic salts (e.g, of potassium) to the propellant.
d. Flashless propellants tend to be bulker than the hotter propellants and
thus entail the use of a large charge.
7. Future Trends
a. Solid Propellants. For the present-day propellants, the storage life is
good and energy to volume ratio is satisfactory. Any substantial increase
in energy output would entail higher flame temperatures and will result in
rapid corrosion and thus reducing barrel life.
b. Liquid Propellants. Some liquid propellants because of their
smaller volume and high energy output are the focus of researchers these
days.
8. High Explosives (HE). These may be single substances or mixtures; in some

cases the mixture employed included materials which are not themselves high
explosives
9. High Explosives for Filling the Cavities of He shell (Bursting Charges).
These

are relatively insensitive and require a very considerable shock to detonate them; such
a shock can be produced by the detonation of more sensitive high explosive in very
close proximity to them. Typically, HE shells fillings are: -
a. Trinitrotoluene (TNT). A common filling.
b. Amatol. The name of a wide range of mixtures of ammonium nitrate
and TNT. Some are more powerful but all are less violent than TNT.
c. RDX/TNT. A range of mixtures which are all more powerful and violent
than TNT and therefore, very efficient fillings for all natures of HE shell.

RESTD
 143
RESTD

d. Pentalite /DI (Pen/DI). A mixture of similar explosive characteristics to

RDX/TNT, used in hollow charge shell.
e. Plastic explosive. Used in squash head projectiles.
10. HE Intermediates. These constitute a class of high explosive used at an

intermediate point in the detonating train. In general, intermediaries are more sensitive
than HE’s used as main fillings. Typical intermediaries are: -
a. Composition Exploding (CE). This is very widely used in exploder
systems of shell and in the magazine of disruptive fuzes.
b. Flake TNT. This is a little more sensitive than solid TNT and is used in
exploder systems of some shells.
c. RDX/Beeswax (RD/BWX). This is a new intermediary which is very useful
in building up a high rate of detonation in a short distance. The beeswax is
added to make the RDX rather less sensitive.
11. Disruptive Initiators. These are high explosive sufficiently sensitive to be

detonated by a relatively light blow. Because they are so sensitive, disruptive initiators
are used only in small quantities. Three typical disruptive initiators, widely used in the
detonators of disruptive fuzes are: -
a. Mercury fulminate.
b. Lead oxide.
c. ASA (a mixture of lead oxide, lead styphnate and aluminum powder).
12. Miscellaneous Explosives.
a. Igniferous Initiators. These compositions are used to initiate burning
(as opposed to detonation) in the caps of primer and in the detonators of
igniferous fuzes, graze fuzes and some direct action fuzes. All igniferous
initiators are essentially sensitive to the heat or friction produced by a
blow.
(1) Detonator composition ‘A’ (DCA), used in fuzes.
(2) QF composition, used in primer caps.
(3) Cap composition, used in the caps of primer and small arms
cartridges.

13. Gunpowder. Although very vulnerable to moisture and a voluminous smoke

producer, gunpower has its uses because of its insensitivity to shock. In services it is
used in: -
a. Igniters for BL cartridges.

RESTD
 144
RESTD

b. Magazines of tubes, primers and igniferous fuzes.

c. Bursters in certain projectile.
d. Delay composition.
e. Time rings in combustion fuzes.

CARTRIDGES
14. Cartridges may be classified as ‘quick firing’ (QF) or ‘breech loading’ (BL). The
two

types are discussed briefly below.

a. QF Cartridges. The charge is contained in a cartridge case usually
made of brass, the functions of which are to provide ‘obturation’ and to
carry the charge and means to ignition.
b. Obturation is achieved by the expanding of the case against the walls of
the chamber, and ignition by means of a primer (percussion or electric)
screwed into the base of the case. QF ammunition may be.
(1) Fixed. Where the projectile and the cartridge case are permanently
‘mated’.
(2) Semi-fixed. Where the projectile is a machine fit to the mouth of
the cartridge case, but the two are separable.
(3) Separate. Where the cartridge case and projectile are stored
and loaded separately.
15. BL-Cartridges. The charge is contained in a fabric bag, an ‘igniter’
containing

gunpowder being sewn on the to one or both ends. Obturation is not, as in QF

ammunition, but is achieved by means of a primer.
16. Practical Considerations
a. Protection from Moisture and Damage. All types of cartridges,
whilst still in their packages, are well protected against moisture and
damages.
(1) In fixed QF cartridges the charge is always well protected, but the
cartridge case is liable to mechanical damage.
(2) BL cartridges have no protection whatever. Great care is needed to
keep the charges dry, as the gunpowder igniters become useless
when wet.
17. Cartridge Debris. After firing, smoldering debris from the cartridge may be
found

RESTD
 145
RESTD

in the bore, which may, in the case of BL cartridges, cause pre-ignition unless
precautions are taken to remove or extinguish it. On rare occasions this debris may be
the cause of an incorrect length of ram, which will result in irregular ballistics.
18. Charges
a. Types of Charges. The fol types of charges are is use in the service: -
(1) Service. The normal full charge, e.g. 25’pr, charge 3.
(2) Super. The charge which gives maximum permissible
ballistics with the service weight projectile consistent with regularity,
e.g. 25-pr, super charge.
(3) High Velocity (HV). The charge which gives the maximum velocity
obtainable with the service projectile, e.g. 17-pr APCBC HV.
(4) Super Velocity (SV). The charge use with a light weight SV
projectile e.g. 17-pr, APDS.
(5) Reduced. A charge which gives lower pressure and hence lower
velocities than any normal issued charge; suitable for HE shell in
high velocity guns, e.g. 17-pr reduced charge.
(6) Composite. A multiple charge in which the propellant in at least
one portion differs in size and/or shape and or composition from
that in the remaining portions, e.g. 25-pr, charge 3.
(7) Intermediate. High trajectory charges used for all ranges.
(8) Special Charges. Star shell charges.
(9) Blank. A charge filled with quick burning cordite of
gunpowder.
19. Intermediate Charges. These are required to enable a high trajectory to be

used at all ranges, the high trajectory being required.

20. Propellant Proof and Charge Adjustment. A certain lot of propellant is

chosen and the ballistics of a given charge weight of it determined accurately, this is
known as the ‘Master Standard’ other lots of the same propellant are then chosen and
tested by firing against this master standard, and are known as ‘Current Standards’. All
other lots of the same propellant are then tested against one of these current standards:
as a result, an alteration is made to the charge weight of any lot to give the same
ballistics as the current stands. This process is called ‘charge adjustment’. Each nature
of propellant has its own master standard. Mixed natures of propellant will not give good
results, and should never be used in practice.
PROJECTILES - GENERAL
21. General Principles.
a. Projectiles for land service equipment can divided into two classes.
(1) Shell. It carries a filling such as HE, smoke, star, etc.

RESTD
 146
RESTD

(2) Shot. They are non-explosive and are used in the field for the
attack or armor and concrete. Their effect on armor and concrete is
produced by virtue of their striking energy.
b. The describe characteristics of a good projectile are: -
(1) Maximum Load Carrying Capacity. In the case of shell (eg,
HE or smoke content).
(2) Good Fragmentation. In the case of HE shell used in an anti-
personnel role.
(3) Sufficient Strength. It is to withstand the stresses to which it
subjected whilst it is travelling up the bore of the gun.
c. Good Ballistics. They imply small air resistance, stabilityin flight and
large weight/caliber ratio. Air resistance can be decreased by making the
nose long and pointed and by tempering the base behind the driving band
(streamlining).
22. Shape. This shape of the nose is expressed in terms of ‘calibers/radius
head

(CRH). Some equipment has both simple CRH shell and compound CRH shell. The 25-
pr, for instance, has a shell of compound CRH 5/10 which has been given a service
CRH of 10.
23. Stability and Ranging Power. Stability can be obtained in two ways: -
a. By spin.
b. By fins.
24. Due to the unavoidable differences in the physical characteristics of different

natures of projectile for the same equipment it is extremely difficult to make such
projectiles ballistically identical.
25. Driving Bands. All conventional projectiles fired from refilled guns are fitted

with driving bands primarily for the following two reasons; -

a. To impart spin to the projectile.
b. To seal the propellant gases behind the projectile.
26. To some extent the driving band also supports the projectile during its passage
up

the bore and reduces its vibration.

27. In BL and separate loading guns, the driving band serves the additional purpose

of a ramming stop, whereas the projectile.

28. Driving bands are normally mad eof cooper, they may be single or double

RESTD
 147
RESTD

depending on the equipment and are usually fitted at the rear of the projectile. They
tend to leave a deposit of copper in the bore, and, in equipment where this tendency is
pronounced the cartridges contain a small amount of ‘de-coppering foil’ to counteract it.
In case of recoilless rifles, the proj are fitted with pre-engraved driving bands.

SHELL
29. These may be divided into two types: -
a. HE Shell
(1) Internal form and dimensions. The greater the firing stresses,
the thicker must be the shell walls, and the HE content is
consequently reduced. (Rocket heads, on the other hand, have
very thin walls and carry a very high payload, because firing
stresses are small due to the comparatively low acceleration of this
form of projectile. No unauthorized charge, therefore, should ever
be fired, nor should a shell be used in an equipment for which it is
not authorized.
(2) The effect of HE shell at the target. The HE shell can
produced a useful result at the target in two ways fragmentation
and blast.
(a) Fragmentation. Good shell fragmentation, which
depends mainly on the size and velocity of the shell
fragments is obtained by the detonation of a violent HE in a
shell of good capacity. The best size for the attack of men is
found to be about ½-th of an ounces, and, with moder shell,
fragment velocities are in the region of 3,000 fs.
(b) Blast. The shock caused by the detonation produces a
destructive effect immediately around the shell.
(3) Fragmentation of HE Shell. The average velocity of the
fragments is some 3,000 fs, but modern explosives and improved
shell design may increase this figure.
(4) Fragment Patterns. In the case of ground bursts there are
the fragments thrown out horizontally of nearly so, in the case of air
bursts they are the fragments projected downwards.
(5) Burst on Impact. To obtain a useful fragment effect the shell
must burst as the fuze touches the ground.Fuzzes with very quick
action are therefore required for good fragment effect from
percussion bursts.
(6) Backward Effect. The fragment patterns show that there is no
appreciable backward fragment effect from the detonation of a shell
in flight.

RESTD
 148
RESTD

b. Carrier Shell. Carrier shell contains a small bursting charge for the
purpose of opening the shell and liberating its contents.
(1) Smoke (white and colored).
(2) Flare (Colored).
(3) Chemical (liquid filled).
(4) Star (with a parachute).
(5) Incendiary.
(6) ‘Brads’ (for use with radar observation).
(7) Propaganda leaflets.
30. Carrier shell are of four main types, viz: -
a. Bursting shell.
b. Base ejection shell. The majority of modern carrier shell are of this
type.
c. Base Emission shell.
d. Head Ejection (or Nose Ejection).

Types of Anti-Tank Projectile

31. There are two main types, shot and HE shell.
a. Shot. Shot defeats armour by means of striking energy, derived from their
weight and velocity. High velocity guns, however, wear quickly and are
comparatively heavy.
(1) Solid Shot. The following types are used.
(a) Armour Piercing (AP). A solid steel shot with blunt nose
of about 1.4 simple CRH.
(b) Armour Piercing, Capped (APC). APC is slightly less
effective than AP.
(c) Armour piercing, Capped, Ballistic Capped (APCBC).
This is APC with a light ballistic cap added to improve the
ballistic shape of the projectile.
(2) Shatter. Generally speaking, the thicker the armour to be
penetrated, the higher must be the remaining velocity.
(3) Composite Shot. It is evident that what is required at the target is
a high striking energy, i.e. a heavy projectile moving at a high
velocity.
(a) Hyper Velocity Armour Piercing Tracer. It is used in
90 mm Gun against armoured targets.The projectile is a light
weight hyper velocity proj having a very hard armour piercing
core of tungsten carbide steel (weighting 8 lbs) a tracer
loaded steel base with integral rotating band, and aluminum

RESTD
 149
RESTD

body with a pressed on steel bourrelet.The shot when fired

attains a MV of 3350 fps with max range of 15130 yards.
(b) Armour Piercing Discarding Sabot (APDS). 100 mm
APDS A/tk Ammo has been developed by I of A and
introduced into service as a latest version, having a highest
hit probability owing to its super muzzle velocity achieved by
its small dia sub-caliber projectile and its high ballistic co-
efficient. It has MV of 4700 fps and an effective range of
2000 m.
(c) Armour Piercing Fin Stabilized Discarding Sabot-
(APFSDS). shot may also be fired from a rifled barrel, with
the use of a slipping driving band to reduce spin.
b. HE Shell
(1) HE Anti-Tank Shell. With this type of projectile, the armour is
defeated by the energy of the HE content of the shell, the AP
performance, being independent of remaining velocity, is constant
at all ranges. There are two ways in which the energy of the HE
content of the shell can be made to defeat armour. They are: -
(a) Hollow Charge. In this type of shell the HE content is
arranged round a hollow cone (see Figure 200) with has the
effect of focusing the energy of detonation into a small hot jet
of very high velocity which penetrates the armour. The
penetration of this jet depends upon the diameter and angle
of the cone and also on the material of its lining.
(b) Squash Head (Wall Buster). Here the HE, usually
RDX/BWX or plastic explosive, is contained in a very thin
walled shell (see Figure 201).
(2) Tracers. Anti-tank and anti-aircraft projectiles are fitted with
tracers o assist observation of fire.
(3) Attack of Concrete. The most effective type of shot against
concrete defences has been found to be APCBC, and the most
effective shell is squash head. Where shot of any description is
used to break up concrete it is often useful to fire an occasional, HE
shells to clear away debris.

Fuzes
32. Fuzes can be divided into three broad categories, percussion, time and proximity.
a. Percussion Fuzes. These fuzes are caused to function when a shell
meets an object during flight. They can be sub-divided into two main
types, direct action and graze: -

RESTD
 150
RESTD

(1) Direct Action Fuzes. In these a striker in the nose of the fuze
is driven into the detonator by the impact of the nose of the fuze
with any resistant object.
(2) Graze Fuzes. These are actuated by the deceleration
produced when the shell strikes an object. Graze fuzes are, in
general, not so rapid in action as direct action fuzes. Some
percussion fuzes (e.g. fuze 119 B) are a combination of direct
action and graze.
b. Time Fuze. These fuzes func after a fixed time, to which the fuze must
be set before firing. There are two main types: -
(1) Combustion (Powder Burning). The shock of discharge from the
gun causes a train of slow burning powder to be ignited, the
effective length of the train being regulated by setting a moveable
portion of the fuze to a scale reading. These fuzes deteriorate
rapidly if exposed to moisture and are therefore usually fitted with
waterproof covers which have to be removed before setting.
(2) Mechanical. These contain a clockwork mechanism. In general,
such fuzes are more accurate than combustion fuzes since they are
not affected by meteorological conditions. Both types of time fuze
are usually fitted with a percussion element in which case they are
known as ‘time-and-percussion’ fuzes. Time, and time-and-
percussion fuzes are set by hand using a fuze key or hand fuze
setter.
c. Proximity Fuzes. The present type of proximity fuze employed in the
land service is the VT fuze. The height of burst under any given set of
conditions is determined by the design of the electrical circuits, and is not
adjustable by the user. The shape, nature and water content of the ground
will also affect the height at which a VT fuzed shell detonates. It is
possible, though very difficult, for the enemy to ‘join these fuzes by radio
counter measures. VT fuzes at present ‘arm’ after a fixed time in flight,
they may in future, however, be fitted with a variable arming device which
will enable the point on the trajectory where the fuze becomes armed to
be preselected at the gun position.
33. Safety Devices. All fuzes are fitted with safety devices to prevent premature
functioning. A fuze, in which all the safety devices have been released, is said to
have been ‘armed’.
a. Devices Operated by Initial Set Back. They are intended to arm the
fuze shortly after it has left the muzzle and are fitted to all fuzes. They incl:
-

RESTD
 151
RESTD

(1) Mechanical interlocks to prevent the movement of the striker or

detonator pellet.
(2) Safety Shutters. These are usually provided in disruptive fuzes,
they are normally centrifugally operated and, in the closed, or safe,
position interrupt the explosive train.
b. Fuzes now under development incorporate a ‘delayed arming shutter’ the
opening of which is mechanically delayed so that it cannot open until the
shell is some distance from the muzzle.
c. Device Operated by the Detachment Before Loading . A fuze can
never be fully armed by the operation of these devices only, since every
fuze is fitted with type ‘a’, whether type ‘b’ is fitted or not.

Ammunition Markings, Sorting and Preparation

34. Ammunition is marked to facilitate identification and to ensure correct sorting in

store and in transit. In addition the marking enable defects in design or manufacture to
be traced back to their source. They are not further considered here.
a. Multi Barrel Rocket. It is a ground to ground free flight arty rocket
fired from a multi tube launcher, consisting of 30 smooth bore tubes
assembled in 3 rows of 10 tubes each mounted on 5 ton ISUZU Truck,
The rockets can be fired one after the other or in salvo. The rocket is 2m
87 cm and 5 mm long, weighing 66 kg when fired. It has max range of
20580 m and a reduced range of 12080 m when fired with ring breaking.
b. Grenade Hand Arges 69 PI Mk I. Oval in shape it is a
fragmentation type grenade made of plastic. It is one of the modern
version grenades which give our controlled and regulated fragments.
Filling is 65 grm plasticized PETN. It contains 3500 steel balls which are
released on detonation. Due to their ballistic configuration and weight,
they achieve maximum effective penetration. This grenade has a grooved
surface to insure its identification even in darkness. Color of grenade is
olive green with Arges He Gr 69, embossed on the body.
35. Sorting of Ammo. Cartridges should always be sorted by propellant natures, as
these should never be mixed in a shoot. Shell should be sorted by natures, and,
for predicated shoots, into groups by weight. Fuzes should be sorted firstly by
nature, secondly by weight, thirdly by colour marking.
36. Further particulars on sorting ammunition will be found as fol: -
a. In general, in the gun drills.
b. For predicated fire, in Artillery Training Volume III, Pamphlet No. 5, in
Section 29 and Appendix IV.

RESTD
 152
RESTD

c. For calibration, in Artillery Training Volume III, Pamphlet No, 10, In Section
5.
37. Prep of Ammo. Prep of ammo may incl any of the fol: -
a. Removal of ‘grummets’ (material fixed around the driving band (s) of some
shell to protect them from damage in transit).
b. Fuzing unfazed shell.
c. Removal of any caps and /or pins.
d. Fuze setting.
38. Full instrs for the carrying out of these processes are contained in the gun

drills.

Care of Ammo and Safety Precautions

39. The care of ammunition is of the greatest importance to ensure that the effect of

the projectile at the target is as great as possible. In extreme cases danger to our own
troops may be the result of insufficient care of ammo. VT fuzes, in particular, must not
be exposed to extremes of temperature.
40. Propellants are bad conductors of heat, and are therefore slowing approximating

to the temperature of their surroundings. For calibration and predicted shooting, where
accurate charge temperatures are required, every possible effort must be made to keep
charges at an even temperature for at least 12 hours before shooting.
41. A small pamphlet entitled ‘Notes on the Care and Preservation of ammunition
and

explosives in the Field, Part – I - Artillery Ammunition has been issued down to
JCOs/NCOs in field branch artillery regiments.
42. Safety Precautions. The golden rule is ‘When dealing with ammunition,

fol exactly the drill laid down for the particular process involved’.
43. Prematures. Some causes of prematures and guidance on their elimination are
given in most Arty Handbook.
Latest Trends and Developments in Ammo/weapons
44. Astrolite – A New Explosive. Most significant of the new explosives is

Astrolite A-1-5, whose liquid form is easily convertible to solid state. It is said to be the
world’s most powerful non-nuclear explosive. In demolition Astrolite a produces crater
sizes three times greater than the existing high power military explosives. Astrolite G is
a clear liquid explosive especially designed to produce a very high detonation velocity.

RESTD
 153
RESTD

In field tests Astrolite G remained detonable for 4 days in the ground, even when the
ground was soaked due to rains. The military uses of Astrlite G are:-
a. Liquid Land Mines.
b. Digging Fox Holes and Trenches.
45. Some developmental work also has been done on two other families of Astrolite

explosives. These are Astrolite P and K. Astrolite family of explosives will be applied for
hard rock blasting, excavation required for petroleum and other mineral reserves, under
water demolition and lumbering.
46. Liquid propellants. In rocket technology, liquid propellants are used on a large
scale.
a. Advantages.
(1) Liquid propellants can open up new avenues by providing scope for
further improvement in the characteristics of propellant powder.
(2) Efforts are being made to develop shells with compressed powder
propellant charges designed to make the cartridge case
unnecessary.
(3) At present, howitzers and mortars use charge increments to vary
the range.
47. Propellant System. Liquid propellants are normally classed as single
component or double component propellants usually referred to as mono-
propellants and bi-propellants.
a. Mono-propellants consist of only one liquid while bi-propellant are made
up of two components, the fuel component and the oxidant component,
both being stored and fed to the weapon separately.
b. Bi-propellant system can be broken down into two groups, hypergolic and
non-hypergolic. The example of a hypergolic system could be hydrazine
plus nitric acid, while the example of a non hypergolic system could be
kerosene plus nitric acid.
48. Propellant Feed System
49. There are two very different methods of introducing the liquid or liquids into the

combustion chamber of the gun. In the first method, the whole amount of propellant
needed to fire the projectile is pumped into the combustion chamber before being
ignited thus acting as a compact propellant charge. This procedure is referred to as the
bulk loading method.

Rocket and Bombs

50. Two other weapons which can be used by aircrafts against ground of sea tgts are
rockets and conventional bombs: -

RESTD
 154
RESTD

a. Rockets. They are essentially close rg wpns primarily for use in the B
fd, but they can be very effective against ships rockets are mounted on
board.
b. Bombs. They vary in size and no rule as suck can be applied upon to
dictate to size. There are many different types of bombs, such as armour
piercing, anti personnel, incendiary and cluster. One cluster bomb can
contain a mix of all types of bomblets. One of the best-known cluster
bombs is made in Britain by Hunting. It carries 147 bomblets of various
types and is designed for use against tanks. APCs, soft skinned vehicles
parked aircraft and at sea against fast attack craft.
(1) Fuel Air Explosive. The first is known as fuel air explosives (FAE).
This devastating weapon is delivered by a cluster bomb which on
exploding, releases a cloud of vaporized particles in the air above
the target. When it is spread, the whole cloud is exploded by
special types of detonators contained in small grenades released
by the bomb.An experiment with a 500 lbs FAE bomb showed the
spread over an area of 15 meters in diameter, producing a pressure
of 30,930 kg, per square meters or some 26.4 atmosphere.
(2) Bomb 1217. The second bomb of which only very few details have
been made public, is a British invention specifically designed for
use against airfields.
(3) Durandle Dibber. The third is the French Dibber. This is a deep
penetration bomb for use against airfield runways. Bombs and
rockets are far cheaper than missiles.
51. Terminally Guided Shells. The greatest artillery development of recent
years has been the terminally guided shell. Being developed by the Americans it
can acquire the target with extreme accuracy, thus eliminating the necessity for
ranging shots and bracketing the target before opening fire for effect. The new
shell is officially known as the Cannon Launched Guided Projectile (CLGP) but
has been givben the name ‘Copper Head’. It consists of a conventional shell with
HEAT warhead, but it is fitted with a laser seeker (receiver) in the nose of four
control fins at the rear.The whole projectile is some 35 lbs heavier than a
conventional shell of the same caliber. CLGPs are primarily designed for use
against lanks, and although at present only made for the 155 mm gun/Howitzer.
52. The smart Target Activated Fire and Forget (STAFF ). This projectile is a

155 mm tube launched shell which uses a passive radiometer to detect an armoured
veh. The projectile can be fired to a maximum range of approx 21 KMs to pass over the
tgt at an altitude approx 15 to 30 M.
53. Sense and Destroy Armour (SADARM). It is a precession guided sub

RESTD
 155
RESTD

ammo of US origin which is delivered over the target area by a cargo-carrier projectile
each containing three each units. The sensor discriminates between jeep and AFV. It is
fired from the standard 203 mm (8 inch) M110A2 SP How and MLRS using standard
propellant charge. SADARM will have a range of 25 to 30 KMs and is also intended to
be developed for use with M109 series and M198 Howitzers probably containing 4 sub-
munitions.
54. Multi Launch Rocket System (MLRS) smart munition. Fall into two cats.
a. Terminally guided Warhead.
b. MLRS SADARM. The second category of smart munitions produces a
small area of authority and are called small footprint munitions. MLRS
Sense and destroy Armour (SADARM) consists of a rocket containing 6
submunitions dispensed over a general target area. Each submunition
descends in a spiraling motion on a small parachute.
c. A/Tk Projectile
(1) Guide Anti Armour Mortar Projectile (GAMP). The mortar
Precision Guided Munition (PGM) are particularly interesting since
and mortar batteries have traditionally had zero anti-tank potential.
In the United States, the GAMP for 4.2” mortar is being developed.
Swedish PGM is also working on 120 mm Mortar Shell (STRIX).
d. Self-Forged Fragment Mortar Projectile. A mortar launched anti-
tank munition now being developed will be utilizing (SFF) concept. In
increase the barrel life by about 4 to 5 times and allows firing at high level
of pressure (more then 4,000 bar)

RESTD
 156
RESTD

GSP No 1823 Mil & Gen Science Vol 2

CHAPTER – 6
WIRELESS RECIEVER

CHAPTER – 7
OTHER COMM SYS

CHAPTER – 9
CARE OF WIRELESS EQPT

RESTD
 157
RESTD

GSP No 1823 Mil & Gen Science Vol II, Part 4

CHAPTER – 1 SEC – 1
GLOSSARY OF NUCLEAR WARFARE

RESTD
 158
RESTD

GSP No 1955 Customs of Svc

CHAPTER – 1
GEN MATTERS
1. Role Model An officer is a role model for the men to emulate. His actions, words,
behaviour and attitude are subjected to minute scrutiny and discussions by his men
whom he commands in peace and war. An officer, therefore, has to weigh cfiefully
before he says or does something to avoid embarrassment to himself and to the
system. Your good personal example can 'do wonders. In all your decisions national
interest should be held as supreme.
2. Social and Official Relations. The difference between social and official relations
may seem paradoxical to some of the young officers. Following points will help in
understanding the difference:- a. If ticked off for a fault, do not brood over it and never
allow yourself to sulk. b. Off parade and in the ,Officers Mess treat officers senior to you
with natural courtesy due to rank, age, experience and responsibility. But do not be
frightened of them. t c. Juniors address their seniors and also refer to them during
conversation with other officers, by their rank and names. While addressing a senior
'Sir' should be used on and off duty.
3. Conduct Expected of an Officer a. A very high standard of behaviour and bearing
is expected of an officer at all times and places. Civilians judge the Army by the
behaviour of its members. Likewise other ranks follow the example of their officers. b. D
o not indulge in hot arguments with your men or paid civilian staff. Manhandling a low
paid civilian staff or other ranks is highly undignified act and a Court Martial offence. An
officer must exercise restraint and control over himself. c.Be truthful and honest at all
times and in all your dealings both and private, even if it is harmful to you or to your
friends. Lies do pay and your words lose their value and you go down in the estimation
of others. Remember that the respect and confidence which you will be able to inspire

RESTD
 159
RESTD

will depend largely on your and honesty. Therefore, avoid lies, mis-statements and in
general as well as in courts of inquiry court-martials. d. The responsibilities of officers
are multifarious and onerous. It is by that you achieve greater results and get the best
subordinates rather than by merely giving orders a policy. Set your target, plan your
work, give orders, oversee execution, monitor progress and ensure results.
4. Attitude Take orders in correct spirit and issue orders after due Always carry out
an order first to of your ability, or think it is wrong, you can always your suggestions
adjutant, company commander.
5. Illegal Orders. An illegal order or an order implementation of the of constitution,
rules or regulations should be However, care and knowledge interpretation of is
required before an order, refused. An incorrect refusal may lead to 3 ience of lawful
command, and offence under Pakistan Army Act 1952. Consult your knowledgeable
seniors before e upon such a course.
6. Lo yalty to the Never let down your Corps/ or your brother officers. This loyalty
should not be misused to cover up the wrong doings and serious lapses.
7. Punctuality. Make a point to keep your appointment. It is unsoldierly to be late on
duty and bad manners to be late for an appointment. Army officers are known for their
punctuality.
8. Parade Ground a. The parade ground of units is 'sacred'. Never smoke on it
(except during rest periods and in an appointed corner). Nor go across it in plain clothes
or on a private vehicle, during working hours. b. Never go between a squad on parade
and its commander or indeed any one, who is concerned with the parade. c. Do not
stand with your hands in pocket. d. Do not take story or games to parade ground. This
will not give a correct message to others.
9. Professional Knowledge and Study a. Equip yourself with Training Manuals and
o and regulations and try to constantly improve upon yo knowledge. You can always
buy basic pamphlets. b. Strive to improve your educational qualifications wherev
possible'. Computer is the best modern day technology. and make use of it at your
earliest. It would help you in yo career. c. Work according to a set programme and a
daily timetable, which should include a study period etc. Consultation of will improve

RESTD
 160
RESTD

vocabulary and consequently both expression. d. When in doubt always seek advice of
those who are more knowledgeable and experienced.
10. Current Events. Keep yourself abreast with current national, international,
political and military events. This is expected of every intelligent and educated person.
The best way is to read a standard newspaper daily and as many of the military
periodicals as you can. Listen to the News regularly.
11. Physical Fitness a. Maintain and promote your health. Be conversant with the
fundamental principles of hygiene. Prevention is better than cure. Take precautions
against diseases, particularly contagious and infectious. A sound body carries a sound
mind, which is so essential for the efficient discharge of your duties. Take physical
exercise and bath daily: you will improve both your physique and figure. Watch against
obesity, which tarnishes your image as an officer. b. Slight care and precaution will
protect you from malaria, cholera, cold, heat-stroke, VD etc. c. is a contagious disease
with dreadful after effects. Its lethality is on two grounds. One that it is only detected at
the last stage and secondly it has no known treatment. Precautions can alone prevent
the disease. Ample information is available on the subject.
12. Club. Membership of a Services is regarded as a part of an officer's social
education. Soon on arrival in a new station, obtain membership of Service if there is one
in the station.

RESTD
 161
RESTD

CHAPTER – 2
SALUTING
13. Greetings. It is an old custom of the service for officers to greet one another on
seeing for the first time in the day. The normal greeting from a junior officer to the senior
would be Alaikum, Sir' and 'Good Morning, Sir', to a non-Muslim officer. But remember it
is for the junior to greet first. These verbal greetings of 'Assalam-o-Alaikum, and
'Wa'alaikum Salam, will not replace normal salute but will follow it. Your attention is
drawn to 246. Please note:- a. Salute is an obligation and not a choice. b. Salute among
equal ranks is obligatory for the junior to senior once they come across for the first time
and once they disperse. Among ,other ranks, the juniors always pay compliments to the
senior ranks d. Mo de of salute and returning a sa may differ according to the location,
activity and dress won by either of the party. e. Shaking hand as part of greeting is a
matter of choice.
14. Saluting while On Parade. The practice of saluting must be carried out
punctitiously. On parade when you have the occasion to address an officer senior to
you, say 'Sir' and salute him even if he is of the same rank.
15. Saluting while Off Parade. Subalterns and captains always salute Field Officers
(majors and above) and address then as 'Sir'. Always salute the senior officer,
regardless of rank, the first time you see him in the morning. If you are in plain clothes
and you meet a senior officer whom you recognise, greet him by saying 'Assalam-o-
Alaikum, Sir' or 'Good Morning, Sir'; if bare headed do NOT raise your heels. If in
uniform but without a headgear, do not raise your hand (as if saluting) but stand at
attention and just wish 'Assalam-oAlaikum, Sir' or 'Good Morning, Sir'.
16. Do not salute or return salute while riding a motor cycle. A gesture by slightly
bowing your head should suffice. A second seater will however salute, if in uniform.
17. Returning Salutes a. Make certain that you return salutes smartly, readily and
properly- never with anything in the hand or a cigarette in your mouth. Watch out for

RESTD
 162
RESTD

others saluting you while you are in a vehicle. Surely, they feel bad if salute is not
returned. b. DON'T fail to return compliment paid to by rank and file, and acknowledge it
with a proper full salute; never touch your cap like a taxi man acknowledging a tip.
There is only one kind of salute; it is the same for officers as for those in the ranks.
18. Troops. Be careful to return smartly salutes paid to you bodies of troops on
dismissal.
19. Decorum of Military Offices. Come to attention and salute when you enter and
leave the office of an officer, even if he is junior to you. If the visiting you is senior, you
should get up first as a mark of respect at the first meeting.
20. Others. Remember to pay proper compliments to the officers of the Navy, Air
Force and civil government who are senior or equal to you in rank. Acquaint yourself
well with their badges of rank or The rank badges and order of precedence of
government officials vis-a-vis army officers are given at Annex A and B for guidance. If
you have an occasion to visit a Naval ship etc, always remember to salute the Quarter-
deck, both on arrival and departure. in status to Pakistan Officers and, therefore, are not
required to be saluted. They can be greeted informally.
21. Other Compliments a. When wishing a lady known to you, say Morning etc.
While addressing ladies the general rule is to be very polite and courteous. They be
addressed, if required as 'Bahen' or Mrs It must be remembered by all concerned that
on occasions such as prize distributions when prizes are given by a lady, she must be
paid proper compliments by the recipients. b. When the National Anthem is played,
every one rises, all in uniform stand to attention and salute. In plain clothes, salute if
wearing any headgear. c When a quarter-guard turns out ceremonially to entitled to this
privilege, every one nearby should stand to attention but not salute. d. When the retreat
and reveille are sounded, stand to attention. e. Do not extend your hand for a "hand
shake". It is the privilege of a senior. Saying Assalam-o-Alaikum Sir, should suffice. f.
Do not try to a senior. It his If he wants, he will himself make a move for it.

RESTD
 163
RESTD

CHAPTER – 3
MESS CUSTOMS
(See Mess Rules)
22. Purpose. The purpose of messes is to provide a:- a. Home for the dining
members, both permanent and temporary. b. Focus for the social of other subscribing
members. c. for a field service mess for the unit concerned.
23. convenience of officers, with a definite military value, such a. They are an
essential element in the upbringing of young officers. b. They play an important part in
the maintenance of corps, which is so vital for any c. They provide a homely
atmosphere for rest and recreation. The Commanding Officer, the Adjutant or your
Commander may be tough on parade but the mess they be relatively informal and
considerate.
24. Mess Rules. Besides Standard Army Mess Rules, every mess has its own rules.
Acquaint yourself with these on first arrival and abide by them.
25. Mess Life. (Attitude towards the Mess). a. Preserve the dignity and decorum of
your mess. It is not only your home but a place for display of the trophies and traditions
of your b. Consider and ensure the comfort of other members of the mess. c. The mess
should not be regarded as a club and, therefore, ladies should not be allowed to dine in
the mess except on special occasions such as Eid, dining out and other organised
functions etc. Female Commissioned Officers (not AFNS Officers) are entitled to use of
mess like male officers. d. Dignified and polite language must be used when speaking
to or in the presence of ladies. e. Politico-religious controversies are not discussed in
the mess. Senior officer present in the mess is responsible for mess discipline.
26. Dress ( See chapter "Dress"). a. Be sure you are properly dressed before you
enter a mess. b. An officer must possess complete mess dresses. It is a matter of pride
for the army officers.

RESTD
 164
RESTD

27. BOQ. Keep your well furnished, neat and tidy. After a day's hard work you do
need a comfortable environment. Upkeep of the room is a reflection of one's personality.
28. Courtesy to Senior Officers a. When your senior officers of the rank of major and
above or any guests come into the ante room, stand up, wish them, and ff h b d b iff f l i
h h A senior dining is given this courtesy even though he may be of the same rank. b.
Junior Officers should not be shy of entering into conversation with senior officers in the
mess, especially at meals. c. Stand up when speaking to or spoken by a senior, if he is
standing. d. Before changing a channel or turning the radio or TV or Satellite Receiver,
ask the senior member present, if he has any objection.
29. Courtesy to Visitors a.Visitors come to the mess frequently. Whether they are
just visitors who come to pay a courtesy call or they have been invited, see that they are
looked after and made to feel at home. b. Ladies except those holding commission are
not supposed to sign visitors' book. Remember particularly that ladies are well looked
after and you do not leave the function before they do. When there are a number of
guests, individual officers are detailed by the President Mess Committee to look after
guest.
30. Treating. Do not offer treats to other members of the mess and not expect the
same from All members pay for whatever they consume a mess.
31. Smoking. Smoking is injurious to health. Do not smoke, except in smoking
specifically earmarked by Mess Committee.
32. Supervising Service. Do not supervise the service etc, during formal
lunches and dinners as it is highly undesirable. Leave this job for the Mess NCO.
33. Complaints / Suggestions. Treat the mess staff with consideration. Do not
lose temper or shout at them. If you are not satisfied with the service. report the matter
to the Mess Secretary by entering your complaint in the "Complaint Book". b. Be co-
operative with mess secretary and food member. Do not pester them too much. 13. T
Properly fold and return to the provided for the purpose.
34. 14. Mess Bills a. Mess bills must be paid on or before due date. being late. an
explanation may be called by your Commanding Officer. Disciplinary action can be
taken against you if the mess bill is not paid. b. If for any reason you cannot pay your
mess. bill, inform the PMC b f d d O i k h b i by your bankers. It is a serious offence c.

RESTD
 165
RESTD

Mess maintenance expenses are the private concern of the officers concerned. The
mess expenditure must, therefore, be well regulated.
35. Dinners a. One dinner night per week is recommended for Regimental messes
wherever they exist. All dining members attend except those excused by Commanding
Mess Committee. Non dining members should attend in rotation at least one such
dinner in a month b. Be in the ante-room at least minutes before the official time for
dinner. Television etc should not be normally switched on; are not read on such
occasions. c. When dinner is announced the President Mess Committee will guide the
senior guest or the senior officer to dinner. Junior officers should allow their seniors to
precede them. Do not sit down until the President is seated. There is often a seat kept
vacant for the odd late comer. If you are late for dinner, apologise to the President
before sitting, but such an occurrence should be very rare. d. During the meals keep an
eye on the other's progress and if necessary speed up your eating to avoid holding up
everyone else. e. Previously, on guest nights and other special occasions, health the
visiting dignitary was drunk followed by National Anthem. Lemon, Orange squash or
other minerals or water were circulated. The procedure for drinking health was that
when soft drinks had been the President gave a knock on the gavel, rose and said "Mr
Vice, The title). The Vice President then rose and gave the toast "Gentlemen The
(dignitary? title). All officers then rose and drunk. The band, present, played before the
toast was No one started to drink until the toast had been given. and the band had
finished. After that was over, all sat down. A few minutes later the same procedure
substituting Vice, The Pakistan' for Vice............", (The title)' Gentlemen, 'The for
'Gentlemen, the title)' was repeated announcing the Pakistan. The band played as
before, the National Anthem of Pakistan. Note: This is not being practiced anymore. It is
for information only. f. The senior dining member or the regimental guest if present is
the first to leave after dinner. The President will be the last but one and Vice President,
the last to leave. g. Should you have occasion to leave the mess, for any reason, during
dinner, seek the permission from the President. h. When guests are present, do not
leave the mess until after they have gone.
36. When supper is served, instead of mess dinner, no special formalities are to be
observed, except that you must be properly dressed in accordance with local orders

RESTD
 166
RESTD

issued from time to time, supper is served within certain prescribed timings in the
evening according to local procedure.
37. Office Bearers a. The general management of the is run by a Mess Committee
composed of three unanimously elected honorary office bearers, President Mess
Committee, Mess Secretary and Food Member. Officers entrusted with these duties by
the Officer are expected to put in their best so as to run the mess as efficiently as
possible. b. All complaints brought to the notice of the Mess Committee must be heard
and genuine endeavours made to rectify them without bias or prejudice.
38. Honorary Membership. When you are made an honorary member of another
mess, write and thank the officers of that mess in the following form "Lt Ali, Battalion,
The Regiment. Thanks Lt Col Javed and the officers 86th Field Regiment for their kind
invitation to consider himself as an honorary member of their mess, a privilege of which
he will have much pleasure in availing himself".
39. Guest Rooms. Almost every mess has few guest rooms, which are kept and
maintained by the mess. The rules for these are as under:- a. Priority for allotment of
these guest rooms will be given to serving officers of other stations, especially those
who are on official duty. b. Retired Army officers are not permitted to be members of a
mess. However, they may be provided accommodation as welfare measure only when
the same is not required by serving officers. c. No complimentary fruit baskets or
eatable are to be placed in the guest rooms. Remember an officer always pays for
whatever he consumes in a mess.
40. Gifts / Souvenirs / Presents and Compliments. a Presenting gift to seniors
/juniors against customs of service. b. Officers are not supposed to make to a superior
officer on his posting or otherwise. an officer will not allow himself to be presented a gift
by officers or soldiers who are serving or have served under his command. c. Shields
presented to on their posting or retirement are purchased out of their own contributions
for this purpose. No one other than the one who receives it, pays for it. d. Officers and
soldiers on duty or course in foreign countries or otherwise should discreetly avoid
accepting gifts, presents etc from the heads or representatives of foreign states or
delegation e. Defence Attaches and other officers serving abroad are advised that they
are not expected to give presents to visiting senior officers. f. Expensive gifts received, if

RESTD
 167
RESTD

any, by officers will be reported to Personnel Services Directorate, General

Headquarters, as soon as possible, for disposal orders. g. Policy on gifts is contained in
Army Regulations (Rules) 1986 and other relevant instructions issued by Personnel
Services Directorate, General Headquarters. h. Presenting to senior officers. It is the
privilege of senior officers to give a gift or memento to a junior officer. Junior officer is
not supposed to offer a gift or personal memento to a senior officer as the intention of
such a gesture can be misconstrued. Junior officers must strictly avoid this. However,
as a collective gesture a unit or a group of may present a or some such memento to a
senior officer to express their reverence and veneration for him. Commanders and Staff
Officers senior levels must actively discourage and when necessary forbid junior officers
from presenting bouquets, cakes and other gifts to senior officers.
41. Some Old Mess Customs Ladies are not discussed in the Mess, nor their
names are mentioned. Drawing a sword or a dagger or taking of firearms, or uncased
pistols or revolvers is forbidden inside the mess buildings. One of the oldest traditions
prohibits discussion of personal matters the At time s this be unavoidable, but limit such
conversation to the minimum. .Officers do not bet. Card games with stakes are NOT
permitted. Magazines, newspapers or books should not be taken to the dinner table nor
should these be read in any part of the mess during a mess function. Keeping petsldogs
in is not encouraged. If you have a dog or a pet, ensure that it does not enter the mess
or another BOQ. And also that others have no cause for objection on this account. DO
NOT visit the mess during working hours unless you are on the sick list or returning
from or going on leave. Mess may not be in a presentable shape and staff busy in
cleaning and maintenance. Never invite a guest to dine without first seeking the
permission of the Mess Ladies are normally not allowed to visit They should also not
visit a mess except for organised However, if they visit, such visits should be in the
knowledge of President Mess Committee and be restricted to ladies rooms Headgears
will not be worn inside the mess. Belts should also be removed before taking meals,
except for breakfast when it is traditionally permitted. An officer who enters the mess
improperly dressed should be required to pay for light drinks for all officers who are
present in the mess besides changing into proper dress before being entertained in the
mess. Conversation in the mess should be confined to one language at a time, either

RESTD
 168
RESTD

English or Urdu with which all present there are supposed to be familiar. Loud noise and
hilarity must be avoided. It is bad manners. Seat vacated temporarily by any officer
should not be occupied. Noisy-behaviour, ragging, clinking of glasses must be avoided.
Avoid forming cliques, they kill the family spirit in a Mess. Menus of formal
lunchesldinners are customarily kept simple. No female artists be allowed to perform in
messes. Normally wedding are not held in the messes. In exceptional cases where
there are no garrison or services clubs in a station, the Valima etc of own or a of an
officer may be held in a mess, if permitted by Formation Commander. This should not in
any case cause inconvenience to the regular dining members.

RESTD
 169
RESTD

CHAPTER 4
SOCIABILITY AND MANNERS
42. On Marriage. When an officer gets married in an Army family, his wife is
already accustomed and familiar with this life style. There is no adjustment required.
However, where the lady marrying an Army officer is from a different social background,
some sort of guidance is considered necessary. Accordingly this chapter of sociability
has been added in this pamphlet.
43. Induction of Married Couple in Unit Life. On marriage, officers must
enlighten their brides about following:- a. Army way of etc. b. Way of Army life. c. How
to dress up while attending mixed gatherings/ functions. d. How to entertain guests. e.
The tradition of calling (see chapter on Calling). f. Decorum to be maintained.
44. Newly wed ladies in the unit family are welcomed by arranging a dinner in the
honour of the couple as soon as they arrive in a station.
45. It is always convenient to request wife of another officer to guide and escort the
bride immediately on arrival for the function.
46. If need be. the bride should be introduced to the wife of the Commanding Offr /
Comd.
47. Keeping in view the traditions and convenience of the family, the bride should be
introduced by the wife of Commanding Officer1 Commander to others present.
48. After the dinner, the couple is presented a gift from as per the tradition of
individual units. One collective present may be offered to the officer on his marriage. It
should be contributed by all officers. Other ranks will not contribute.
49. After the dinner, the couple is not detained for long duration. They are of course,
first to leave.

RESTD
 170
RESTD

50. Marriage in Pakistan or Abroad. Marriage with Foreign Nationals, other than
Indians is forbidden. Rules on the subject are contained in Army Regulations (Rules)
603-604 A. Government orders regarding marriage of officers are published from time to
time in various books of Rules and Regulations.

CHAPTER 5
FINANCIAL MATTERS
51. Cheques. An officer never writes a cheque for more than what he has in his
bank. A dishonoured cheque is a disgrace and a serious offence. Never on any account
issue or sign a blank cheque. Always foolproof arrangements with your bankers before
issuing an cheque.
52. Accounts a.Soon on arrival in a station, open an account with some good bank
and intimate all concerned. b.On posting out of a station, remember not to close your
account in the bank of previous station till you start receiving your salary in the bank
account of new station. c. Keep your cheque books under lock key. Do not forget to fill
in the counterfoils of your cheques. These afford an excellent means of keeping a
running balance. d. When the bank sends you statement of account, once a month, see
that it agrees with your counterfoils and accounts.
53. Receipts. Always acknowledge the receipt of money, no matter from whom it
comes, you are only covering yourself. Answer letters about money matters promptly
and keep your receipts.
54. Financial Responsibility a. Remember that you are responsible for public
money, stores, if placed under your charge and are liable to make good any losses
incurred due to your neglect. b. Remember to keep yourself abreast with of account
keeping. Must study pamphlet on Prevention of Fraud.
55. Subscriptions and Other Bills. Pay your mess bill, all your subscriptions and all
other bills punctually. If a routine bill has not been received. ask for it. Slackness in this
will cause embarrassment.

RESTD
 171
RESTD

56. Economical Living Regulate your expenditure in order to live within your
means. If you find yourself to be hard pressed, do not hesitate to consult your seniors
and Commanding Officer. However, borrowing from subordinates in rank is strictly
forbidden. b. Try to be as frugal as possible, without impairing the standard of living you
are expected to maintain. Avoid smoking and if already used to it, reduce it or even give
it up if you can. As a junior officer, do not keep a car unless you really require it and you
can afford to keep one. c. Do not indulge in luxuries. Entertainment should be kept to
the minimum. No senior officer expects you to entertain him. Competition in this respect
should always be avoided. d. Your small savings, if invested well, will see you through
in difficult times. e. Remain conversant with Housing or other such schemes available in
the Army Life. Become a member of housing scheme as soon as possible.
57. Saving and Investment Acquire the habit of saving every month. Invest in
DSOP fund or government saving schemes. b.Thoroughly check the antecedents of
private finance companies before you invest your savings with them.

RESTD
 172
RESTD

CHAPTER 6
DRESS
58. Uniform is the mark of distinction and a source of pride for soldiers. It is our duty,
therefore, to uphold the traditions associated with this singular honour and ensure that
our conduct is as graceful as the dress we adorn.
59. Acquaint yourself with the Army Dress Regulations and unit orders on working
dress published at the beginning of each season.
60. Some of the current Army dresses are as under: -
a. Working Dress (uniform).
b. Service Dress.
c. Mess Kit (Remember that miniature medals are worn with Mess Kit).
d. National Dress occasions
(1) White with collar and full sleeves and white Shalwar.
(2) Coat of color.
(3) Black shoes with black socks.
(4) Sherwani with collar and full sleeves and Shalwar of white color.
(5) Waist coat collar of white/black/sober color or in any sober color.
(3) shoes with socks.
e. Informal Dress (for Occasion)
(1) Lounge Suit.
(2) full sleeves and Shalwar in any sober color with Waist Coat collar in
any sober color or in any sober color.
(3) Matching with socks.

RESTD
 173
RESTD

f. Casual Dress
(1) Combination Suit.
(2) Safari Suit with full sleeves.
(3) Shirt (white or sober color) trousers and shoes with socks.
Pullovers may be worn during winters.
g. Dress for Functions
(1) Informal dress.
(2) Combination suit with scarf or tie.
(3) Blazer combination with scarf or tie.
(4) Safari Shirt with full sleeves.
(5) Shoes in matching color with socks.
61. Following points however, be noted for strict compliance: a.In Army life, dress is
specified for every occasion. If an officer is wearing authorised dress of correct
specifications, he is properly dressed. b.Coloured socks and unauthorised pattern of
shoes must not be worn with uniform. c. Uniform must be of approved pattern, style and
specification as per Army Dress Regulations. d.Head-dress is always worn when
walking out. driving and travelling in uniform. e. Y ou must possess service kit. Cap
Forage Blue will be worn with service dress when full medals are worn and Khaki Peak
Cap will be with the service dress when only ribbon medals are worn. f i f if military and
helicopter. g. W earing of an unauthorised ring, chain, bracelet or dandy goggles etc on
parade i per.
62. Whereas, it is customary to wear appropriate for functions, on occasions, it would
be wrong for an officer to attend an official function in civvies and it would be equally
wrong for him to wear uniform at purely private functions and parties, specially in clubs.
63. Remember that each regiment or station mess has its own customs and rules.
Find them out and observe them Keep yourself posted with orders on dress from time to
time.
64. Example to he Set a. Look after your personal appearance and do not allow
yourself to put on flab or extra weight. b. Your turnout, bearing, language and
behaviour, both in and out of uniform, must be such as to command the respect of your

RESTD
 174
RESTD

men. Turnout in all dresses including uniform must be smart. Avoid cheap cloth and
cheap tailoring. It will cost you more in the long run.

CHAPTER 7
DEALING WITH OTHER RANKS
65. Relation with Troops. Be fair and firm in your dealings with and OR.
Address them correctly, their military rank followed by their name Havildar Arif and Naib
Subedar Safdar. As a mark of respect for their long service, suffix 'sahib' is used while
addressing a JCO. It is not to be used in official correspondence. to and men in Urdu at
all times and NOT in regional languages.
66. NCO Instructors. When you are being taught by an NCO, remember that he is
in a difficult position and you must assist him by courteous, behavior.
67. Reproof. NEVER reprove an NCO or a JCO or a subordinate officer in the
hearing of his juniors in rank.
68. JCOs and NCOs are the backbone of the Army, but they naturally have their
limitations. Remember that you are a responsible officer, and don't give your JCOs and
NCOs responsibilities which are inequitable. At the same time do not try to do
everything yourself. Share responsibility and assign tasks to your subordinates. They
will commit mistakes but learn quickly.
69. Knowing your Men. Get to know your indivitlually. ---- h i d f il b k d Di i b i i d f
this purpose. There is no better way of doing this, than by and joining in regimental and
sub-unit games and recreations.

RESTD
 175
RESTD

70. Dismissing Troops. It is customary for of a squad etc, to ask permission to dismiss
or march off. When you hear a subordinate say, 'Barkhast Ki hae Sir', stand to attention,
return the salute and reply "Barkhast Karo, please".
71. Attitude Towards Relations or Close Friends Serving in Ranks. One of the most
vexing problems likely to confront you is the question of your attitude towards relations
or close friends in the ranks. If you use your common there should be no difficulty. Old
friendships are valuable and be fostered; at the same time regulations and customs of
must be strictly observed. Tactfully explain to without hurting their feelings. Do NOT be
familiar with them in the lines. It only creates suspicion and of your sub unit / unit.
72. Batmen. Don't use your batmen for menial jobs. Give him duties that are in
keeping with the dignity of a soldier. Read and follow Army Regulations (Instructions) 57
to 576. If you treat your batman well he will be always proud of this association with you.
9 DON'T be sarcastic with subordinates or ridicule them Learn to off", if they so deserve
without mincing your words.
73. Relationship between Officers and Other Ranks 10. DON' T be unnecessarily
free with your NCOs and OR, however, efficient be. Young officers need to exercise
great care when dealing with experienced JCOs and Keep your dignity. Common sense
and understanding on both sides will simplify matters. . DON'T take a JCO or any of the
OR into the Officers' Mess or Bachelor Officers Quarter unless on duty.
74. Avoid indulging in private affairs of your subordinates. Do help them staying
within the rules if they ask for assistance.

RESTD
 176
RESTD

CHAPTER 8
CORRESPONDENCE
(See Staff Duties in Field 1995 -GSP 1620)
75. Private Letters a. W hen you write unofficially to an officer whom you do not
know very well, you address him as "Dear Colonel" in the case of field or general
officers and in case of captains and subalterns. Sign as "Yours sincerely". b. When you
know a general or field officer personally, you may address him as "My dear General" or
"My dear Major" c. I n writing, never address. another officer, whatever his rank. as
"Sir". d. Be very careful to put an officer's correct name and decorations on the
envelope. If in doubt, look it up in the latest "Army List" or Roll of Officers kept in
Adjutant Office.
76. Invitations. An example is as follows:- "Dear Colonel We shall be pleased if you
will accept our invitation to join us at dinner on 6 September at 8 Yours sincerely, Wajid
Khan Dear Khan, I shall be delighted to accept your kind invitation to dinner on 6
September 98 at 8 p.m. Yours sincerely, Thank you very for the kind invitation to
(Dinner) on (Day of week) the .....th of (month) at..........O'clock, which I am delighted to
be able to accept (or I much regret shall be unable to accept owing to Yours sincerely.
Majid c. If Lieutenant Colonel Altaf and officers of 27th Bn, the Sindh Regiment request
the pleasure of your company at dinner. You must reply in the third person:- "Major
Khalid thanks Lieutenant Colonel Altaf and officers, for their kind invitation to dinner at

RESTD
 177
RESTD

8.30 p.m. on Sunday, July, 1998 and has much pleasure in accepting or regrets his
inability to accept due to a previous engagement". "Major Khalid thanks Lieutenant
Colonel Altaf and officers and has pleasure in accepting their kind invitation........etc".
Note. It should be borne in mind that invitation cards are not to be printed in colour with
various designs thereon. The invitation cards must be of a plain and simple type. The
expenses on such items must be cut down to the bare minimum. d. Invitation for
couples should be addressed as "Major and Mrs e. It may not always be necessary to
acknowledge invitation in writing; a telephone call, at times, should suffice. f. While
writing to a retired Army person, the word "retired" be after the name ie, Lieutenant
Colonel Abid Rauf red).
77. Military Correspondence. Details are given in Staff Duties in Field, (GSP-1620).
All officers are expected to be conversant with it. They will always be required to follow
the of military writing in all their correspondence.
78. Signing Blindly. Never sign any official paper put before you unless you
understand its contents and are satisfied that the statements in it are correct, otherwise
you may repent one day.
79. Dating Signatures. Date in your own handwriting everything you sign or initial.
80. Address on Envelope. When you write to an officer, take good care to ensure
that do not miss out his decorations if any. These, if more than one should follow in the
correct order after the name. designation immediately after the name ie, Captain Saeed,
The 68th Battalion The Baloch Regiment.
81. Letter Form of Reply. It is difficult to lay-down hard and as to which form of letters
should be used, but common sense and the above general rules will usually serve as a
fair guide. It is nearly always correct to reply to a letter in the same form as the original
letter.
82. Service matters are not discussed in private correspondence.
83. Adverse criticism of junior or senior officers should be avoided in private
correspondence.
84. to gain a personal advantage by writing a private letter on an official matter to a
friend or relative who may hold high rank or be in a position of authority is Not only
inappropriate, expressly forbidden. Violation can make you liable for disciplinary action.

RESTD
 178
RESTD

CHAPTER 9
CALLING
85. General a. 'Calling on' is an old social custom which ensured that members of
the garrison or community remained in contact with each other. However, over a period
of time, a new culture is in the Army where junior officers carry some etc when calling
on senior officers. It is quite understandable that the officers do this out of love and
veneration for their senior colleagues on account of their close association with them.
However, for the senior officer it is a difficult situation - if he accepts it then it is improper
and against the Customs of Service and if he returns it bluntly then it is an
embarrassment for the junior officer. Normally senior officers overcome the problem by
reciprocating at a later stage. In some cases senior officers have to pay for costly gifts
to save the embarrassment to the officer of taking back the gift. There is a need to bring
an end to this culture. Desist from offering any etc. to senior officers and thereby avoid
mutual embarrassment b. On your first arrival, find out from the Adjutant whether calling
on is done at the new station or not. Guidelines given in the succeeding paragraphs will
facilitate your discharge of this obligation.
86. Visiting Cards and Name Boards. Visiting Cards and Names Board should not
have titles, decorations or academic degrees except and not be printed in multi colours
or with various designs except for monogram or stripes of colour etc. You must have
enpraved (NOT printed) visiting cards the size of 3 x 3% inches, or 7% x 4 cm. No
abbreviations should be used; name of the officer as well as of unit or corps should be

RESTD
 179
RESTD

written in full. Old English' or 'Block' lettering is incorrect. Following is an example:-

Visiting Card Name Board Business Cards may, however, be as complete as
considered necessary. Note:- The visiting cards should be printed by copper plate
method and not by ordinary type method. They must be of plain white ivory paper with
proper corners. Gold edged rounded corners, or any other fancy designs should NOT
be used, as this would NOT be in good taste. Regimental crests are not to be printed on
these cards.
87. Whom to Call on. a. On arrival at the station of duty, you should call on your
own messes and others in consultation with the Commanding Officer. Calling on special
occasions like etc, is preferable. Married officer's residences should be visited, properly
dressed after fixing call before hand. Do inform the concerned officer well in time if you
have to change your programme due to some unforeseen commitments. 4 cm Lt Col
Med Specialist Sheikh, MBBS, FRCS Captain Asghar Khan (I I Baloch Regiment)
Optional b. at the houses of senior officers Visitor's Book is often kept. You must make
a point to go and sign it when such persons.
88. Calling on Messes. When calling on a mess, if Visitors Book has been
provided. enter your in it, otherwise, leave a card. Write along the top of "Lieutenant
Colonel Akhtar Commanding Officer 35th Battalion The Frontier Force Regiment," and
on the other:- "The Officers, 35th Battalion The Frontier Force Regiment,"
89. Calling when Attached. When you are attached with another unit for or while
course, call on the commanding officer and your commander, if they are married. There
is no necessity of calling on all married officers of the unit. Leave two cards as above in
the mess, both on arrival and departure.
90. When you visit a married officer's house and he is not present, leave the visiting
card
91. Return Call. Once somebody has called on you, you must return call.
92. When depart from a station, call on people and messes you have called on
previously.

RESTD
 180
RESTD

CHAPTER 10
MAN MANAGEMENT
93. General. Man management is an important facet of good leadership. It embraces
all aspects of the regimental life; like discipline billeting, feeding arrangements, pay and
allowances, issue and maintenance of dresses, promotions, sports and recreation.
Unless an officer is thoroughly trained in basic science, he will neither lead men
successfully in battle, nor will he make a good staff officer or administrator. For this
purpose all junior and newly commissioned officers are advised to read the pamphlet
titled 'Man Management' issued by the General Headquarters.
94. Leadership a. Actions speak louder than words. Always give personal example
wherever feasible. b. Never ask an average OR to do more than what you can do
yourself. c. Be patient while training your command d. Listen to complaints with
sympathy and impartiality be fair in your judgement.
95. Welfare and Morale a.Remember to take keen interest in the welfare of your
and OR. Do whatever you can to assist them in solving their domestic problems. This
will raise their morale and will develop their confidence and trust in you as their leader.
Be conversant with the current orders regarding their pay, leave, release and
resettlement. b. R esentment can arise due to of leave, faulty Part 11 allowances All
officers must ensure that their men's entitlements are promptly and correctly published
in Part Orders and adjusted in the accounts of the individuals by the Unit Military
Accounts. Any obser - vations raised by the men must be looked into. c. Take personal
interest in family welfare, like medical care and education of children. Some Other

RESTD
 181
RESTD

Ranks are married for periods. Their children are not entertained by regular schools.
Consult Second-inof your unit to ensure that they do not suffer on this account. Funds
for these purposes have to be found from the Army Central Welfare Fund and unit
contributions. Each military station has a number of Troops Welfare Centres and
Garrison Medical Complexes. Encourage your subordinates to ask their families to
benefit from these centres. In case of a serious family problem, do discuss the same
with the unit elders. d.Remain conversant with the instructions issued from time to time
regarding welfare of troops and their families and try to help them, as far as possible. e.
d urbars are effective means of communicating to place their difficulties before their f. I
n Bara the officers should mix up with the Jawans. It is preferable to have same and
tables for officers and men. g. Encourage the sick to report to MI Room. Keep an eye on
malingerers and take remedial actions.
96. Have your own meals only when you are satisfied in your mind, that those you
are responsible for are properly fed.
97. Read about human psychology. It will help you understand your men.

RESTD
 182
RESTD

CHAPTER 11
DO’S / DON’T
98. DO offer your prayers regularly.
99. DO read Quran every day with translation. This is very important to understand
religion in its true perspective.
100. DO fulfil your obligations towards your parents.
101. DO help the needy amongst without giving it publicity.
102. DO visit patients in CMH even when you are not acting as duty officer.
Your Duty towards Others
103. DON'T permit to be unduly aggressive or overbearing towards the rank and file;
insist on leadership based on mutual respect.
104. DON'T forget confidence comes with experience and knowledge. The latter must
be acquired through own efforts. Army will provide you ample opportunity to build up
experience.
105. DON'T desert your subordinates the moment the day's work is over. Take
interest in their entertainment, and "off-duty" chores.
106. DON'T forget that a house divided from within will come to grief. Be loyal to your
unit and CO in thoughts, words and deeds.
107. DON'T demean the efforts of your subordinates in front of others. You have all
the authority and means to make them produce better results.
Your Personal Efficiency

RESTD
 183
RESTD

108. DON'T shy away from taking a decision provided it is well considered and is in
best interest of service.
Your Uniform
109. DON'T slouch when in uniform; maintain a dignified posture.
How to use your Authority
110. DON'T ever lose your temper; it may result in unreasonable acts or utterances.
111. DON'T be pompous, and do not adopt a bullying attitude or shout when there is
no reason for it. Orders can very well be communicated in a quiet but firm manner.
112. DON'T use foul language against subordinates. It is a cowardly act as they
cannot talk back in the same coin.
113. DON'T be a nagging boss. Cultivate the art of short and sharp criticism should
the occasion so demands.
114. DON'T find fault unnecessarily, but do not hesitate to tick off when the occasion
so demands.
115. DON'T fail to tick off your subordinates if you hear them speaking disrespectfully
of superior officers.
116. DON'T give vague orders. They must be clear and lucid, whether oral or written.
117. DON'T forget that all your orders must be "Lawful" orders.
Your Behavior and Personal Example for Others
118. DON'T seek cheap popularity with other ranks by encouraging contempt for
authority and strict discipline; you will soon lose their respect. Disposal of Offenders.
119. DON'T forget that career of your subordinates can be seriously damaged by a
mistake on your part. Be correct in all your dealings with offenders, and above all be
just.
120. DON'T punish a first time offender of a minor nature. You may admonish him.
121. DON'T forget to inform an offender whom you have decided to punish that you
are doing so for three reasons:- a.Because he deserves it. b.To deter him from
committing that offence again. c. To deter others from committing a similar offence.

RESTD
 184
RESTD

122. DON'T deny privileges to your subordinates, which the regulations permit; allow
all to enjoy them to the full, but immediately withdraw them for a suitable period from
those who abuse them.
123. DON'T place an offender under arrest, either "close" or "open" for a trivial
offence; it is not necessary. You can prefer a charge against him without placing him
under arrest.
124. DON'T use your position to inflict any punishment, which could be termed
"malicious".

Your Correct Conduct in Private Affairs

125. DON'T Service matters with anyone, who is not concerned. That your wife or
relatives.
126. DON'T motor cycle without crash helmet or carry a pillion rider without
127. DON'T hurt ego respect of others. There is always a nice way to correct them.
128. DON'T use antimony and perfumes, hair oils etc.
129. DON'T chew beetles (pan) or chew gums whilst in uniform or in mess. In fact try
to avoid these at all times.
130. D ON'T allow your to grow long. Hair should be properly cut and kept short.
131. DON'T wear watches, chains. bracelets and rings etc during drill ceremonial
parades. In fact these should be avoided at all times.

RESTD
 185
RESTD

GSP – 1989 Health of Tps 1989

CHAPTER – 1
PREVENTABLE DISEASES
SECTION 1 – MALARIA
1. Malaria has always been one of the major factors causing wastage of manpower.
2. Although advancement in insecticides and anti-malaria drugs has effectively
reduced incidence of this disease.
3. The spread of drug/insecticide resistance has again resulted in worldwide
increase
in mortality and morbidity due to malaria.
4. An incidence of four or more fresh malaria cases per 1000 personnel per month,
is an indication of failure of anti-malaria discipline and control measures.
5. All cantonments, military installations, training areas, and camps situated at an
altitude of 7000 feet and above will be considered non-malarious.
6. In malarious areas, the malaria season will be observed from 15 March to 15
November.
7. These dates may be varied upto four weeks on the advice of Local SEMO
(Senior

RESTD
 186
RESTD

Executive Medical Officer).

8. As Malaria tends to occur throughout the year it would be advisable to observe
the
anti-malarial measures throughout the year.
9. Chemoprophylaxis. Chemoprophylaxis will be applied only in special situations
like
war or exercise in a highly malarious area. Permission of Surgeon General/DGMS(IS)
will be obtained for this purpose.
10. Officer Commanding Stations. will be responsible for
11. Arrange training of unit anti-malaria squads and unit sanitary noncommissioned
officers at Station Health Organization.
12. All conservancy arrangements for military personnel in non-cantonment military
stations will be made by local military authority concerned.
13. Station Health Organization (SHO)
14. To carry out health education through posters, pamphlets and hand outs.
15. There are four types of establishment of SHO (i.e. Special Large, Large, Medium
and Small) which are authorized according to the size of cantonment and are of the
strength of 41,26,18 and 10 personnel respectively.
16. Additional manpower is also authorized to each SHO during malaria season).
17. Take anti-larval and anti-adult measures against flies and mosquitoes in a
cantonment area and half mile around it.
18. Identify mosquito species
19. An anti malaria committee will be formed at all stations, camps and cantonments.
20. Committee will be presided over by Station/Camp Commander.
21. Commanding officers will be personally responsible for all anti-malaria measures
within their respective unit areas.
22. They will be assisted by an anti-malaria officer (not the Medical Officer).
23. Up to 100 persons - 4 men and 1 Non Commissioned Officer
24. Up to 500 persons - 6 men and 1 Non Commissioned Officer
25. Up to 1000 persons - 8 men and 1 Non Commissioned Officer
26. 1000 or above - 10 men and 1 Non Commissioned Officer
27. Military camps, if possible should be sited at a distance, not less than half a mile,
from major breeding places of mosquitoes and local in habitations.

RESTD
 187
RESTD

28. Knock Down Insecticide. Permethrin Oil Spray

29. Residual Insecticide. Delta Methrin Wetable Powder (45 gm in 10 liters of water)
should be sprayed on walls/ceilings.
30. Mosquito Repellent Mats (Allethrin Compound).
31. Dry Day. Once a week all water collections, except tanks/reservoirs for fire
fighting and fish breeding, will be emptied and kept dry for 2-3 hours.
32. The dry day will be published in station orders.
33. Spray on Breeding Places. Malarial or Baytex Granules, (2% or 5%) will
be sprayed once a week on the actual/potential breeding places.
34. Use of mosquito net is one of the most effective personal protective measures. It
should be used from dusk to dawn by all ranks in bed.
35. Swimming is prohibited between dusk and down.
36. Suppressive treatment may be resorted to when anti- malaria precautions cannot
be undertaken due to official commitments, training exercises etc. It will be
enforced by the formation commanders upon the advice of DDMS Log
Area/ADMS Div.
37. After return from endemic area the suppressive treatment will be continued up to
4 weeks.
38. Although malarial parasites i.e. plasmodium vivax, plasmodium ovale and
plasmodium malaria remain sensitive to chloroquine worldwide but areas with
transmission of plasmodium falciparum, resistant to chloroquine are expanding.
39. The drug for “Chloroquine Sensitive” malaria prophylaxis is chloroquine in a
weekly dose of 300 mg . Drugs for “Chloroquine Resistant” falciparum infections
is chloroquine of weekly 300 mg base + proguanil daily200 mg.
40. Vibramycin of 100 mg daily can be used as an alternative for limited periods i.e
up to 3 months.
41. Suppressive treatment will be resorted to under extra-ordinary circumstances.
42. During training exercises/manoeuvers in malaria season, special attention will be
paid to personal protective measures and anti-adult mosquito measures.
43. Anti-malaria discipline, like any other form of discipline, is inculcated by training
and motivation.

RESTD
 188
RESTD

44. Demonstrations must be arranged to show correct method of using mosquito net,
protective clothing and repellent oil.
45. SHO provides skilled labour to initiate sanitary measures and provide standard
pattern of appliances for instruction and guidance of regimental sanitary
personnel.
46. Training of unit sanitary and malaria squads is carried out by SHOs in every
cantonment.
47. Before the start of malaria season, SHO will organize a refresher course of at
least 2 weeks duration on Malaria.
48. SHO will also organize special cour888ses on Malaria, Hygiene and Sanitation
on the advice of GHQ where considered necessary.
SECTION 2 – INFECTIOUS DISEASES
49. As soon as a case of infectious disease is clinically diagnosed it should
immediately be notified on PAFM-1325 without waiting for confirmatory
laboratory report by the medical officer Incharge of the case.
50. The occurrence of following diseases will be notified by the medical authorities
immediately on PAFM-1325 giving the diagnosis.
51. Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome (SARS)
52. The occurrence of Cholera or Yellow Fever will be notified by telegram, in
addition to PAFM-1325, giving following information:-
53. PAFM-1325 will be prepared by the Medical Officer Incharge of the case in
collaboration with the Medical Officer Incharge of the unit and will be submitted to
officer Incharge hospital.
54. When any infectious or epidemic disease occurs within a few days of the date of
movement in a unit under orders to sail or to supply drafts to sail, a telegraphic
report will be sent by the Officer Commanding Station or troops to the AG, the
QMG, the DMS and the Embarkation Commandant.
55. The Officer Commanding station or troops is the authority responsible for
sending the telegraphic report laid down in instruction 185 of Regulations for
Medical Services of Armed Forces Volume II 1978 but in cases where delay is
likely to occur he may delegate this duty to the OC hospital concerned.

RESTD
 189
RESTD

56. The OC station or OC troops will instruct all concerned to take necessary
measures against spread of Infectious disease and will arrange, if necessary, for
the exercise of the power given under section 150-170 of the Cantonment Act
1924 for dealing with outbreaks of infectious disease.
57. In all cases of communicable diseases, following should be disinfected:-
58. The patient’s discharges and the bedding, clothing, feeding utensils, etc, used by
the patient while under treatment. This is called concurrent disinfection”.
59. On recovery or in case of death of the patient, the ward or room in which the
patient was treated and its contents is called “terminal disinfection.
SECTION 3 - VIRAL HEPATITIS
60. Hepatitis A and E viruses spread through contaminated food and water and
cause only acute disease and do not become chronic.
61. Hepatitis B and C are transmitted through injections or sexual contact and may
become chronic.
62. Hepatitis D also occurs through injections but infects only those already infected
by hepatitis B.
63. Hepatitis A and E are characterized by fever and jaundice appearing about 2-6
weeks after exposure to the infection.
64. The affected individuals may be incapacitated for 2 to 3 months before complete
recovery occurs.
65. Hepatitis A&E viruses enter human body through hands soiled with faecal matter
or contaminated food and water.
66. Any person who has suffered from Viral Hepatitis will not be employed in cook
house or kitchen till at least three months after discharge from the hospital.
67. Earth will not be used for cleaning of utensils.
Hepatitis B and C
68. These viruses spread through blood transfusion, reuse of contaminated syringes,
needle pricks, sexual contact, invasive procedures with unstrilized instruments
and from infected mothers to new born babies (verticle transmission).
69. Hepatitis B more commonly results in Acute Hepatitis developing 6 weeks to
6 months after the exposure to infection.

RESTD
 190
RESTD

70. In adults more than 90% recover completely.

71. A small percentage may develop Acute Fulminant Hepatitis leading to hepatic
failure. About
72. 5% of adults may develop chronic infection leading to liver Cirrhosis or Cancer.
Hepatitis C is more likely to be chronic. More than 50% of those infected may
develop chronic disease leading to liver Cirrhosis or Cancer.
73. About 5-10% of population of our country is infected with Hepatitis B or C.
SECTION 4 - EXCREMENTAL DISEASES
74. Excremental diseases are those in which infective agents are passed in the
intestinal discharges of infected persons and are spread by the ingestion of
infected material by healthy individuals.
75. This group includes Typhoid and Para Typhoid (A, B and C) Fevers which are
bacterial infections characterised in their typical form by continuous fever.
76. Personnel who have suffered from enteric fever will not be employed as cooks
or in the kitchen for at least three months after their discharge from hospital.
77. The disease is of two types which are discussed below:-
a. Bacillary Dysentery
b. Amoebic Dysentery
78. It is an acute infection of bowel, which is characterised by frequent passage of
loose stools containing blood, pus and mucus accompanied by abdominal
cramps, tenesmus, malaise and fever.
79. Diarrhoea is frequently the precursor of dysentery.
80. Group of cases of Acute Diarrhoeal Disorder from same area should always be
reported to the medical authority at once even in absence of exact identification
of the disease.
SECTION 5 - TYPHUS AND RELAPSING FEVERS MEASURES OF CONTROL
81. There are four types of Typhus Fever depending upon the vector which transmits
the disease.
82. Scrub Typhus is transmitted by larvae of certain species of mites known as
chiggers.

RESTD
 191
RESTD

83. Rodenticides form an important factor in the control of Scrub Typhus and may be
used under strict medical supervision.
84. Administer 200 milligram of Doxycycline (Vibramycin) once a week for a period
not exceeding 6 weeks.
85. There are two types of ticks (hard and soft) which act as vectors of Typhus and
Relapsing Fever respectively i.e. hard ticks transmit Tick Typhus and soft ticks
transmit Relapsing Fever.
86. Charpoys (Beds) locally made are dangerous as they may harbour ticks.
87. Sleeping or sitting on the ground during the hours of darkness is dangerous and
should be avoided.
88. Body louse is the chief transmitter of Epidemic Typhus Fever.
89. Body heat is the ideal temperature for the development of louse.
90. It always leaves the body of febrile patient and seeks a new host.
91. Those found to have louse infestation should be immediately deloused with 0.5%
permethrin powder.
SECTION 6 - DISEASES TRANSMITTED BY SANDFLY
92. Sandflies are small insects, smaller than mosquitoes and can easily pass through
ordinary mosquito nets.
93. In Pakistan they are mostly found in Baluchistan, small pockets are also present
in places of NWFP, Northern areas and AJK.
94. Sandfly belt exists from Lasbella to Sibi-Khuzdar area and Mastung to Quetta,
Bostan, Zhob and beyond, involving both the urban and rural areas.
95. Sandflies are generally confined to within 45 meters of their breeding places.
96. This is an acute fever of 3-5 days duration with high temperature, headache, pain
on moving the eyes, redness of eyes, pain in the legs and back and malaise.
97. It may be complicated by Aseptic Meningitis in about 12% of cases.
98. The incubation period in man is approximately 3-6 days. The eventual prognosis
is good.
99. The leishmaniasis exists in three well defined clinical forms.
100. The visceral type of the disease caused by Leishmania Donovani is called Kala
azar.

RESTD
 192
RESTD

101. The cutaneous type is called the Oriental Sore caused by Leishmania tropica
and the Muco-Cutaneous Leishmaniasis, caused by Leishmania Brasiliense.
102. Kala-azar. Visceral Leishmaniasis or Kala-azar is characterized by chronicity,
irregular fever, enlargement of the spleen and liver, emaciation, anaemia,
enlarged lymph nodes, hyperpigmented nodules on the skin, and high mortality.
103. The disease mainly attacks children, infants and neonates. The infection has
rarely been reported in Pakistan and is not a problem in Armed Forces.
104. Cutaneous Leishmaniasis gained importance in the Armed Forces due to high
incidence amongst the troops in certain endemic areas of Baluchistan.
105. Oriental Sore is known by many local names i.e. Baghdad Sore, Lahore Sore,
Delhi Sore, and is prevalent in Pakistan.
106. The endemic areas are Baluchistan and N.W.F.P. The characteristic lesion is
initiated as a granular nodule, which ruptures into open indolent ulcer usually on
the exposed parts of the body i.e face, hands and legs.
107. The lesion may remain localized and after a year or more may heal permanently
leaving disfiguring scar.
108. It is caused by a parasite, Leishmania Tropica and is transmitted by certain
species of sandflies.
109. The sandflies become infective to man several days after a blood meal. The
reservoir of infection are rodents and dogs.
110. Muco-cutaneous Leishmaniasis. This form of Leishmaniasis is prevalent in South
America. The disease does not exist in Pakistan.
111. Removal of all collections of rubbish, decaying vegetable matter and other
organic matter from within 200 meters of the camp area.
112. Permethrin oil 1% should be applied on the exposed parts of body, when on night
duty in the endemic areas of Baluchistan and NWFP from July to October.
113. Sandfly Net. Provision of sandfly nets (containing 45 meshes to a square inch) to
the troops can afford effective protection against the vector, but involves
enormous cost and is difficult to use under the hot climatic conditions.
SECTION 7 - DENGUE FEVER

RESTD
 193
RESTD

114. Dengue Fever has a world wide tropical/subtropical distribution between 30o
north and 40o south.
115. It is endemic in South-East Asia.
116. Outbreaks of the disease have been reported from Karachi and Hazara divisions.
117. The causative agent, Dengue Virus is transmitted, mainly, by Aedes aegypti
mosquito. The disease develops 2-7 days after the mosquito bite.
118. Treatment is symptomatic and supportive with bed rest, analgesics, antipyretics,
blood and platelet transfusion where indicated.
119. No special therapy is available and a satisfactory vaccine is yet to be developed.
120. Dengue Fever epidemics may involve thousands of cases with attack rates of 75-
80% in the affected communities.
121. The vector mosquito, Aedes aegypti (the black and white stippled mosquito) is
notable for its daytime biting habits.
122. The mosquitoes become infective after feeding on a patient of Dengue Fever
during first 4 days of the illness and then remain infective for life.
SECTION 8 - ACQUIRED IMMUNE DEFICIENCY SYNDROME (AIDS)
123. AIDS is caused by a virus named as Human ImmuneDeficiency Virus (HIV).
124. It is primarily a sexually transmitted disease, and is spreading very rapidly all
around the world.
125. Transmission occurs through body secretions and blood.
126. Sexual intercourse with an infected individual is the most common mode of
transmission.
127. The disease is more common in male homosexuals.
128. Transmission from mother to child can also occur in the uterus, during childbirth,
or through breastfeeding.
129. After entry into the host, the virus may remain dormant for many months to years.
130. Antibodies (HIV serology) is used as a screening test.
131. As there is no definitive curative treatment or vaccine available, avoidance of
exposure to the infection is of prime importance.
132. Avoid sex with those who have multiple sex partners (sexually promiscuous).
SECTION 9 - DENTAL HYGIENE
133. Dental health is an integral part of the general health.

RESTD
 194
RESTD

134. The mouth (Oral Cavity in scientific terminology), is the gateway to the body and,
as the saying goes,” Bad teeth lick joints and catch heart”.
135. The two common dental diseases are Periodontal Disease (Pyorrhoea) and
Caries (Decay).
136. It must be remembered that prevention is better than cure.
137. A dental disease must be properly treated, otherwise reservoirs of infection,
scientifically known as foci of infection, are formed.
Periodontal Disease (Pyorrhoea)
138. This is the disease of supporting tissues of the teeth i.e gums and bone.
139. It is caused by neglect in oral hygiene and imbalance in malocclusion.
140. Tartar gets deposited on the teeth which irritates the gums and causes
inflammation and swelling.
141. Alongwith this the alveolar bone starts getting absorbed due to the inflammatory
process.
142. The only treatment at this stage is extraction.
143. Lactic acid is produced during this breakdown.
144. Lactic acid so produced in the oral cavity dissolves the normal compliment of
calcium of teeth.
SECTION 10 - SKIN INFECTIONS
145. Any tendency on the part of soldiers to keep long hair should be discouraged
because it predisposes to seborrhoea, which, apart from being a chronic
nuisance, can lead to other skin diseases.
146. The desirable length of hair is two inches.
147. Feet of every soldier should be inspected twice a month by an officer.

CHAPTER – 4
PREVENTION OF CORONARY (ISCHAEMIC) HEART DISEASE

148. The blood vessels supplying blood to the heart muscle are known as coronary
arteries.
149. Like other arteries these are prone to develop narrowing due to deposition of a
fibro- fatty material along the inside of their walls.

RESTD
 195
RESTD

150. Critical narrowing can result in decreased blood supply to the heart muscle.
151. This is known as Ischaemic Heart Disease (IHD).
152. It can manifest itself as chest pain on exertion (Angina Pectoris), necrosis of a
localized area of the heart muscle (Myocardial Infarction), weakening of the
pumping action of the heart (Congestive Cardiac Failure or CCF), or sudden
death generally resulting from a disturbance of rhythm of cardiac contractions
(Arrhythmia).
153. Coronary Artery Disease was once thought to be the disease of the developed
nations.
154. This may be attributable to change in dietary habits, lack of exercise, smoking
and stressful life style.
155. Coronary Heart Disease has assumed a role of great scourge.
156. Most of the heart attacks and strokes occur suddenly in an apparently healthy
individual in mid or late forties/fifties, when he is more useful to the society.
157. The exact cause of Coronary Heart Disease is not yet known.
158. However, the following contributory factors known as Coronary Heart Disease
Risk Factors, play an important role in the causation of the disease:-
a. Hypertension
b. Raised Serum Cholesterol
c. Smoking
d. Lack of Physical Activities/Exercise.
e. Overweight/Obesity
f. Diabetes Mellitus
g. Personality Type A and Mental Stress Hypertension
159. In adults, a criterion of Systolic Blood Pressure of 160 mm Hg and Diastolic
Blood pressure of 95 mm Hg is used as the upper limit of normal blood pressure.
160. Mild hypertension contributes most to the occurrence of Coronary Heart Disease,
because it is much more prevalent than the severe form.
161. Cholesterol is a constituent of animal fats and oils.
162. There is a clear co-relation between raised blood cholesterol level and the risk of
Coronary Heart Disease.
163. Serum cholesterol of less than 5.2mmol/L is desirable.

RESTD
 196
RESTD

164. The fat consumed should be comprising polyunsaturated fatty acids. The main
source of saturated fatty acids is from dairy products like ghee, butter and cream.
165. The polyunsaturated fat is found in the fats and oils of vegetable origin like corn
oil, soya-bean oil and sunflower seed oil etc.
166. Consumption of moderate amounts of high fibre carbohydrates, fruit and
vegetable is also likely to have a favourable effect on the lipid profile.
Smoking
167. Of the different types of smoking, cigarette smoking is more hazardous than
others to human health.
168. Smoking which is an important Coronary Heart Disease Risk Factor, is quite
prevalent in our society including the Armed Force personnel.
169. 'Passive Smokers' or people sitting around a smoker also share the harmful
effects of tobacco smoking.
170. In addition to the enhanced risk of IHD, smokers have much higher incidence of
Lung Cancer and other Respiratory Diseases as compared to non-smokers.
171. Motivating troops to stop smoking is one of the best welfare measures.
172. There is growing evidence that lack of exercise contributes to the development of
Coronary Heart Disease.
173. It is an established fact that those undertaking vigorous exercise such as jogging,
running, cycling or swimming have about one third the incidence of the IHD as
compared with those who have no physical activity and lead a sedentary life.
174. Regular exercise improves heart and lung functions and exercise tolerance.
175. All forms of aerobic exercises like brisk walking, jogging, swimming or cycling are
beneficial in prevention of Coronary Heart Disease. Isometric exercises like
weight lifting and body building are not recommended.
176. All individuals above the age of 40 years should start the exercise gradually
limiting to brisk walking for many weeks before starting to jog.
177. Individuals whose weight is 20 percent more than their ideal body weight are
considered as overweight and those who are 30 percent above, fall in the
category of obese.

RESTD
 197
RESTD

178. Overweight and obesity are closely associated with increased level of blood
pressure and serum cholesterol.
179. Individuals who are overweight have a twofold increase in risk of a major IHD
event.
180. In the Armed Forces, there should always be stress to keep oneself to the ideal
weight.
181. If Diabetes Mellitus is kept under good control and regular exercise is taken, diet
is kept low in fat etc, smoking is avoided, the incidence of Coronary Heart
Disease is reduced.
182. Genetic counseling to avoid marriage of two known diabetics or with strong
family history of Diabetes, should also be considered where feasible.
183. The type A personality is one involved in intense striving for achievement,
competitiveness, aggressiveness and impatience.
184. Although it is difficult to change personality traits, yet one can reduce the stress
in life to a reasonable level through counseling and self-training regarding
avoidance of stress.
185. Learn to relax. Nothing is so good or bad as thinking makes it.
186. Don't create enemies, if you can't make friends.
187. Note: - Happiness is the reward of being healthy and active.
Ser Nomenclature Uses Scale of Issue Per 1000
Men Per Month
1. Permethrin Oil Knock down a. Md offfr Accn 4 lits per
Spray perfumed/ insecticide against month per bungalow
unperfumed mosquitoes, flies, lice, b. Md JCOs/OR 2 lits per
insecticide ready to bed bugs, sand flies, month
use, containing fleas, fites, ticks and c. Single Accn 200 mili
ultra safe cockroaches etc, To lits per month area
nonresidual be used in closed d. Cantt Area 200 lits per
pyrethroid spaces inside tents square KM per month for
etc. cantt area

2. Permethrin 0.5% Knock down against 25 Kgs per 1000 men per
Powder Crawling insects month
including cockroaches
3. DEET Insect Repellent 25 lits per 1000 men per
against mosquitoes, month

RESTD
 198
RESTD

sand fly, fleas etc

4. Puritab Max Tab For water sterilization 8 tab per man per month
in field
5. Phenyle (White Disinfectant / 175 Lits per 1000 men per
Fluid Disinfectant) Deodorant month

PART I – METHOD OF SPRAYING RESIDUAL INSECTICIDE

SUSPENSION/SOLUTION
188. Spray in a systematic fashion in vertical or horizontal strips, the walls and the
ceiling with the minimum of overlap and no gaps.
189. Hold the nozzle of the spraying apparatus at a distance of 18 inches from the
wall/ceiling.
190. Spray the solution in the space and not on the walls or ceiling.
191. Men employed in handling, preparation or spraying will wear overalls and head
dress while working.
192. Oil solutions will be stored with all fire precautions.
Ser Items General Issue Scale To be
obtained
from
a. PERSONAL One per man Vide PAFO-2790 Dependa
Net Mosquito (Small and Large) nt
and PAFO-2862 Depot
b. Repellent i. Personnel on Night Two ounce bottle Reserve
Mosquito Liquid duty. per man per Supply
(DMP) ii. Training Exercises month Depot
iii. Stationed in Or
uncontrolled areas Six ounces for 100
where the malaria men per night
infection risk is high.
iv. Travelling at night
by rail/road.

RESTD
 199
RESTD

KYE – 2019
CHAPTER 5
INDIAN AFs
Gen
1. Today, India has the 3rd largest army, 4th largest air force and 6th largest navy in
the world.
2. Indian planners are presently conc to bring a qualitative improvement through
modernization and restructuring.
Hist Back gr
3. Ancient and Medieval Pd. From Mahabharat Pd, India has been straddled
with strife and disunity with only brief interludes of peace and cohesion.
4. Str mil sys. Chandar gupta Maurya, Ashoka and Harsha. (Rest disunity and
strife). Its mil weakness made it possible for the Muslims to invade and conquer the
Indian sub-continent.
5. Babar had originated the system of Mansebs and Mughal Army of Horsemen
was divided into inf and arty.
6. Late in mughal pd. Marhatta org a formidable force under Shivaji.
7. Sikhs during zenith. Khalsa army under Ranjeet Singh.
8. It was during British east India company rule that an entirely new chapter in the
Indian mil hist was opened.
9. British Pd. After Indian uprising against British in 1857, the tps of East India
Coy were tfr to British Crown Svc and four Geo-Area Comds were estb, each under a Lt
Gen, in Punjab, Bengal, Madras and Bombay, dir under the viceroy, through British C in
C in India.
10. IA str at the beginning of WW 1 was 155,423.
11. It was soon expended over three times and its str rose to 573,000.

RESTD
 200
RESTD

12. Within two wks of the declaration of war, 3rd (lhr) Div, 7th (Meerut) Div and 4th
(Secunderabad) Cav Bde were despatched to Europe(landed on Marseilles on 25 Sep
1914 and involved in battle of Ypres in Oct 1914).
13. In 1915 when the Suez canal was threatened IA was given resp for ops against
Turkey.
14. During WW1, Indians were, for the first time, made eligible for the Victoria
cross(11).
15. All the offrs during WW1 were british as Indian could rise to RM only.
16. Indian offr cadre started in 1921.
17. Royal Mil College later converted into academy was estb at Dehra Dun in 1922.
18. At the beginning of WW2, the str of IA was 146,750. During WW2 size of Army
inc to 20, 18,196 constitute the largest volunteer army known to hist. At the end of war,
the size was reduced to 2, 50,000.
19. By 1939, there were 400 Indian offrs in the eight Indianized regts of the Army.
20. In WW2, 4500 gallantry awards incl 22 Victoria Cross.
21. In WW2, IA fought with distinction in Africa, the Middle East and Italy but its main
effort was in Burma and Malaya.
22. Partition. Imed after partition the new IA was gp under 8 x Div HQ comprising 22
x inf bdes (incl one para bde and two armr bdes).
23. Indian offrs lacked comd and staff experience, a large no of British offrs (for
comd / advisor) were retained incl three svc chiefs. Gen MacDonalds army chief, rear
admiral savignac hall naval chief, air marshal elmhirst air chief.
24. Army. 17 x tk regts, 18 x Arty regts and 86 x inf regts.
25. Navy. 4 x sloops, 4 trawlers, 2 frigates, 1 carvette and 12 mine sweeper.
26. AF. 1 tpt sqn, 2 indep flts, 7 fighter sqn and 75 ac.
27. In Aug 1947, IA inherited about 200,000 cbts and 200 offrs. 2/3rd went to India
and 1/3rd going to Pakistan.
28. At the time of indep British estb infrastructure for adm, trg, log and def
production. Role of Armed Forces
29. The Primary/ Main role of the AFs is to def the territorial integrity of India from
external aggression/threats. The sec role of the AFs is to provide aid to the civ
auth, whenever req, due to internal problems or natural calamities. IA has been sta
perm in IOK since 1947 and NE states since 1983. Indian AFs have fought 5 wars;
Kashmir War 1947-49, Sino-India War 1962, Indo-Pak Wars of 1965/1971 and Kargil
1999. It captured Junagadh in Nov 1947, Hyderabad in Sep 1948 and invaded Goa
(Portuguese estb) in 1961. It also intervened in Sri-Lanka for CI Ops in 1987 and
quelled Punjab Separatist Mov during late 80s. It is constantly engaged in IOK and
has depl three Corps plus to ctr freedom mov. Kargil 1999 and mil standoff with
Pakistan in 2001-02 and 2008.

RESTD
 201
RESTD

30. LIC. From the early 1950s it has been engaged in quelling insurgents in one
state or the other in NE India. At present as much as 17 seperatist movs are active in
various parts of the India. Op Powen to ctr insur by LTTE in sri lanka, Op Blue Star.
31. Intl peace keeping msns. It is presently involved in a no of peacekeeping msns
in Lebanon, Congo and Sudan.
Def Estb
32. Supreme Comd. President is the Supreme Comd of Indian AF. Mindef is resp
for adm and con of the AFs. Def minister is asst by Minister of State for Def and three
Svc Chiefs. Ministry of def is resp for adm and con of the armed forces.
33. Civ Con. The C-in-C was removed from the first cabinet of indep India and
post was later abolished. The three svc chiefs are under the def minister, who usually is
either a confidant of PM, or a powerful politician.
34. Internal discontment in the Indian armed forces is also due to anomalies in pays,
status, declining opportunities for proms and better opportunities in the corporate world.
35. Composn. Indian AFs consist of Army, Air Force, Navy, Coast Gd, para mil
and SLF. All three svcs have separate Op Comds according to their geo locs and op
tasks/AOR. In addn, there are two Tri- svc comds as well i.e. Strat Forces Comd (SFC)
and Andaman and Nicobar Comd (ANC).

RESTD
 202
RESTD

CHAPTER – 6
INDIAN CONCEPT OF OPS
Gen
36. Indian cold start doctrine owes its genesis to the NATO Cold Start Doctrine being
taught at the Royal British Army Staff College Camberley, UK. (Brig Subhash Kapila
who attended course in 1971).
37. Integ gp lvl 3
a. Highest Cbt Gp and Cbt Comd(Div or Bde).
b. Lowest Cbt Team.
c. Gp are task oriented, composed of armr and inf elms with intg Ahs of the
Army Avn and Air Force. Comd and Con hels are also made aval.
38. Cold Start Doctrine for IA
a. Cold start doctrine on 28 Apr 2004.
b. Lessons of Kargil War(op Vijay 1999) rft by Op PRAKARAM in 2001-2002
lead to concept.
c. Op PRAKARAM lead by COAS Gen S Padmanabhan.
39. India had resorted to full mob and aggressive assys as part of coercive mil strat
during Op PARAKARAM. India had to de-escalated without maj gains due to intl
intervention and nuc factor.
40. Constraints were: -
a. Pol
i. Intl community sensitive due to neg impact on regional stability and
nuc exch.
ii. Defiant pak as hurdle in achievement of strat objs.India could not
apply her full mil potentials against Pakistan due to nuc factor.

RESTD
 203
RESTD

CHAPETR – 7
IA
Sec-1 Overview
Gen
41. IA is the 3rd largest standing army in the world. 10 of its 14 Corps (incl 3
strike corps) are poised exclusively against Pakistan, while only 3 depl in NE.
42. It also has potent strat res.
43. The IA is pursuing an ambitious modernization progm to achieve net centric caps
through: -
a. B Fd transparency.
b. Responsive decision making.
c. Real time tgt acqn.
d. Massed long rg precision engagement.

Org
44. IA comprises Reg Army, the Army Res and the Territorial Army.
45. COAS is resp to President through Central Govt for comd, discp, rect, trg, org,
adm and prep for war.
46. Army HQ. As the Army HQ in New Delhi, the COAS is asst by a VCOAS and
7 other PSOs incl 5x DCOASs, MS and E-in-C. The staff at Army HQ is divided
into GS Branch, AG’s Branch, QMG Branch, the MGO’s Branch, MS Branch and
E-in-C Branch. Army HQ con the IA which consists of six op and one trg comd.
as under: -
a. Northern Comd (NC) – Udhampur
b. Western Comd (WC) – Chandimandar
c. South Western Comd (SWC) – Jaipur
d. Southern Comd (SC) – Pune
e. Central Comd (CC) – Lucknow
f. Eastern Comd (EC) – Calcutta
g. Army Trg Comd (ARTRAC) – Simla
h. Tri svc comd
(1) Strat Force Comd - New Delhi
(2) ANC - Port Blair

RESTD
 204
RESTD

47. The AOR of each Comd HQ is indicated by its loc. The Comd bdrys and the no of
tps under each Comd depend on the msn asg during war and peace.
48. Each Comd is under a GOC-in-C, who holds the rank of Lt Gen. GOC of an Op
Comd is comd of geo area and has both fd and static fmns under his comd.

Fd/Static Fmns
49. The fd fmns incl Comd, Corps, Divs and Indep Bdes.
50. Maj static fmns incl Areas, Indep Sub Areas, and Sub Areas. An Area is comd by
a Maj Gen and Sub Area by a Brig.
Def Plan Formulation
51. Def plan formulation in India started after 1962 Indo-China war.
52. On the recommendation of Gp of Minister based on Kargil Review Cte
report,prac of 15 yrs Long Term integ Perspective Plan commenced in 2001. Pune
Chandi mandar Calcutta Jaipur Udhampur Lakhnow.
Def Exp
53. India is spending huge amount on def purchases and is vigourously pursuing def
plan 07-12, focused on enhancing NCW cap, NBC prot, mech / mob, fire power, surv
and ni fighting cap.
54. SIPRI has rated India as world’s 2nd largest arms buyer.
55. Successful completion of India’s ongoing 12 th Plan (2012-2017) will facilitate
India’s ambitious mil modernization plan.
Reorg/Reconfiguration
56. Reportedly 10th and 11th plan have been completed.
57. 12th plan lays foundation of transformation of IA.
58. Creation of strat comd aimed at optimizing offn efforts against Pakistan by aval/
positioning/ emp of central offn res.
59. Mech / Rapidization
a. Pivot Corp - Rapidization of Def Div and re- configuration of Corps Res.
b. Strike Corps - Mech bde to each Armed Div and conversion of Inf Div into
RAPID(S)
60. Raising of 140 Armd Bde. Raised at Jaipur under 12 RAPID (D)/12
Coprs/ SC.
61. 54 Inf Div (RAMFOR). 54 Inf Div/ 21 Corps/ SC (Reorg Army Multi Task
Force) for readily deployable force for power projection in the region to meet out of area
ctgy.
62. Conversion of 91 Bde into Amph Bde. 91 Inf Bde ex 54 Inf Div of 21 Corps/SC
is being converted into an Amph Bde. India already has an Amph Bde (108 Mtn Bde)
under ANC. This conversion is to provide a readily deployable force, for power
projection in the region.

RESTD
 205
RESTD

63. Air Tpt Bde. 1 (76 inf bde).

64. Rapid Reaction and Depl Cap. Indian AFs are enhancing rapid reaction/depl
cap to enhance mob to deal with sits in a quick timeframe. IA air lift cap (based on
single sorty) is 7706 persons without cbt loads.
65. Induction of Hels. In order to boost heliborne / A tk cap, IA has embarked upon
an ambitious heli- production / acqn progm. The likely future inductions incl fol: -
a. 159 ALH Dhruv (planned indigenous production).
b. 179 lt cbt hels(indigenous).
c. 186 MI-17 V5.
d. 50 MI-17- IV).
e. 22 Apache.
f. 15 Chinook.
g. 197 utility hels.
h. 12 AW-101(VIP and Pers tpt)
66. Spec Forces. As part of their strat to create strat effs through swift/surg
ops by smaller forces; re-orientation of SFs is being carried out for spec tasks incl strat,
op and tac intd, surv of vital tgts and terminal targeting by precision munitions besides
def tasks of denying strat or op assets. Recently conducted SFs jt exs indicate that SFs
units of all 3x svcs are being integrated. Presently an indep para bde (part of army res)
and SF bn(s) in sel corps AOR form part of IA SF.

RESTD
 206
RESTD

Sec-2 ORBAT

Se Force No Details
r

1. Comds 9 6 x Op Comds (SC, SWC, CC, NC, EC, WC) and 1x Trg
Comd ARTRAC, Tri Svc Comd ANC , SFC

2. Corps 14 1,2,3,4,9,10,11,12,14,15,16,17(MSC), 21,33

3. Armd Div 3 1 ex 2 Corps, 31 ex 21 Corps and 33 ex 1 Corps

4. Arty Div 3 40 ex WC and 41 ex SC, 42 SWC

5. RAPID(s) 4 4 ex 1 Corp, 14 ex 2 Corps, 18 ex 10 Corps and 36 ex 21

Corps

6. RAPID(D) 2 12 ex 12 Corps & 24 ex 10 Corps

7. RAMFOR 1 54 Inf Div

8. Inf Div 16 3,5,7,9,10,11,15,16,19,22,23,26,28,29,56 and 71

9. Mtn Div 10 2,5,6,8,17,20,21,27,39,57

10. Comp Arty 3 371 ex 40 Arty Div and 374 ex 41 Arty Div and 375 ex 42 Arty
Bdes Div

11. Engr Bde 4 416 ex CC 471 ex 1 Corps, 474 ex 2 Corps and 475 ex 21
Corps

12. Indep 7 2 ex 9 Corps, 3 ex 9 Corps, 4 ex 12 Corps, 6 ex 10 Corps, 14

Armd Bde ex 1 Corps, 16 ex 2 Corps, 23 ex 11 Corps

13. Indep Arty 2 401 ex 9 Corps and 402 ex 14 Corps

Bde

14. Indep AD 14 611 ex NC, 612 ex 1 Armd Div, 614 ex 31 Armd Div, 615 ex
Bdes 10 Corps, 616 ex 9 Corps, 617 ex SC, 618 ex 4 Corps 619 ex

RESTD
 207
RESTD

15 Corps, 627 ex 33 Armd Div, 715 ex 11 Corps, 769 ex 12

Corps, 785 ex 2 Corps, 786 ex 1 Corps & 787 ex 21 Corps

15. Indep 2 55 ex 11 Corps & 340 ex 12 Corps

Mech Bde

16. Indep Inf 2 75 ex 12 Corps and 102 ex 14 Corps

Bde

17. Indep Mtn 1 9 ex CC

Bde

18. Indep 1 50 ex ASR

Para Bde

19. Res 5 81ex 14 Corps, 68, 79, ex 15 Corps Res, 163 ex 16 Corps
Inf/Mtn Res, 84 ex 9 Corps Res
Bdes

20. Amph 2 108 Mtn Bde ex ANC, 91 Amph Bde ex 54 DIV (RAMFOR)
Bdes

21. Msl Bde 7 332(Trg and Sp Gp),333,334, 335,336,444 & 555

Gps

Sec-2 ORBAT Op Comds

67. NC (Udhampur). Raised in 1972 by bifurcating WC. Area from Siachen
Glacier to Akhnur.

14 Corps Leh 16 Corps Nagrota

3 Inf Div Karu 10 Inf Div Akhnur

8 Mtn Div Kumathan 25 Inf Div Rajauri

g

15 Corps Srinagar 16 Corps Tps

19 Inf Div Baramula

28 Inf Div Kupwara

15 Corps Tps

RESTD
 208
RESTD

Comd Tps

68. WC (Chandimandar). Raised on 19 Sep 1947. Excl Akhnur to incl Fazilka

2 Corps Chandimandar 11 Corps Jullundur

1 Armd Div Patiala 7 Inf Div Ferozepur

14 RAPID (S) Clement Town 9 Inf Div Meerut

22 Inf Div Meerut 15 Inf Div Amritsar

Corps Tps Corps Tps

9 Corps Yol Comd Tps

26 Inf Div Jammu 40 Arty Div Ambala

29 Inf Div Mamun

Corps Tps

69. SWC (Jaipur). Raised in Sep 2004. Excl Fazilka to incl Bikaner.

1 Corps Mathura 10 Corps Bhatinda

33 Armd Div Hissar 16 Inf Div Ganganagar

4 Inf Div Allahabad 18 RAPID (D) Kota

23 Inf Div Ranchi 24 RAPID (D) Bikaner

Corps Tps Corps Tps

70. SC (Pune). It is the oldest comd. Excl Bikaner to incl Rann of Kutch.

12 Corps Jodhpur 21 Corps Bhopal

11 Inf Div Ahmedabad 31 Armd Div Jhansi

12 RAPID (D) Jodhpur 36 RAPID (S) Saugor

Corps Tps 54 Inf Div Secunderabad

Comd Tps Corps Tps

RESTD
 209
RESTD

41 rty Div

71. EC (Calcutta). Border with China, Myanmar and Bangladesh

3 Corps Rangapahar 33 Corps Khaprail

57 Mtn Div Liemakhong 17 Mtn Div Gangtok

56 inf div Lakhpali 20 Mtn Div Binaguri

2 Mtn Div Dinjan 27 Mtn Div Kalimpong

4 Corps Tezpur

21 Mtn Div Rangiya

5 Mtn Div Tenga

71 Inf Div MessMari

72. CC (Lucknow). 9 Indep Mtn Bde which also looks after Chinese Border in
Central Sec.
73. ASR.

6 Mtn Div Bareilly

50 (I) Para Bde Agra

74. Tri Svc Comd. ANC Port Blair (108 Mtn Bde).
75. SFC. New Delhi

RESTD
 210
RESTD

CHAPTER – 8
Armr
Sec-1 Fmns/Units 1.
Gen
76. IA has adopted the new concept of PAOs which req high deg of mob incl both
that of men and fighting machines.
77. IA has around 64 tk regts.
78. IA mech forces incl around 3000 MBT along with more than 1000 BMPs.
79. T-72 M1s are being up-grd to make them eff ni fighting machines while the T-90
fleet though cap of fighting in the dark, yet faces periodic ni sight malfunc in the heat of
Western Rajasthan desert.
80. SC RAPID is equipped with Arjun (2xregts) while almost all regts ex Armd Divs
have been equipped with T-90 tks. Bal Armd regts cont to op on T-72.
81. 300 lt tks are planned to be inducted in NC/EC.
82. Armd Div. Indian Armd Div is the mainstay of strike corps in conduct of its offn
roles. The armd regts provide the strike force to the div, with the APC borne inf
providing sp.
a. Role. Primary role of the armd div is to destr the en in fast moving/fluid
ops. The div may also be emp in seizing and holding critical areas.Its
firepower and mob make it the most suitable for attk, exploitation, ctr offn,
breakout and pursuit role.

RESTD
 211
RESTD

b. Cap. Div is cap of adv upto 100 kms per day against lt opposition in open
terr and a sustained cap of adv 30-50 kms per day against resistance. It
may be tasked for: -
(1) Rapid adv to destr en by conc shock action in pre-sel battle areas.
(2) B-out from a br H secured by other fmns and fight through en def
sys incl opposed xing of linear obs.
(3) Link up with AB fmns/heliborne tps.
(4) Maint of the momentum of aslt on en main def posns which have
partially/wholly been destr/ captured by other fmns.
c. Org. 1 x armd bde (2 armr regt and 2 MIB), 2 x armd bde(2 armr regt and
1 MIB), arty bde(4 x med regt sp), indep AD bde(AD regt sp, lt AD regt sp,
AD msl regt SP), indep recce sqn. (72 med guns and 144 tk tptrs).
83. Indep Armd Bde. IAB has its organic sp arms and svcs to make it tac and adm
self sufficient.
84. The org in terms of the Med regt(SP), indep Fd coy engrs, indep Fd amb, ASC
bn and indep Recce Sqn may vary in an indep Armd Bde in view of the role and aval of
resources.
85. Unlike armd div the indep armd bde will normally be gp with an inf div or work
indep with addl inf elms. IAB may take part in mob offn ops as conc force, after being
suitably gp with addl inf and sp arms.
86. More imp, all IABs will play key role in the IBG ops under new doctrine of PAOs
by virtue of its loc, size and mob.
87. Org. 3 armd regt, 1 MIB, 1 arty med regt, Indep Fd Coy Engrs(Mode B) Tk Tptr
coy (type A), remaining sig coy, fd amb, indep armd bde ord unit, indep armd wksp coy,
indep prov unit, FPO(A).
88. Armd Regt. The armd regt may either be part of an armd fmn as its main strike
elm or may be integral to an inf div. Indian armr regts are equipped with T-72, Arjun,
Vijayanta, T-55 and T-90 tks. Role of armd regt is to destr the en in both offn and def
ops.
a. Org. 3 AFV Sqn(4 x AFV Tps(3 tks / tp), AdmTp), HQ Sqn(inter comm
Tp, recce tp (3 x sec) and adm tp).
b. 45x Tks, 6xAPC, 3xARV, 28x Car 500 kg, 12 x 2.5 Ton, 37 x 5/7.5 Ton,
other 5, 6x MC.
c. Tk regt with T-72 tks have 12x 1 Ton and 39 x 3 Ton vehs.
89. Emp of Integral Armd Regt-Inf Div. Primary role of tk regt integral to the inf
div is A tk.In sec role, it may be used for C pen and C attk.
90. Indep Armd Sqn. Designed/specifically equipped to meet req of a particular
terr/op. Org is similar to that of a sqn in an armr regt.(4 tk tp, adm tp, URO EME ), 14 tk,
1 ARV, 2x Car 500 kg, 4 x 2.5 Ton, 7 x 5/7.5 Ton.

RESTD
 212
RESTD

91. Indep Recce Sqn. Indep recce sqn is auth at the scale of one per armd div.
These sqns op under the con of their resp div/comd HQ, which may emp them centrally
under their con, or they may sub allot some or all components of these sqns to the cbt
gp(s) under their comd. The primary task is close recce.(4 x Tk Tp(4 x tk/tp), Adm Tp),
18 tk,1 ARV.
92. Armd Del Regt (ADR). Resp for provn of rft for all types of A vehs incl tks,
ICVs, Arty (SP)/ AD (SP), BLT/BLGs, trawl eqpt and ARVs. The A vehs will be provided
from WWR of integ HQ of MoD Army. 4 x Armd del Sqn, 1 x HQ Sqn.
93. FMN(3 Armd Div, 7 indep Armd Bde, 2 indep Mech Bde), UNITS (64 x Armd
Regts, 5 x Horse regts,2 indep recce sqn and 3 x indep armd sqn).
94. MBT ARJUN
a. 124 Arjun mk 1 have been issued to 140 armd bde / 12 RAPID / 12 Corps/
SC.
b. With an addl order of more 124 Arjun tks mk 2 with ser production planned
wef 2014/15 incorporating over 90 maj / minor mod incl.
(1) Expl reactive Armr.
(2) Msl firing from main gun.
(3) Improved ni vision cap.
(4) Domestically built engine / tx.
c. It is being the proj that new MK-II Arjun will contain 90% indigenous
contents as oppsosed to 58% in Mk I version.
95. T-90 contract with Russia
a. Initial. Feb 2001 for import of 310 with aim of mfr under licence 1000 from
07/08.
b. New deal. Oct 06 with import of addl 347 with aim of mfr under licence
1000.
c. Out of planned induction of 1657 approx 770 have been inducted in IA.
d. Under licence production of 1000 at approx cost of US $2 billion is in
progress.
96. T-72
a. Work horse of IA since 1979.
b. Over 1800 T-72.
c. USSR origin.
d. Due to delay in design and dev of Arjuns, india started mfr of T-72
M1(Ajeya) in 1987 and cont till 1994.
e. Same is being upgrd under proj Rhino.
f. Reportedly over 900 tks have already been overhauled / upgrd.
97. BMP-II reportedly population is 2240, further plan is 824 in 7 yrs progm at OFP
MEDAK.
98. ICV

RESTD
 213
RESTD

a. Based on existing BMP chassis called BUSK (Urban Survival Kit).

b. Lt wt, adv armr and high str fibre nets.
c. Well utilized against Ts.
99. ARV
a. Will acquire 200 ARV under tfr of tech contract b/w polish firm Burmar and
Indian firm Bharat Earth Mover Ltd(BEML)in next three yrs.
b. Rec with T-72 tks c. Present 354 ARV of same origin from Poland and 156
VT-72B ARV.
100. Bharat Dynamics Ltd (BDL) has started production of imaging infra red (IIR)
seekers for 3rd generation Nag ATGM. Fire and forget cap upto rg of 4 km. The seekers
will be used for dev trials of hel launched HELINA msl sys.
101. Procurement of Spike ATGM
a. Israel’s Rafael Adv Def Sys is expected to get $ 1 billion order for sup of
3rd gen Spike ATGM to IA possibly due to US reluctance to share tfr of
tech of Javelin ATGM.
b. Intends to mount on Russian BMPs.
c. Rg og 2.4 km, day and ni firing cap; 3 G active – passive fir and forgot sys
with 90% accy 27.

CHAPTER – 9
ARTY
Sec-1 Fmns/Units
102. At the time of partition, IA inherited eight fd, two para fd, one med, one hy and
two A tk regts, all gp under one Arty HQ.
103. Indian Arty started making progress, after it suffered hy in Sino-Indian conflict in
1962 (Re structured / Re equipped).
104. In 1985, a force dev and modernization plan for the yr 2000 was launched.
105. Previously held msl gps under Arty Div have been det to Strat Forces Comd.
106. Presently IA has three Arty Div i.e 40,41 & 42 Arty Div on the orbat of WC,SC
and SW comd.
Role, Function and Concept of Emp
107. Role
a. Main function of arty is to estb fire supremacy in the B fd so that en can
neither interfere with their ops nor dev his own ops effectively.
b. Of late Indians have started orchestrating arty as the primary fire power
means for degradation and shaping of the B fd by attk through fire power
in all stages of the battle in conjuc with other cbt elms. Arty fulfils this
function by destr/neut en gr/air wpns by inflicting cas/damage to his tps
and eqpt, thereby breaking his will to fight.

RESTD
 214
RESTD

c. Maj roles of arty incl: -

(1) Provn of close and gen fire sp to inf/armr to overcome en
opposition.
(2) Loc en wpn/other tgts for CB.
108. Org. Basic arty gps are inf/armr/RAPID/mtn div arty bdes which are part of
every div and titled after the fmn they are part of: -
a. Arty Div. 3 Arty Div
(1) Firepower throughout the depth of cbt zone.
(2) Estb svy grid over a frontage of 200 km and depth of 250 km.
(3) Long rg fire aslt and saturate area tgts.
(4) Coord of all fire power, comd and con addl gun bdes and acquire /
analyse surv and targeting inputs.
(5) Org
1. 2 x Arty Bde(3 x Med Regt)
2. Comp Arty Bde
aa. 2 x Rkt Regt, Smerch & Pinaka or BM 21
bb. 1 x Msl(BrahMos) Regt.
cc. 1 x SATA Regt).
b. Corps Arty Bde
(1) It is gen the Corps Res for supplementing the div arty as req.
(2) Components of corps arty bde vary, however essential elm incl: -
(a) 1-3 Med regt.
(b) Lt Med regts.
(c) Air OP flt.
(d) Corps SATA regt/bty
c. Armd Div Arty Bde. The armd div arty bde consists of two Fd/Med
Regts (SP), two Med Regts, AOP flt (att) and Svy Sec (att). 4 x Med
Regt(SP).
d. Inf Div Arty Bde. The org of an Inf div arty bde is such that each unit is
cap of providing DS to each inf bde separately. Normally all the arty units
are emp on div basis. Three Fd, one Med Regt, AOP flt (att) and SATA
Bty.
e. Mtn Div Arty Bde. Org of Mtn Div Arty Bde is suited to the tac reqs of fire
power in the mtn terr. Three Mtn Regts , 1 x Lt Regt, 1 x Med Regt & AOP
flt (att).
f. Indep Arty Bde. It is termed as Army arty which have no std composn
and gen comprises 3-4 fd/med/mtn/hy regts and a rkt regt. An indep arty
bde may have 2-5 Fd or Med regts.

RESTD
 215
RESTD

g. RAPID Arty Bde. 6 total.1x Med Regt, 2x Fd Regt, 1x Composite Regt

(3x Med Btys and 1x MBRL Bty), 1 x AD Regt, SATA Regt and Air OP
(Flt). h.
h. Arty Units. Are gp in regts, btys and tps.
i. Lt regt has auth of two btys with 6x 120 mm Mors.
j. Fd regt has auth of 3 x Btys(2 tp with 3 guns each).
k. BrahMos and SMERCH Regt has auth of 3 x Btys(4 x lcr / bty).
l. Pinaka Regt has auth of 3 x Btys(6 x lcr / bty) m.
m. Hy Mor Regt has auth of 3 x Btys(6 x 160 mm Tampella Mors), each bty
has 2 tp.
n. Arty Div SATA Regt
(1) 1 x Comp Bty
(a) Comp Tp
aa. SAI Sec.
bb. SURV Sec.
cc. MET Sec.
(b) UAV Tp. 8 x Heron
(2) 1 x SATA Bty
(a) SRG Tp.
(b) Surv Tp(2 x MRBFSR).
(c) WLR TP(2 x WLRs).
(3) Corps SATA Regt
(a) SR Bty
aa. SR Tp(Comm Flash Spotting Tp).
bb. SR Tp(1 x recorder).
cc. BHQ incl Flash / Spotting increament.
(b) Svy Bty
aa. 3 x Svy Tp(2 x Sec).
o. Div SATA Bty
(1) Svy Tp.
(2) Comp Tp (2 x SR Sec).
(3) Rdr Sec

Sec-2 Emp of Arty

109. Concept of Emp. Emp in full spectrum of B fd activities: -
a. Surv.
b. Fire Power(Massed Fire & Precision Strike).
c. Nuet & Destruction / Degradation.
d. Sp arms to arms to decision.

RESTD
 216
RESTD

e. In the initial stages of battle, Arty carries out cont attrition and intd of en
forces incl armr in the depth areas.
f. Tgts are acquired by a comb of air recce, surv devices, ptls, SBPs and
engaged at max range.
g. The fire tasks also incl suppression of en’s AD means and his gun areas.
110. SATA Regt. Indian arty had two corps loc regts and 16 SATA btys, which are
likely to be inc by 12 SATA regts and 32 SATA Btys with further accretion planned upto
2017.
a. UAVs. One tp per SATA Regt / Bty of searcher and Heron UAVs ex Israel
is being auth to Corps SATA Regts.
b. Sound Rg. Indians have sound rg set comparable to our own sound rg.
c. Radars
(1) SATA Regts /btys are gen equipped with FAX-150, Stentor (long rg,
Cymbeline at Div lvl and EL/M 2140 (med rg) rdrs.
(2) 32 FAX 150 MK-1 and FAX 150-3A are replaced by 30x UK
Cymbeline radar.
(3) 12x US AN/TPQ-37 has been acquired from USA having longer rg
and accy.
(4) Moreover, met rdrs (DIGICORA) are also auth / held.
111. Scaling – Arty Regts
a. Inf Div. 4 x 155 mm (Towed) Med Regts.
b. Mtn Div / Inf Div in Mtns. 3x155 mm Med Regts and 1 x Lt Regts.
c. Armd Div. 4 x 155 mm SP(Tr or Wh) Regts.
d. RAPID(D/S). 4 x 155 mm Mtd Gun Sys (MGS) regts.
e. Arty Div. 2 x Gun Bdes of 3 MGS Regt, Comp Bde of Smerch, Pinaka
Regts, BrahMos & SATA Regts.
f. (I) Arty Bde(Corps Arty Bde). 3x 155 mm (Towed / MGS) Med Regts
and 1 x Rkt Regt(Pivot Corps to have 2 x med & 2 x rkt Regts).
g. (I) Armd / Mech Bde. 1 x 155 mm MGS / SP (Wh).
h. Existing Profile
(1) 229 Arty Regts.
(2) 12 SATA Regt, 32 SATA Bty.
(3) 3x Smerch , 4x Pinaka, 3x BrahMos Regts.
(4) 11 x 122 mm , 51 x 130 mm, 2x 130(SP), 21x 155 mm BOFORS
and 9x 155 mm SOLTAM.
i. Depl Timings

Ser Units / Fmn Day Ni

(1) Fd / Med 1 to 2 hrs 2 to 3 hrs
(2) Hy 2 to 3 hrs 3 to 5 hrs
(3) Div Arty 3 to 4 hrs 5 to 6 hrs

RESTD
 217
RESTD

j. Depl timings of Tgt Acqn Units

(1) SR Long Base - 10 – 12 Hrs.
(2) SR Short Base - 2 – 3 Hrs.
(3) Long flash spotting base - 6 – 8 hrs.
(4) Short flash spotting base - 30 mins – 1 hrs.
(5) Rdr - 1-1.5 hrs.
(6) Met Sec - upto 1 hr.
k. Normally a loc device can work out the loc of tgt within 5-7 mins.
112. Arty Fmns
a. Arty Div - 3
b. Comp Arty Bde (Arty Div) - 3.
c. Arty Bde ex Arty Div - 6.
d. Corps Arty Bde - 9.
e. Indep Arty Bdes - 2.
f. Armd Div Arty Bdes - 3.
g. RAPID Arty Bde - 6.
h. Inf Div Arty Bde - 17.
i. Mtn Div Arty Bdes - 10.
113. Update – Acqn / Collaborations
a. MBRL Pinaka
(1) 3 x regts with likely inc upto 10.
(2) OFAJ(Amba Jhari) is upgrd to inc mfr from 1000 to 5000 every.
b. MLRS Smerch
(1) 12 tube 300 mm smerch with 90 KM rg with capable of launching
12 rkts simultaneously in 38 sec.
(2) Russian origin, contract (62/38)signed in 2006.
(3) 3 rd cty to receive after Algeria and Kuwait.
(4) 3 x regts raised.
c. 155 mm Ultra Lt Hows
(1) US DEF SCTY COOP AGENCY.
(2) 145x M777, 155 MM ULH BY 2014 loaded with Laser Inertial Arty
Pointing Sys(LINAPS) and associated tech, log, maint and trg sp.
d. Upgrd of 130 mm Arty Guns to 155 mm
(1) Out of 400 x 130 mm M46 Russian med guns, 180 guns have been
upgraded to 155 mm with upgrd kits imported from Soltam of Israel.
(2) The new barrel length of 45 cal has enhanced the rg of the gun to
about 40 kms with extended rg ammo.
e. Air Lifted Fd Guns

RESTD
 218
RESTD

(1) 105 mm Lt Fd Gun(LFG) to mtn posts by gun carriage factory of

OFB.
(2) OFB has also dev a mtd version of 105 mm gun which can be
placed on a trk and fire.
f. Cargo Ammo
(1) India is planning to enter into a first ever jt def production venture
with Israel to produce cargo ammo b/w the Khamaria Ord Factory,
India and Israeli Mil Industries.
(2) Cargo ammo can be fired both from arty guns/ tks.
g. Laser dazzler have been const of two types. Rg 50-500 m. Suitable for ctr
insur ops. Indigenously dev. Produce randomly a flickering green laser
output that is sufficient to cause temp blindness or dis orientation. Dont
cause perm blindness.
h. 20 x Colour throwing guns for PMF and police depl in IOK while handling
protestors. Dev by DRDO. Rg upto 100 m.

CHAPTER – 13
Indian Inf
Sec-1 Overview
Gen
114. Indians are seeking to acquire strat third dimension cap through the use of hels
and para / spec forces.
115. Types of Fmns.
a. Inf Div. Similar to own.
b. Mtn Div. Presently 10 mtn divs.
c. RAPIDs. Two types, RAPID(D) and RAPID(S)
d. Indep Para Bde. 1x indep Para bde, besides holding indep inf, Mech
and Mtn Bdes.
e. Amph Bde. 108 Mtn Bde (ANC) has been converted into Amph Bde and
91 Inf Bde ex 54 Inf Div/ 21 Corps is in the process of conversion.

RESTD
 219
RESTD

116. Types of Inf Bn

a. SIB. Designed to op in plains as part of Inf div.
b. Inf Bn Mod M. Part of Mtn div.
c. Inf Bn Mod D. Designed to op in desert terr.
d. Inf Bn Mod Q. Org to op in Andaman and Nicobar Island.
e. Mech Inf Bn. Part of armd and mech fmns based on ICVs.
f. Para Inf Bn. Part of para bde.
g. Para Cdo Bn. For cdo tasks.
h. Scout Bn. For mtn terr along northern border.
i. R&S Bn. Separate estb, Wh and Tr.
j. ATGM Bn. Org to provide A tk cap.

Sec-2 Role, Cap and Task of Inf Div

Gen
117. Inf div is cap of fighting indep or as part of a Corps and designed for ops in the
plains yet it can op equally eff in semi-desert, desert, jungle and hilly terrain with some
org changes and modifications. The inf div as a whole can undertake sustained ops
over prolonged pds.
Cap
118. Offn Ops
a. Adv. It is cap of adv 25x kms in a day as a one time cap with a total cap
of 50x kms in 5x days against lt oppn. This may imply Quick Attk upto
bn/bde lvl enctr battle when en defs are not well coord/prep, en is in C
tps/screens/delaying posn or detailed recce of obs or def is not req.
b. Attk. An inf div is cap of launching an attk with 2x bdes at a time. It may
be given the fol msns: -
(1) B-in and capture of en defs which may involve opposed Xing of
natural/artificial obs.
(2) Holding of a firm base from which further offn ops may be carried
out.
c. Comb Ops. Fol tasks inconjunc with Armr/Heliborne force: -
(1) Adv on two axes. It is cap of det an adequate force to threaten
the en’s rear and flks in conjunc with the main effort of the
remaining div.
(2) Fol up and sp adv by armr/mech forces, reduce def by-passed by
the former and secure flks.
(3) Enctr Xing of dry/water obs incl ops in conjunc with hel/AB forces
with engr sp from Corps resources.

RESTD
 220
RESTD

119. Def Ops. An inf div can hold a compact div def sec 20-30 kms wide. When
def oriented A tk obs exists, it can hold an extended def system from 60-80 kms in
width. It is cap of creating a force for C pen and C attk from within its own resources,
based on an armd regt with inf having compatible mob.
120. Wdr. Div can undertake wdr upto 32 kms in a day when tpt is aval and 16 kms
(max) if tpt is unaval.
121. Arty Bde has 3 x Fd Regt, 1 x Lt Regt, 1 x Med Regt and SATA Bty.
122. ASC Bn has 1 x Indep Tk Tptr Pl, 2 x MT Coy and Sup Coy.

Sec-3 Role, Cap and Task of Mtn Div

Gen
123. Mtn Div is cap of fighting indep or as part of a Corps at alt upto 6000 ms. It is
primarily designed for ops in mtns however, it can op equally eff in the jungles. With
some org changes such as provision of addl A tk wpns and mech tpt, can op in plains.
124. Adv
a. Can adv at an avg rate of 8-10 kms per day on more than one axes, one
of which may be a mule tr on which a bde gp can be emp.
b. Can be emp for a pd of 7 days i.e. a turn around of 3 days from the rd H,
one bde gp on mule pack basis for an indep msn, and one inf bn gp also
on man pack basis for exec of out flk mov.
125. Attk. Mtn div is cap of launching a ph deliberate attk with one bde at a time and
with one more bde sent out as an outflk mov on a mule tr to asst attk on main axis. Bde
on the subsidiary axis, can be log self contained for max 48 hrs, and is kept within range
of arty sp from guns depl for main attk.
126. Def. It can hold a sec upto 30 kms in width/depth, and on an A tk obs upto 60-
80 km frontage indep or as part of a corps. Apart from holding gr, the div is cap of
undertaking ltd offn action to prevent adversary’s offn design.
127. Org. Org is evolved from Inf Div, catering the effs of mtn terrain and the
problems of mob, adm and comm. MT has been reduced and AT has been auth to give
the div a certain deg of mule pack cap.
128. Notes
a. Mtn Bde. Has less tpt as compared to inf bde HQ and reqs addl tpt to
make it mob.
b. Arty. Fd regts are equipped with 75/25 mm How or 105 mm LFG. It is not
auth a SATA bty and CB tp but has a svy sec.
c. Ord
(1) One ammo stock and svy sec is auth which holds 1500 ton ammo.
(2) DOC can provide 1x det less pers, holding 500 tons of ammo for
short pds.
(3) Two mob dry cleaning secs are auth

RESTD
 221
RESTD

d. EME. Only one rec pl is auth instead of 2 rec pls of an inf div.
e. RVFC. 2x Mob vet sec are provided.
f. AT coy has 288 GS mule auth, 3 x Mtn Bde and Arty Bde (3 x Fd, Med &
Lt Regt)

Sec-4 RAPID (S) and RAPID (D)

Gen
129. RAPIDs have been org to provide inf with mnvr elms which have swift X cty cap
to exploit opportunities. RAPIDs are org to op in conjunc with the armd and mech
fmns.RAPID (S) is gp with offn fmns and RAPID (D) for def bal.
Msn/Tasks
130. Def Ops. RAPIDs have only two inf bdes for holding gr therefore significant
gaps, have to be accepted within & b/w defs sec and areas. The disadvs are expected
to be offset by improvement in surv, indir FSP, C Tps and armr hy mob res. Ltd pen in
tac less imp areas will be ctr with the aggressive use of mech forces.
131. Fwd Z. Superior surv will ensure E Wng and ident of axes of adv/attk.
Covering forces, though based primarily on the R&S bn, may get elms of armr. Armr
mob, flexibility and enhanced A tk cap will enable eff disruption of the attks by mech
spearheads.
132. Def-Obs Ridden Terr
a. Def Based on Obs
(1) Initial occupation of def on main obs will be based on Tac & Tech
aprc of en’s likely br H sites.
(2) Covering forces ident axes of attk and impose delay allowing the
def to adjust disposns laterally on the main obs occupying ctgy
posns.
(3) Aval of mech inf forces will permit rapid occupation of ctgy posns in
gaps.
(4) Limit of pen is likely to remain along the line of main obs.
b. Def based on Key Terr behind Fwd Obs. Str covering and PMF may
be depl on the fwd obs to disrupt aslt across the obs and act as a trip wire.
Def in depth will be based on ITG/obs denying key terr/apchs and
providing firm bases for offn mnvr. Limit of pen will be in relation to key
terr.
133. Def-Nodal Pt Concept. There will be a dec in the overall no of nodal/str pts
that can be occupied in a div def sec however, battle of gaps can be fought more
eff.Armr may be aval for dedicated aloc to sel nodal pts in an acceptable time frame.
134. Emp of Armr Hy Mob Res. The Amrd bde less elms altd to the inf bdes will
be aval for Spoiling attks, C attks to destr the attk/eliminate pen and contain en armr
pen/B-out by occupying blocking posns.

RESTD
 222
RESTD

135. Offn Ops

a. Attk Across a Linear Obs. RAPIDs are cap of undertaking ‘leaning
on ops’ without maj aloc of resources from outside in which Armd bde can
adv rapidly to the obs on multiple, x cty axes of adv. Addl forces will be
made aval for the creation of a div inf res, where nec for RAPIDs. When
two linear obs are req to be tackled in quick succession, tasks are better
performed by an integral armd bde.
b. Fol up Sp Ops. Armd bde can adv rapidly to rel elms of spearhead or
b-out force, isolate key objs and asst inf bdes in their reduction. It can
provide a safe corridor and armr hy mob pivots for conduct of reaction
tasks using inf pivots for aggressive mnvr.
c. Attk Against a Nodal Pt. RAPIDs can conduct offn ops against relatively
deep objs in which armd bde will lead the adv to the obj, drive in minor
oppn and protective elms, isolate the obj, provide a firm base and asst inf
bdes in its capture.
d. Ltd Offn Ops. Armd bde of RAPID has enhanced offn cap of Corps
in ltd offn ops in sp of strat ctr offn. In addn, the Armd bde will facilitate adv
and capture of objs by RAPID in ltd offn ops to improve the def posture.
During consolidation, it will improve reaction to and defeat en C attks.
e. RAPID(S) has 2 x inf Bdes(3 inf Bn / Bde), 1 x Armd Bde(2 x Armd Regt &
2 x Mech Bn), 1 x Arty Bde(2 x fd, 2 x Med), 1 x Engr Regt, Sig Regt, ASC
Bn, AMC Bn and EME Bn.
f. RAPID(D) has 2 x inf Bdes(3 inf Bn / Bde), 1 x Armd Bde(2 x Armd Regt &
1 x Mech Bn, 1 x R&S Bn), 1 x Arty Bde(2 x fd, 1 x Med, 1 x Comp Regt,
AD Regt, 1 x SATA Regt & AOP Flt), 1 x Engr Regt(incl NBC Pl), Sig
Regt, ASC Bn, AMC Bn and EME Bn

Sec-5 Para Bde

Gen
136. Para Bde is trained/equipped both for AB and Air Aslt role. It comprises a Bde
HQ, three Para Bns and Sp arms.At present IA has only 1x Para bde ie 50(I) Para Bde
part of ASR.
137. Role/Msn
a. Tasks when Coop with Main Land Force
(1) Facilitate the task of main force by creating a rear threat by
seizing/holding dominating gr, vital to the adv of the main force with
linkup in such a sit is normally planned within 72 hrs.

RESTD
 223
RESTD

(2) Divert/block apch of en res to the main battle, or protect the flanks
of the main aslt.
(3) Attk en’s rear HQs/comcens, Neut en defs in area sel for seaborne
landing, delay/cut off en retreat and reinforce gr tps already in
action.
b. Indep Tasks. Seize/hold an isolated areaagainst ltd oppn for use as
a land/air/sea base for attk on the en defs/comm Z and Raid en territory to
capture material or destr instl.
138. Trg. All para bns are specialized in AB ops, however, they can undertake
heliborne ops whenever req. Normally, para bns are expected to undertake a march of
15 -20 kms from the DZ, after getting org into tac gp, attk the given obj and retain it
without any sp for 24 to 48 hrs, in order to enable strike fmn to linkup with them.
139. Amph Bde. Two
a. 108 Mtn Bde. ANC, 2 x inf bn.
b. 91 inf Amph Bde. 54 / 21 Corps/ SC, loc at Trivinderam, Participated in
Varun Shalti ex.
c. Role (1) Convention Ops (2) Out of Area Ctgy Tasks. Peace Keeping &
Disaster rel.
d. Tasks
(1) Convention Ops
(a) Augment def of island.
(b) Capture island territories and / or off shore assets from
adversary.
(c) Offn ops
aa. Pre emptive occupation of area of strat / op interest.
bb. Strat / op deception.
(2) OOAC
(a) Deterrence in Indian Ocean Region.
(b) Asst neighbors in maint law and order.
(c) Peacekeeping / stabilization ops.
(d) Disaster mgmt / rel ops.
(e) Aid to people of Indian origin in Indian Ocean Region.
(f) Prot of Strat Interest.
(3) Out of Area Ctgy Tasks. Peace Keeping & Disaster rel.
e. Amph bde has 3 x Amph Bns, 1 x Mech Bn, (I) Armd Sqn & 1 x SF Team.
f. Indep Mech Bde has 1 Armd Regt, 2 x MIB, 1 x Med Regt(SP).
g. Indep Inf Bde has 3 x Inf bns, 1 x Fd Regt, indep Fd wksp Coy(Type A).
h. Indep Mtn Bde has 3 x Inf Bn(Mod M), 1 x Fd Regt.

Sec – 6 Inf Units

RESTD
 224
RESTD

140. SIB. The inf bn is a self contained unit and can administer itself without asst. Its
integral fire power makes it capable of holding gr or mtg an attk. There are three other
types of inf bns M, D and Q.
141. Movs
a. Speed
(1) 4.5 kms (3 miles) per hr in plains by day and half of this speed by ni
x cty.
(2) In mtn terrain, addl allce of 1 hr for every 300 m of ascent and 450
m of descent.
b. Dist. 30-40 kms in 24 hrs (actual marching time of 8-10 hrs).
c. Loads. Rfn carries 22.5 kgs in battle order and 32 kgs in FSMO.
d. Indian inf bn has no TCVs auth. Only A Tk pl and Mor Pl are auth with
vehs.
142. Org Inf Bns
143. MIB. Mech inf is based on the need to provide protection, added mob, radio
comm and fire power to enable inf to op eff in mob ops. The Inf Cbt Veh (ICV) provides
the inf with the basic needs of protection, mob and fire power so as to enable it to op eff
in close coord with armr.
a. Primary. Close with the en in coord with armr to cause destruction/
capture of en.
b. Sdry
(1) Mopping up.
(2) Hold gr temp.
(3) Recce.
(4) Estb Br H across A Tk obs.
(5) Spoiling attk / deliberate C Attk.
144. ATGM Bn. ATGM Bn (Milan) is org to augment the A tk fire in a Corps Def Z.
Bn is org into a HQ Coy and 5x Msl Coys.
145. Scout Bn(LADAKH)
a. Scout Bns are trained/org to op in mtn terr along Northern Borders.
Garhwal and Kumaoun / Dogra.
b. For op cmt as Mod Q Ladakh Scouts Bn are auth addl almt of one RMO,
one NA & one AEC Hav to each coy.
146. Para Bn. Para bn is spec unit org, equipped and trained for AB tasks. The
tac emp of a para bn is the same as a normal inf bn after it has been reorg for an AB
aslt landing. Para inf is not same as air transportable inf. Para bns can be tasked for
Ops in conjunc with main gr forces, indep ops of strat nature, Guerrilla activity within en
occupied territory and Spec IS duties.
147. Para Cdo Bn. It is org into a bn HQ, an adm team and three Aslt Teams/
cdo gps. Each cdo gp consists of three AsltTps/ cdo teams and an Wpn Tp.

RESTD
 225
RESTD

148. R&S Bn. R&S bns have been raised to provide adequate mob, fire power
and surv cap and have replaced the mot bn. Their def roles incl surv, A tk def and
covering force ops, while offn tasks incl loc/intd of en res and protection of flks. R&S bn
may op dir under the Div HQ or be placed UC a Mech Bde.
149. Sp Coy Model 4B. Is the latest dev in the reorg of inf bn which will replace the
HQ coy of inf bn. It comprises Sig, Mor, Aslt, A tk and Ghattak Pls.

Sec-8 Future Inf Sldr as a Sys (F-INSAS)

Gen
150. F-INSAS aims to utilize adv techs to enhance caps of an inf sldr, and is based on
the the fact that ‘inf centric’ pattern of warfare will predominate the conflicts at present
and even in foreseeable future.
151. Obj. To enhance the caps of inf sldr in terms of lethality, mob, survivability,
sustainability, sit awareness and battle comd.
152. Concept. F-INSAS intends making the Indian sldr as ‘self contained fighting
machine’ and envisages Indian sldr as ultimate modern inf sldr making him ‘multi msn
and multi role war fighter’. Plan is to fd, by 2020 ‘Super Sldr’ who could read the battle
envmt instantly and respond with speed, precision and lethality.
153. Essential Aspects of F-INSAS
a. Wpn Sub Sys. Robust, highly reliable, modular and simple wpn sys
to incl variants i.e. carbine / micro aslt rifle, aslt rifle and LMG. Rifle
integrated sight would be the next generation sight sys.
b. Helmet Sub Sys. Lt wt and comfortable helmet made of adv materials
to provide ballistic protection and also house the microphone unit for the
radio and Heads Up Display (HUD).
c. Cptr and Software Sub Sys. Sldr’s PC will be att to the load bg
backpack frame with hisradio and GPS integrated into it.
d. Radio Sub Sys. Ability to transmit and receive complex voice and data
sigs.
e. Protective Clo/Indl Eqpt Sub Sys. Clo would be wpf, auto cam cbt
uniform. It will provide protection against NBC agents. Smart Vest will be
worn by sldrs and will house sensors to monitor the vital signs like ECG,
BP etc and will have the cap to ident bullet pen areas.
154. F-INSAS proj aims to equip 10x Inf Bns for user trials by 2015 and transform all
inf Bns into high- tech / self contained outfits by 2020.
155. SATHI is World 1st tac Cptr with wrls LAN.
156. Features of SATHI incls secure comm, decoy mode of op, self / remote destr if
falls into en hands.
157. MILE would enable the sldr to carry sufficient ld in an efficient Bio Mech manner.

RESTD
 226
RESTD

158. The IA plans to induct three mini UAVs in each bn with an op rg of 8-10 km and
flt endurance exceeding three hrs. Coupled with 12th plan.
159. Mini UAV NETRA can fly in all weather except rain.
160. American M-4 Aslt Rifles are being inducted for spec forces.

RESTD